Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Aspen Decision
Analyzer 2004.2
User Guide
Copyright
Version Number: 2004.2
October 2005
Copyright © 2005 Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

ACOL™, ACX™, APLE™, Aspen Adsim™, Aspen Aerotran™, Aspen
CatRef®, Aspen Chromatography®, Aspen Custom Modeler®, Aspen Decision
Analyzer™, Aspen Dynamics®, Aspen Enterprise Engineering™, Aspen FCC®,
Aspen Hetran™, Aspen Hydrocracker®, Aspen Hydrotreater™, Aspen Icarus
Process Evaluator™, Aspen Icarus Project Manager™, Aspen Kbase™, Aspen
Plus®, Aspen Plus® HTRI®, Aspen OLI™, Aspen OnLine®, Aspen PEP
Process Library™, Aspen Plus BatchFrac™, Aspen Plus Optimizer™, Aspen Plus
RateFrac™, Aspen Plus SPYRO®, Aspen Plus TSWEET®, Aspen Split™,
Aspen WebModels™, Aspen Pinch®, Aspen Properties™, Aspen SEM™, Aspen
Teams™, Aspen Utilities™, Aspen Water™, Aspen Zyqad™, COMThermo®,
COMThermo TRC Database™, DISTIL™, DISTIL Complex Columns
Module™, FIHR™, FLARENET™, FRAN™, HX-Net®, HX-Net Assisted
Design Module™, Hyprotech Server™, HYSYS®, HYSYS Optimizer™, ACM
Model Export™, HYSYS Amines™, HYSYS Crude Module™, HYSYS Data
Rec™, HYSYS DMC+ Link™, HYSYS Dynamics™, HYSYS Electrolytes™,
HYSYS Lumper™, HYSYS Neural Net™, HYSYS Olga Transient™, HYSYS
OLGAS 3-Phase™, HYSYS OLGAS™, HYSYS PIPESIM Link™, HYSYS
Pipesim Net™, HYSYS PIPESYS™, HYSYS RTO™, HYSYS Sizing™,
HYSYS Synetix Reactor Models™, HYSYS Tacite™, HYSYS Upstream™,
HYSYS for Ammonia Plants™, MUSE™, PIPE™, Polymers Plus®, Process
Manuals™, Process Tools™, ProFES 2P Tran™, ProFES 2P Wax™, ProFES 3P
Tran™, ProFES Tranflo™, STX™, TASC-Thermal™, TASC-Mechanical™, the
aspen leaf logo, Plantelligence, and Enterprise Optimization are trademarks or
registered trademarks of Aspen Technology, Inc., Cambridge, MA.
All other brand and product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of
their respective companies.
This document is intended as a guide to using AspenTech's software. This
documentation contains AspenTech proprietary and confidential information and
may not be disclosed, used, or copied without the prior consent of AspenTech or
as set forth in the applicable license agreement. Users are solely responsible for
the proper use of the software and the application of the results obtained.
Although AspenTech has tested the software and reviewed the documentation, the
sole warranty for the software may be found in the applicable license agreement
between AspenTech and the user. ASPENTECH MAKES NO WARRANTY OR
REPRESENTATION, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, WITH RESPECT
TO THIS DOCUMENTATION, ITS QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Contents
Introduction 1-1
Main Features................................................................................................................... 1-3
Links to Process Simulator Software Programs................................................... 1-3
Mapping of Simulator Models to Process Equipment Types .............................. 1-3
Sizing of Equipment ............................................................................................ 1-3
Capital Investment and Schedules: Engineer-Procure-Construct ........................ 1-3
Development of Operating Costs......................................................................... 1-3
Alternative Capacities and Locations .................................................................. 1-3
Detailed, Interactive Process Economics............................................................. 1-4
Links to Project Evaluation Programs ................................................................. 1-4
Understanding Analyzer’s Project Workflow.................................................................. 1-5
The Guide......................................................................................................................... 1-7
Organization......................................................................................................... 1-7
Related Documentation.................................................................................................... 1-8
Installation Manual .............................................................................................. 1-8
Release Notes....................................................................................................... 1-8
Icarus Reference................................................................................................... 1-8
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings ................................................................. 1-8
Technical Support ............................................................................................................ 1-8
Online Technical Support Center......................................................................... 1-8
Getting Started 2-1

Starting Analyzer ............................................................................................................. 2-1
Starting a Project Scenario............................................................................................... 2-3
Creating a New Project Scenario ......................................................................... 2-3
Importing an Analyzer 2.0B Project Scenario ..................................................... 2-7
Opening an Existing Project Scenario ............................................................................. 2-9
Understanding the Icarus Interface ................................................................................ 2-11
Project Explorer ................................................................................................. 2-12
Main Window .................................................................................................... 2-13
List View............................................................................................................ 2-15
Palette................................................................................................................. 2-17
Properties Window............................................................................................. 2-19
Customizing the Icarus Interface ....................................................................... 2-20
Analyzer's Toolbar............................................................................................. 2-21
Analyzer Menu Bar........................................................................................................ 2-23
Working with Project Scenarios .................................................................................... 2-26
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • iii

Saving Project Scenarios.................................................................................... 2-26
Deleting Project Scenarios................................................................................. 2-27
Salvaging Project Scenarios............................................................................... 2-28
Unlocking Project Scenarios.............................................................................. 2-29
Copying Project Directories............................................................................... 2-30
Preferences..................................................................................................................... 2-31
General............................................................................................................... 2-31
Forms ................................................................................................................. 2-33
Backup ............................................................................................................... 2-33
Process ............................................................................................................... 2-34
Locations............................................................................................................ 2-35
Logging .............................................................................................................. 2-37
Defining the Project Basis 3-1

Project Properties ............................................................................................................. 3-3
General Project Data ........................................................................................................ 3-4
Basis for Capital Costs..................................................................................................... 3-6
Input Units of Measure Customization ................................................................ 3-6
Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization ............................................. 3-8
General Specs..................................................................................................... 3-10
Construction Workforce..................................................................................... 3-19
Indexing ............................................................................................................. 3-23
Process Design ............................................................................................................... 3-27
Simulator Type and Simulator File Name ......................................................... 3-27
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs ..................................................... 3-27
Project Component Map Specifications............................................................. 3-30
Design Criteria ................................................................................................... 3-36
Utility Specifications ......................................................................................... 3-49
Investment Analysis....................................................................................................... 3-54
Investment Parameters ....................................................................................... 3-54
Operating Unit Costs.......................................................................................... 3-59
Raw Material Specifications .............................................................................. 3-61
Product Specifications ....................................................................................... 3-65
Developing Streams ....................................................................................................... 3-69
Viewing or Modifying an Existing Stream........................................................ 3-69
Mixture Specs Dialog Box................................................................................. 3-73
Estimation of Utility Usage and Resulting Costs in Analyzer........................... 3-74
Stream Connectivity........................................................................................... 3-75
Creating A New Stream ..................................................................................... 3-76
Deleting a Stream............................................................................................... 3-79
Specification Libraries ................................................................................................... 3-80
Customizing Specification Libraries.................................................................. 3-81
Selecting to Use a Different Specification File.................................................. 3-84
Changing File Directory Location ..................................................................... 3-84
Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 4-1
iv • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Preparing Simulation Reports .......................................................................................... 4-2
Aspen Plus Report Generation............................................................................. 4-2
Aspen Plus – Analyzer Simulator link................................................................. 4-5
ChemCAD Report Generation............................................................................. 4-6
HYSIM Report Generation .................................................................................. 4-8
HYSYS Report Generation................................................................................ 4-10
SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Report Generation ................................... 4-13
Loading Simulation Data ............................................................................................... 4-15
Viewing Data Derived from Simulator.............................................................. 4-17
Working with Block Flow Diagrams............................................................................. 4-18
Displaying the Block Flow Diagram ................................................................. 4-18
The Drag & Find Feature................................................................................... 4-19
Accessing Commands in the Block Flow Diagram ........................................... 4-20
Zooming............................................................................................................. 4-20
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project Components .............................................. 4-23
Component Status .............................................................................................. 4-30
Deleting Mappings............................................................................................. 4-31
Specifying Additional Components............................................................................... 4-45
Working with Process Flow Diagrams .......................................................................... 4-46
Editing the Layout.............................................................................................. 4-46
Setting Grid Properties....................................................................................... 4-48
Editing Connectivity .......................................................................................... 4-49
Adding a Stream ................................................................................................ 4-50
Drawing a Disconnected Stream........................................................................ 4-52
Working with Streams ....................................................................................... 4-52
Defining Project Components 5-1

Adding an Area ................................................................................................................ 5-3
Adding a Project Component........................................................................................... 5-4
Method 1: Dragging a Component from the Palette............................................ 5-4
Method 2: Using the Pop-Up Menu..................................................................... 5-5
Entering Component Specifications ................................................................................ 5-7
Defining Installation Bulks .............................................................................................. 5-9
Mat’l / Man-hours Adjustments......................................................................... 5-10
Mat’l / Man-hours Additions ............................................................................. 5-12
Pipe – General Specs ......................................................................................... 5-12
Pipe – Item Details............................................................................................. 5-12
Duct.................................................................................................................... 5-15
Civil.................................................................................................................... 5-15
Steel.................................................................................................................... 5-15
Instrumentation .................................................................................................. 5-15
Electrical ............................................................................................................ 5-18
Insulation............................................................................................................ 5-19
Paint ................................................................................................................... 5-19
Importing Areas and Components ................................................................................. 5-20
Importing an Entire Scenario ......................................................................................... 5-21
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • v

Copying Components..................................................................................................... 5-22
Cut and Paste...................................................................................................... 5-22
Drag and Drop.................................................................................................... 5-22
Deleting Components..................................................................................................... 5-23
Re-numbering Components ............................................................................... 5-23
Deleting Areas ............................................................................................................... 5-24
Re-numbering Areas .......................................................................................... 5-24
Using the Custom Model Tool....................................................................................... 5-25
Creating a Template........................................................................................... 5-29
Running Custom Model Tool at Project-Level for Batch Update ..................... 5-30
Sizing Project Components 6-1

Overview.......................................................................................................................... 6-1
Sizing for Project Components Mapped from Simulator Items........................... 6-1
Interactive Sizing Expert...................................................................................... 6-1
Sizing for Project Components Not Mapped from Simulator Items.................... 6-2
Resizing Project Components .............................................................................. 6-2
Creating Streams to Connect to Equipment Items........................................................... 6-4
Using the Interactive Sizing Form ................................................................................... 6-8
Sizing Requirements, Calculations, and Defaults.......................................................... 6-14
Air Coolers......................................................................................................... 6-14
Agitated Tanks ................................................................................................... 6-16
Compressors....................................................................................................... 6-17
Crushers ............................................................................................................. 6-18
Crystallizers ....................................................................................................... 6-19
Dryers................................................................................................................. 6-20
Dust Collectors................................................................................................... 6-20
Filters ................................................................................................................. 6-21
Heat Exchangers ................................................................................................ 6-22
Pumps................................................................................................................. 6-25
Screens ............................................................................................................... 6-27
Towers................................................................................................................ 6-28
Vessels ............................................................................................................... 6-43
Developing and Using Cost Libraries 7-1

Developing and Using an Equipment Model Library (EML).......................................... 7-3
Creating an EML.................................................................................................. 7-3
Adding an Item to an EML .................................................................................. 7-4
Adding an EML Item to a Project Scenario......................................................... 7-6
Developing and Using a Unit Cost Library (UCL).......................................................... 7-8
Creating a Unit Cost Library................................................................................ 7-8
Adding an Item to a UCL..................................................................................... 7-9
Adding a UCL Item to a Project Scenario ......................................................... 7-12
Creating an Assembly of UCL Items................................................................. 7-14
Working with Cost Libraries ......................................................................................... 7-18
Copying a Library Item...................................................................................... 7-18
vi • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Deleting a Library Item...................................................................................... 7-18
Escalating Library Costs .................................................................................... 7-18
Importing a Cost Library ................................................................................... 7-19
Duplicating a Cost Library................................................................................. 7-20
Deleting a Cost Library...................................................................................... 7-21
Changing Plant Capacity and Location 8-1

Changing Plant Capacity.................................................................................................. 8-2
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) ................................................................................. 8-3
How ASM Works ................................................................................................ 8-3
Scale-Up Rule Set ................................................................................................ 8-4
Scale-Up for Configuration Analysis................................................................... 8-5
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) .............................................................................. 8-5
Relocation Terminology ...................................................................................... 8-5
Workflow ............................................................................................................. 8-6
Relocating the Project .......................................................................................... 8-9
ARM Knowledge Base ........................................................................................ 8-9
Evaluating the Project 9-19

Running a Project Evaluation ........................................................................................ 9-19
Reviewing and Revising Process Economics in the Analyzer Economics Module ...... 9-22
Loading the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM)............................................ 9-22
Overview of Workbooks.................................................................................... 9-23
Revising Premises.............................................................................................. 9-33
Saving AEM Workbook .................................................................................... 9-35
Discussion of Economic Premises ..................................................................... 9-35
Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus Reporter ................................................................ 9-43
Accessing Aspen Reporter................................................................................. 9-43
Which Report Mode?......................................................................................... 9-45
Standard Reports................................................................................................ 9-46
HTML Reports................................................................................................... 9-54
Management Reports ......................................................................................... 9-55
Excel Reports ..................................................................................................... 9-60
Data Trending .................................................................................................... 9-64
Importing Data into Aspen Icarus Reporter....................................................... 9-67
Creating a User Database................................................................................... 9-68
Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor................................................................................ 9-69
Accessing ........................................................................................................... 9-69
Printing a Single Section.................................................................................... 9-70
Icarus Editor Toolbar ......................................................................................... 9-70
Report Sections .................................................................................................. 9-71
Reviewing Investment Analysis .................................................................................... 9-77
Viewing Investment Analysis ............................................................................ 9-77
Equipment Summary ......................................................................................... 9-77
Project Summary................................................................................................ 9-78
Cashflow ............................................................................................................ 9-88
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • vii

Executive Summary ........................................................................................... 9-96
Using the Reporting Assistant ........................................................................... 9-99
Item Evaluation............................................................................................................ 9-103
Index 1
viii • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Introduction
In the face of global competition, you must access a wide range of

business investment opportunities and identify the best to pursue.
You need to respond quickly and confidently with winning
strategies that offset unfavorable changes in the marketplace. You
must be able to identify the best strategies quickly to advance the
project from concept to on-stream production. Aspen Decision
Analyzer (Analyzer) provides you with the solution.
Analyzer is a comprehensive interactive knowledge-based system
that provides the basis for investment decisions at the concept
stage and along the project time line. Analyzer enables you to
create and modify models of chemical and refinery processes or to
plug in and modify models from Aspen Icarus Process Evaluator
(IPE), Aspen Icarus 2000, or Aspen Kbase. Once loaded into
Analyzer, models can be:
• Modified for scope content
• Scaled to a new production capacity
• Augmented by importing with models of sections of a plant
at different capacity to analyze various configurations
• Evaluated for total installed cost, EPC schedule, operating
cost, economics
• Evaluated for different plant locations
• Evaluated for process economics under real-world market
conditions
• Upgraded with more advanced scope content, along the
project time line, and re-evaluated as above
The following are Analyzer’s key unique capabilities:
a. Three scenario analysis modules:
• Analyzer Scale-up Module (ASM): to revise the
size of all components to meet a desired production
capacity
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Introduction • 1-1

• Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM): to revise
location-based project and design parameters
pertinent to a selected plant location
• Analyzer Economics Module (AEM): to revise
detailed economic parameters and study periodic
changes to utility, feedstock and products costs,
EPC schedules, delays etc on the economics of the
proposed investment
b. Process model creation modules that enable the user to

• Import process simulation files from Aspen Plus,
PRO/II, HYSYS, ChemCAD, WinSIM
• Map simulation models to Icarus components
• Size any unsized components
c. Ability to import a previously created model in Aspen

Icarus format (IPE, Icarus 2000, Kbase, Analyzer) and
to export an Analyzer model to IPE, Icarus 2000 and
Kbase
d. Ability to modify a model, i.e., the scope of the project,

areas, components, installation streams, economic
premises
e. Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), for the determination

of capital and operating costs and EPC planning
schedule, with detailed breakouts of designed
quantities, costs, man-hours, etc.
These capabilities allow you to evaluate the impact of plant

capacity, location and market conditions on return-on-investment
and to determine winning strategies quickly and confidently.
Analyzer may be implemented as a system or in conjunction with
Aspen Kbase. When augmented with Kbase, Analyzer provides the
user with the most comprehensive level of Icarus capabilities and
means to express the scope of a project.
Analyzer allows you to evaluate a project and study alternatives.
Based on simulator results and/or user-entered specifications,
Analyzer develops costs and schedules. You can then scale the
baseline model to a new capacity and/or relocate to a new plant
location. The capacity scale-up and relocation modules create a
revised user model that can then be evaluated using a variety of
reports. Among the reports available are the unique interactive
workbooks in the Analyzer Economics Module (AEM), which
allow you to instantly see results of changes to economic premises.
1-2 • Introduction Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Main Features
Links to Process Analyzer uses expert system links to affect the automatic transfer
Simulator Software of your process simulator output results. Links are available to
Programs process simulator programs, such as Aspen Plus, HYSYS, PRO/II,
ChemCAD, and WinSIM. Analyzer can link to virtually any
commercial and proprietary process simulator program.
Mapping of Simulator Mapping relates each process simulator model to one or more of
Models to Process Analyzer’s list of several hundred types of process equipment or
Equipment Types other components. A simulator heat exchanger model might be
mapped to a fin-tube type; a distillation model might be mapped
into several items (e.g., trayed tower, kettle-type reboiler, overhead
condenser, and horizontal drum). Analyzer’s expert equipment
selection makes the mapping easy, allowing you to map one item
at a time or all at once.
Sizing of Equipment Size of equipment is a prerequisite to costing. Analyzer
automatically loads the results of size calculations performed
during process simulation. With Analyzer, you can revise sizes,
enter your values for unsized equipment or develop sizes using
Analyzer’s built-in expert sizing programs.
Capital Investment Analyzer checks and prepares all of the necessary specifications
and Schedules: for detailed design, estimation, scheduling, and economic data.
Engineer-Procure- Analyzer contains built-in, up-to-date knowledge bases of:
Construct • Design, cost and scheduling data, methods and models.
• Engineering, procurement and construction methods and
procedures.
• Critical path programming for development of design,
procure and construct planning schedules.
Analyzer comes with time-proven, field-tested, industry-standard
design and cost modeling and scheduling methods used by project
evaluators for projects worldwide. Analyzer’s detailed results are
based on detailed design and cost models for the various phases of
contractor engineering, process equipment, plant bulks, building
site development work and associated installation – not on factors.
Analyzer’s estimates and schedules are consistent, being derived
from your project scope definition.
Development of Analyzer develops operating costs in tune to your process design.
Operating Costs You can override Analyzer’s values and with each revision, you
can see the impact of your choice on investment analysis measures
of profitability.
Alternative Capacities Analyzer allows you to evaluate alternate plant capacities and
and Locations locations. You can make a percentage adjustment to the capacity,
and Analyzer will automatically re-size all project components and

stream flows. You can change the plant location (choosing from
twenty-two different countries), and Analyzer’s plant relocation
technology will automatically revise the design and cost basis
parameters, including parity exchange rate, workforce rates,
productivities, and construction practices.
Detailed, Interactive Analyzer’s detailed economics module allows you to perform
Process Economics interactive economic scenarios. It develops key economic
measures, including payout time, interest rate of return, net present
value, and income and expenses on changing any economic
premise. It performs economic analyses over the time line of a
project, from the strategic planning phase through engineering,
procurement and construction of the process facility, into start-up
and throughout the production life of the process facility. You can
study the impact of cyclic changes in market conditions and
identify economic threats and opportunities upon changing costs of
feedstocks, products and/or utilities for each period in the life of a
project.
Links to Project After your evaluation and selection of the best design, you can
Evaluation Programs export your Analyzer model to IPE or Kbase or have Analyzer
prepare a project specs file in Icarus 2000 format. Then, project
evaluators using these systems can easily develop detailed funding
or bidding estimates and schedules.

Understanding Analyzer’s Project
Workflow
Before using Analyzer, it may be helpful to review the
recommended project workflow.
Load Data
This workflow is Translate Process Simulator Data into Analyzer.
recommended if you are
bringing process simulator
data into Analyzer. However,
Analyzer allows you to Examine Loaded Data
perform the same evaluation Using Process View, note the models and arrangement.
on a process comprised of
areas and components
added in Analyzer rather
than mapped from simulator Map Data
models. Map data to Icarus project components.
Note: during the project
workflow, you can go back
to previous steps to refine Map (and size) all
Map (and size)
the project specifications. items at once.
one item at a time.
Specify Additional Project Component Information

Enter additional project component information and sizing.
Specify New Areas and Project Components

Enter areas and project components not in the loaded data.
Run Project Evaluation

Run Project Evaluation to produce reports.
Review Capital Cost, Design and Basis, and Other Reports

Review reports using either Aspen Icarus Reporter or Icarus
Editor. Reports can also be viewed in Excel or HTML.
Review Investment Analysis

Review Investment Analysis spreadsheets in Main Window.
Review and Revise AEM

Review the interactive workbook. Make revisions to specs in
workbook and instantly see the impact on costs and schedules.
Study Alternative Capacities and/or Locations

Make a percentage modification to the production capacity
and/or specify a new location and re-evaluate. (See process for
studying alternatives on following page.)

General Process for Studying Alternatives in Analyzer
User Baseline
Model
Run: Analyzer Run: Analyzer Plant

Capacity Scale-up Relocation Module
Module - ARM -
Scaled Scaled, Relocated

Relocated
User Model User Model
User Model
Run:
Evaluate Capital Investment
Capital
Planning Schedule
Develop EPC designs, quantities, Investment
costs, man-hours, etc
Model results, Economic
User
Interaction Analyzer Detailed Process
to Evaluate Process Economics Economics
Alternate Module Reports
Economic - ECO_U.xls -
Scenarios

The Guide
Organization This guide contains the following:
Chapter 1 − Introduction − an overview of Analyzer and the user's
guide, as well as a list of related documentation and information on
technical support.
Chapter 2 − Getting Started − instructions on how to start
Analyzer, open a project, enter project specifications, and work
with the Icarus Interface.
Chapter 3 − Defining the Project Basis − instructions on defining
specifications: units of measure, standard basis, component map,
design criteria, investment analysis, raw material, product,
operating unit costs, and utility.
Chapter 4 − Loading and Mapping Simulation Data − instructions
on preparing different kinds of simulator reports for use in
Analyzer, loading simulator data, mapping simulator models to
Icarus project components, adding additional components to
simulator models, and viewing and defining simulator models in
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) and Process Flow Diagram (PFD)
view.
Chapter 5 − Defining Project Components − instructions on
defining project components, which are the pieces of the process
plant that, when linked together, complete a process.
Chapter 6 − Sizing Project Components − instructions on sizing
project components.
Chapter 7 – Developing and Using Cost Libraries − instructions
on developing cost libraries and adding library items as project
components.
Chapter 8 − Changing Capacities and Locations − instructions on
modifying plant capacity and locations, as well as details on the
parameters affected by these modifications.
Chapter 9 − Evaluating the Project − instructions on running a
project and item evaluations and reviewing capital costs, operating
costs, and investment analysis reports.

Related Documentation
In addition to this document, a number of other documents are
provided to help users learn and use Analyzer. The documentation
set consists of the following:
Installation Manual Aspen Engineering Suite Installation Manual
Release Notes Aspen Decision Analyzer Release Notes (available at Aspen’s
Online Technical Support Center: support.aspentech.com)
Icarus Reference Icarus Reference, for Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
Piping and Icarus Piping and Instrumentation Drawings, Third Edition
Instrumentation
Drawings
Technical Support
Online Technical AspenTech customers with a valid license and software
Support Center maintenance agreement can register to access the Online Technical
Support Center at:
http://support.aspentech.com
You use the Online Technical Support Center to:
Access current product documentation.
Search for technical tips, solutions, and frequently asked questions
(FAQs).
Search for and download application examples.
Search for and download service packs and product updates.
Submit and track technical issues.
Search for and review known limitations.
Send suggestions.
Registered users can also subscribe to our Technical Support
e-Bulletins. These e-Bulletins proactively alert you to important
technical support information such as:
Technical advisories
Product updates
Service Pack announcements
Product release announcements

Getting Started
Starting Analyzer
After completing the installation, you can start Analyzer.
To start Analyzer:
1. Click the Windows Start button and point to Programs. Point
to AspenTech and then to Aspen Icarus 2004.2.
2. On the Aspen Icarus 2004.2 menu, click Aspen Decision
Analyzer 2004.2.
Analyzer starts. The Main Window, empty because no project
is open, appears on the left. The Palette appears in the
upper-right and the Properties Window appears in the
lower-right.
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-1

You can change the position of these windows, as explained
later under “Customizing the Interface Arrangement” (page 2-
20).
2-2 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Starting a Project Scenario
Note: Viewing the sample project scenario provided with Analyzer
before creating a new one will allow you to familiarize
yourself with Analyzer without having to fill out
specifications. To open the sample project, follow the
instructions under “Opening an Existing Project Scenario”
on page 2-9.
Creating a New
Project Scenario To create a new project scenario:
1. From the File menu, click New.
– or –
Click on the toolbar.

The Create New Project dialog box appears, with the default
project directory selected.
Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other

than the default one provided by Analyzer. See
“Preferences,” particularly the section on the
Locations tab view (page2-35), for instructions on
adding project directories and setting a new default.
2. Either select an existing project in which to start a new
scenario, or enter a new Project Name. Long filenames are
accepted, including spaces. However, punctuation marks, such
as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and
asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3. Enter the Scenario Name.

This is the name of the scenario within the project. As with the
Project Name, long filenames are accepted, including spaces,
while punctuation marks, such as question marks (?),
exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not
allowed.
If you do not enter a Scenario Name, Analyzer uses
“BaseCase” as the default.
4. Click OK.
The Project Properties dialog box appears.
5. Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500

characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers,
and punctuation. You can enter or revise the description later
on the Project Properties form accessed from the Project Basis
view (see page 3-3).
6. In the Units of Measure section, you can keep the default basis
of Inch-Pound (IP) or select Metric. The Units of Measure
selection cannot be changed after creating the project scenario.
7. If desired, enter more details about the project scenario in the
Remarks field. Remarks can be up to 6,000 characters in length
and can be comprised of letters, numbers, and punctuation.
You can enter and revise remarks later on the Project
Properties form accessed from the Project Basis view (see page
3-3).
8. Click OK.
Analyzer displays the Input Units of Measure Specifications
dialog box, which allows you to customize the units of measure
that appear on specification forms.

For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour)
instead of M/H (meters per hour) to specify conveyor belt
speed in your metric-basis project, do the following:
a. Select Velocity and Flow Rate and click Modify.
b. On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H”
as the new unit name for M/H. Then enter the conversion
factor between the two units in the Conversion field. In this
example, the conversion factor between the two units is 100
because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
9. Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous

dialog box. When finished modifying input units of measure,
click Close.
10. Analyzer displays the General Project Data form, where you
can select a country base and currency.

The default country base is US and the default currency is
Dollars (USD). Changing the country base to UK, EU, or JP
automatically changes the currency to Pounds (PS), Euros, or
K-Yen (KY), respectively. You can, however, enter a currency
different than that of the country base. Just be sure to also enter
a currency conversion rate, which is the number of currency
units per one country base currency unit.
Country Base and Currency Symbol can only be entered at this
time. Other specifications on this form can be entered later by
selecting General Project Data in the Project Basis view (see
page 3-4).
11. Click OK when finished entering General Project Data.
The Main Window now displays Project Explorer and the List
view. See “Understanding the Icarus Interface” on page 2-11
for instructions on working with these and other features now
available on the interface.

Importing an Analyzer provides an Import feature so that you can import your
Analyzer 2.0B Project Analyzer 2.0B project scenarios into Analyzer 12.2. (Analyzer
Scenario 2.0B is the version previous to 11.0. With version 11.0, Analyzer
became part of the Aspen Engineering Suite (AES) and adopted
the AES version number. This accounts for the jump in version
numbers.)
To import an Analyzer 2.0B project scenario:

1. From the File menu, click New.
– or –

The Create New Project dialog box appears, with the default
project directory selected.

Locations tab view (page2-35), for instructions on
adding project directories and setting a new default.
2. Either select an existing project in which to start a new
scenario, or enter a new Project Name. Long filenames are
accepted, including spaces. However, punctuation marks, such
as question marks (?), exclamation points (!), tildes (~), and
asterisks (*), are not allowed.
3. Enter the Scenario Name.

This is the name of the scenario within the project. The
selected Analyzer 2.0B project file’s project and component
specifications will be imported into this scenario.
Again, long filenames are accepted, including spaces, while
punctuation marks, such as question marks (?), exclamation
points (!), tildes (~), and asterisks (*) are not allowed.
After making an entry in the Scenario Name field, the Import
button becomes active.
4. Click Import.
The Select Import Type dialog box appears, with Analyzer
2.0B selected as the project type.
5. Click OK.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
Select the project scenario folder and click OK. The project
scenario’s settings will be imported into the new project
scenario.

Opening an Existing Project Scenario
To open an existing project scenario:
1. From the File menu, click Open.
– or –

The Open Existing Project dialog box appears.
In the pictured dialog box,

the project named
“Expansion” is expanded
and the scenario named
“AES A1” is selected. The
pane on the right side
displays information about
the selected scenario.
The tree structure on the left side of the dialog box displays the
projects in the default project directory:
...\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\Data\Archives_Analyzer
“Locations” on page 2-35 for instructions on adding
project directories and setting a new default.
Clicking “+” next to a project expands the view to display the
scenarios under that project. Selecting a scenario displays the
following scenario information in the pane on the right:
• Version of Analyzer in which the scenario was created
• Name of the user who created the scenario
• Name of the computer on which the scenario was created
• Units of measure used in the scenario
2. Select a scenario and click OK.
The project scenario opens. The Main Window now displays
Project Explorer and the List view. See “Understanding the
Icarus Interface” on page 2-11 for instructions on working with
these and other features now available on the interface.

Palette Shortcut You can also open a project from the Palette, which appears to the
right of the Main Window in the default interface arrangement (it
can also be floated in the Main Window or dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized, as shown below). In the Projects view tab,
right-click on a scenario and, on the pop-up menu, click Open.
This opens the selected scenario.

Understanding the Icarus Interface
The Icarus interface allows you to see multiple windows and
documents. You can customize the interface arrangement. The
following is the default interface arrangement, with a
specifications form open in the Main Window.
Palette
Title Bar
Menu Bar
Toolbar
Status Bar
Project Explorer Main Properties

(Project Basis View) Window Window
The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Title Bar - Displays the product name, version number, project
name, scenario name (in parenthesis), and Main Window view.
Menu Bar - Displays menu options.
Toolbar - Accesses main functions. See page 2-21.
Main Window - Provides workspace for all Analyzer documents,
List view, specification forms, and other views. See page 2-13.
Project Explorer - Organizes project items in tree format. See
page 2-12.
Palette - Allows access to libraries, projects, and components. See
page 2-17.
Status Bar - Displays Analyzer system status.
Properties Window – Describes the field selected on
specifications form. See page 2-19.

Project Explorer Project Explorer is a graphical representation of the project. It has
three views: Project Basis view, Process view, and Project view.
Each view organizes items in a tree format. Switch views by
selecting the appropriate tab at the bottom of Project Explorer.
(Stretching the width of the Project Explorer will display the full
names on the tabs.) The different views are described on page 2-
12.
To expand a tree level, click on “+” next to the condensed level.
To condense a tree level, click on “-” next to the expanded level.
Project Explorer Views Project Basis View displays project basis specifications.
Double-click on a specification to view and/or modify it. A red
arrow on an icon in this view indicates that you can right click on
the icon for options.
Level Icon Description
2 Specifications folder
3 Specification
Process View displays simulator data information. In this view,

simulator items can be mapped to Icarus project components.
Mapped items can then be sized, modified, and/or deleted.
2 Main Project, containing a group of
simulator areas
As in a process simulator, like 3 Process simulator area
AspenPlus or HYSYS, blocks
represent different operations 4 Unmapped simulator block (yellow)
within the process. A block is
sometimes referred to as a unit Mapped simulator block (green)
operation.
Project View displays project data information. In this view,

mapped items can be sized, modified, and/or deleted. In addition,
new areas and Icarus project components can be defined.
1 Main Project, containing the default Main
Area and any user-added areas
2 Area
3 Project component

Main Window The Main Window is located to the right of Project Explorer by
default. The Main Window is a workspace for all Analyzer
documents, the List view, and other views. You can adjust the
relative size of each window by clicking on the division bar and
dragging it to the desired location.
Here, the Main Window

in Workbook Mode
displays several tabs
because a component
specifications form
(component A1) and a
project specifications
form (General Project
Data) have been
opened.
Workbook Mode
By default, the Main Window is in Workbook Mode. In this mode,
tabs are placed at the bottom of the window. These tabs represent
all windows open in the Main Window. Clicking on a tab brings
the associated window to the foreground.
Clicking Tile or Cascade on the Window menu displays all
windows open in the Main Window. Regardless of the window
arrangement, the tabs are still at the bottom of the Main Window
when in Workbook Mode. Clicking the maximize button ( ) on a
window returns all windows to full tab view. Clicking the
condense button ( ) on the menu bar displays all windows open in
the Main Window as they were when last condensed.

This is how the
Main Window
appears when in
Workbook Mode
with Cascade
selected as the
condensed
window
arrangement.
Analyzer allows you to float Project Explorer, the Palette, and the
Properties Window in the Main window. When in this state, these
windows behave just like other windows that are part of the Main
Window. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” on page 2-20 for
details.
You can turn off Workbook Mode by unmarking Workbook Mode
on the View menu.
When Workbook Mode is off, no tabs are displayed; to bring a

window to the front, you must click on the desired window or
select the desired window from the Window menu.

List View The List view in the Main Window displays details on items
selected in Project Explorer. For example, when you click on an
area in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List view displays a list
of all components in the area. This is referred to as the “area-level”
list (shown below), in which the components are displayed in rows
with component details in columns. When you click on a
component in Project Explorer’s Project view, the List provides
information only on the selected component, with component
details listed in rows. This is referred to as the “component-level”.
Note: In the interface

arrangement pictured
here, the Palette and
the Properties Window
have been hidden to
make room for the Main
Window.
Press ALT+1 to hide or

display the Palette and
press ALT+2 to hide or
display the Properties
Window. Press ALT+0
to hide or display
Project Explorer.
Filtering Mechanism You can limit area-level lists to a single category of component. To
do so, click the drop-down arrow on the toolbar and click on a
category.
For example, if you click “? Incomplete Items,” the list will only
include components that still have specifications that need to be
entered in order for the component to be included in an evaluation.

Column Settings You can select which columns appear on the area-level list and in
which order.
To change column settings on the area-level list:
1. Right-click on any of the column headings.
A pop-up menu lists all of the columns. Columns currently
displayed are checked.
2. To simply hide/unhide a column, you can click it on the menu.
To change the order, click Settings on the menu. The Settings
dialog box appears.
3. To move a column to the right on the List View, click Move

Down. To move a column to the left, click Move Up. The
Reset button returns to columns to the default setting (shown
above).
4. Click OK to save the settings.
When you restart Analyzer, all columns will be displayed in the
default order unless Save Window States is selected in Preferences
(by default, Save Window States is selected). See “Saving Window
States” on page 2-21 for more information.

Palette The Palette contains elements that you can apply to the project
scenario. If you think of Project Explorer as a picture of the project
scenario, you might think of the Palette’s contents as the pigments
and dyes used to first sketch out and then color in that picture.
For example, if you wish to
import areas or components
from another scenario into
your current scenario, you
can double-click on the
scenario in the Palette to get a
listing of its areas and
components and then drag the
area/component to the Project
Explorer’s Project View. (See
“Importing Project
Components” on page 5-20.)
Likewise, the Palette’s
Libraries view contains
libraries of Project Basis
specification files that, in
Project Explorer’s Project
Basis view, you can select to
use. From the Palette, you
can develop the libraries by
creating new files, modifying
existing files, and importing
files. (See “Specification
Libraries” on page 3-80.)
Finally, when you add a
component to the project
scenario, you can choose
from the components listed in
the Palette’s Components
view. Then, after you add the
component, it appears in
Project Explorer’s Project
view. (See Chapter 4,
“Defining Project
Components”).
In the default interface arrangement, the Palette appears on the
right side of the screen. Like Project Explorer, it can be displayed
in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus Interface” (page

2-20) for display options. To hide/display the Palette, press ALT+1
or used the checked command on the View menu.
As indicated previously, the Palette has three views: Projects,
Libraries, and Components. The Components view, shown below,
has a scrollable split window that displays details on equipment
items. The division bar can be adjusted to hide or expand the
details section.
The Palette pictured in

this section has been
dragged onto the Main
Window and re-sized.
In addition to allowing you to import the contents of other

scenarios, the Projects view provides options for opening
scenarios, viewing scenario properties, and deleting scenarios.
Right-click on a project scenario to access the pop-up menu of
options. The Projects view displays all projects in the default
project folder and any other active project folders (see
“Preferences,” particularly the section on the Locations tab view
(page 2-35) for information on adding project directories).

Properties Window When you select a field on a specifications form, the Properties
Window provides a description of the field. The description often
includes minimum, maximum, and default values.
Here, the Properties

Window (docked on the
right side of the screen)
displays information on
the Process Description
field, which is selected on
the specifications form.
Clicking on the Properties Window freezes and unfreezes the

content. When the content is frozen, you can move to another field
while retaining the description of the original field in the Properties
Window.
Like the Palette and Project Explorer, the Properties Window can
be displayed in a variety of ways. See “Customizing the Icarus
Interface” on page 2-20 for display options.
To hide/display the Properties Window, press ALT+2 or use the

checked command on the View menu.

Customizing the In the default interface arrangement, Project Explorer docks to the
Icarus Interface left edge and the Palette and the Properties Window share the right.
When docked, windows remain attached to an edge and all other
windows are sized to fit in the remaining space available.
Clicking on a border of any of these three windows accesses a
pop-up menu from which you can select Allow Docking. When
Allow Docking is marked, the window can be docked to any edge.
Note: When Float In Main Window is selected on the pop-up
menu, the Allow Docking option is inactive.
To dock to a different edge, click on the border that contains the
Close button ( ) and hold down the mouse button. A bounding
outline will appear as you drag the window. Drag the outline to the
desired edge and release the mouse button.
Here, Project
Explorer is docked
to the top of the
screen.
Click the border

containing the
Close button
when dragging
Project Explorer,
the Palette, or the
Properties
Window.
When multiple windows are docked to the same edge, you can use
the division bar to adjust the relative sizes. You can also use the
Contract/Expand ( / ) buttons to either switch between windows
or split the side.
Undocking by Dragging One way to undock the window is by dragging it onto the Main
onto Main Window Window. Its size can then be adjusted.

Float In Main Window You can at any time select Float In Main Window on the pop-up
Option menu. In this state, the window behaves like the List view or a
specifications form, with a tab at the bottom of the Main Window.
Saving Window States If you are using the default Preferences, Analyzer will save the
interface arrangement. This way, when you open Analyzer the
arrangement is the same as you left it.
You can also set the Preferences so that Analyzer opens displaying
the default arrangement. See “Preferences – General” on page 2-31
for more information.
Analyzer's Toolbar By default, the toolbar is docked under the menu bar. However,
you can float the toolbar by clicking on a blank area of the toolbar
and dragging it. You can also dock the toolbar to the bottom of the
screen or vertically to the edge of the Project Explorer, Main
Window, or the Palette. To do so, drag the toolbar over any one of
these areas until an outline of the toolbar appears. Release the
mouse button when the outline appears in the desired area.
The following toolbar buttons are available in Analyzer:
Create a new project. See “Creating a New Project” on page 2-

3.
Open an existing project scenario. See “Opening an Existing

Project” on page 2-9.
Save the current project.
Print.
Load simulator data. See “Loading Simulator Data” on page

4-15.
Map simulator items to corresponding Icarus project

components and size the component. See “Mapping Simulator
Items” on page 4-23.
Run project evaluation. See page 9-19 for instructions.
Load Capital Costs and other reports. See page 9-43 for
instructions.
Load investment analysis results. See page 9-77 for

instructions.

Edit connectivity in Process Flow Diagram (PFD) view. See
“Editing Connectivity” on page 4-49.
Add stream in PFD view. See “Adding a Stream” on page 4-

50.
Draw disconnected stream in PFD view. See “Drawing a

Disconnected Stream” on page 4-52.
Zoom in. Active in PFD and Block Flow Diagram (BFD)

view.
Zoom out. Active in PFD and BFD view.
Hide/Display ports in PFD view.
Go back. Navigate back through previously viewed links.
Go forward. Navigate forward through previously viewed

links.

Analyzer Menu Bar
File Menu
New – Start a new project scenario. Details on page 2-3.
Open – Open an existing project scenario. Details on page 2-9.
Close – Close the current project scenario.
Save – Save the current project scenario. Details on page 2-26.
Save As – Save the current project scenario as a different file. Details
on page 2-26.
Import – Access instructions for importing areas and components.
Details on page 5-20.
Export to Icarus 2000 – Save the current project scenario as an Icarus
2000 (*.ic2) project file.
Print – Print the form or report currently active in the Main Window.
Print Preview – Preview how form or report will appear printed.
Print Setup – View and modify printer name and properties, paper size
and source, and orientation.
Page Setup – Define page specifications.
Exit – Close Analyzer.
Run Menu
Load Data – Load simulator data. See page 4-15 for details.
Map Items – Map simulator items to Icarus project components and
size components. See page 4-23 for details.
Evaluate Project – Run a project evaluation. See page 9-19 for details.
Develop Schedule – This sub-menu contains commands for use in IPM
only.
Decision Analyzer – Access the Decision Analyzer dialog box, where
you can change plant capacity and location (see Chapter 8), develop
Capital Cost EPC reports to review in Icarus Editor (see side note on
page 9-69), and develop detailed process economics reports (see page
9-77).
Scan for Errors – Scan for potential errors in the project evaluation.
Regenerated Block Diagram – Regenerate the Block Flow Diagram. If
you have indicated that some of the simulator streams are utility
streams, the placement of blocks will reflect this.
Regenerate Process Flow Diagram – Regenerate the Process Flow
Diagram. See “Working With Process Flow Diagrams,” page 4-46, for
details.
Reroute All Streams - Reroute all streams on the Process Flow Diagram.
Re-number – Re-number project components or project areas so that
the numbering contains no gaps. Details on page 5-23.
- continued on next page -

Analyzer Menu Bar (continued)
View Menu
Toolbar – View or hide the toolbar. See page 2-21 for description of the
toolbar.
Status Bar – View or hide the status bar. See page 2-11 for description
of the status bar.
Project Explorer - View or hide Project Explorer. See page 2-12 for
description of Project Explorer.
Palette - View or hide the Palette. See page 2-17 for description of the
Palette.
Properties Window – View or hide the Properties Window. See page 2-
19 for a description of the Properties Window.
Workbook Mode – Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 2-13 for an
explanation of Workbook Mode.
Capital Costs View – Launch Aspen Icarus Reporter. The Project
Evaluation needs to have already been run. See page 9-43 for details.
Investment Analysis View –Display Investment Analysis spreadsheets.
See “Reviewing Investment Analysis” on page 9-77 for details.
Block Flow Diagram – Display Block Flow Diagram of the loaded
simulator data. See page 4-18 for details.
Process Flow Diagram – Display Process Flow Diagram. This
command is not active until you have mapped the simulator items. See
page 4-46 for details.
Streams List – Display a read-only list of all simulator-derived stream
properties in a spreadsheet. You can customize some of the features of
the spreadsheet (which stream properties to display, whether to
display names of the properties, and the display style of the property
values) by editing the stream list template file:
...\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\Data\ICS\strlist.fil

Analyzer Menu Bar (continued)
Tools Menu
Icarus Editor – Launch Icarus Editor. See “Reviewing Results in Icarus
Editor” on page 9-69 for instructions.
External Simulation Import Tool – Access tool for importing data from
simulator. See page 4-10 for instructions on using the tool to import
HYSYS simulator data.
Options – Access Options sub-menu. See below.
Options Sub-menu
Automatic Item Evaluation – Turn Automatic Item Evaluation on and
off. A check mark indicates the feature is turned on. See page 9-104 for
feature description.
View Spreadsheets in Excel – Select to have the results normally
reported in Icarus spreadsheets exported to Excel. The following Excel
workbook, containing some Excel macros, is provided as a sample:
...\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\Data\ICS\IpeWb.xls
A copy of this workbook also resides in each project directory. When
Analyzer needs to report the results (i.e., when you click the
Investment Analysis button), the results will be exported to ASCII
delimited files and loaded into IpeWb.xls. The macro contained in the
workbook will also be run.
Reporting Assistant – Access the Reporting Assistant Options dialog
box, where you can create your own customized report spreadsheets,
combining information from all other Icarus generated spreadsheets.
See pages 9-99 through 9-102 for details.
Custom Tasks – This command is reserved for future releases.
Preferences – Access Preferences. See page 2-31 for details.
Window Menu
Cascade – View the Main Window contents in Cascade mode. See page
2-13.
Tile – View the Main Window contents in Tile mode. See page 2-13.
Arrange Icons – Return all minimized windows to the bottom of the
Main Window.
# XXX – View opened window in the Main Window.
Help Menu
Contents – Access Docs.pdf.
About – Access program information, version number, and copyright
information.

Working with Project Scenarios
This section explains how to save, delete, salvage, and unlock
project scenarios.
Saving Project
Scenarios To save a project scenario:
Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.

Analyzer saves any changes.
If you are using the default Preferences settings, Analyzer will ask
if you wish to save any changes when you close the project
scenario.
You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt appear (see
page 2-31).
To save the scenario with a new name:
1. Click Save As on the File menu.
Save As is useful
when studying
alternatives.
Note: You can save scenarios to project directories other than

the default one provided by Analyzer. See
Locations tab view (page 2-35), for instructions.
2. Specify a Project Name and Scenario Name and click OK.
Analyzer saves the scenario as specified.

Deleting Project It is recommended that you delete project scenarios when they are
Scenarios no longer needed. Deleting old scenarios opens free disk space and
makes working with scenarios easier.
To delete a project or scenario:
1. To delete a project scenario, right-click on the scenario within
the project directory and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A dialog box asks you to confirm deletion.
Note: You can select in Preferences not to have this prompt

appear (see page 2-31).
2. Click Yes to delete the project scenario.
Click No to retain the project scenario.

Salvaging Project If you exit Analyzer abnormally without being able to save the
Scenarios current project scenario, you can salvage the project scenario from
cached project information.
To salvage a project scenario:
1. Restart Analyzer. A window appears asking if you wish to save
the cached information found in storage.
2. Click Yes. Analyzer displays the Salvage Project As dialog

box.
3. Specify a project and scenario name.

You cannot overwrite the scenario being salvaged; you must
specify a project and scenario name different from that of the
original scenario.
4. Click OK.
Analyzer creates the new scenario. Except in name, this project
scenario will be identical to the scenario that was open when
Analyzer was abnormally exited. After creating the new scenario,
Analyzer asks if you wish to open it.

Unlocking Project If Analyzer crashes while you have a project scenario open,
Scenarios Analyzer remembers that you have the project scenario checked
out. When you re-open Analyzer, you will have to unlock the
project scenario before opening it.
Anyone trying to open a locked project is denied access and
provided with a message that states the time the project scenario
was checked out, the user name of the person who checked it out,
and the computer on which it was checked out.
A project can only be unlocked by the user who checked it out or

by an administrator.
To unlock a project scenario:
Right-click on the project scenario in the Palette and click
Unlock on the pop-up menu.
You can now open the project scenario as you normally would.

Copying Project Within a project directory, Analyzer creates an independent folder
Directories for each project and also creates, within a project folder, an
independent folder for each project scenario. This makes it easy to
move project scenario files from one computer to another on the
same network. Simply copy and paste the folder in Windows
Explorer.
You can also copy an entire project directory with multiple project
and project scenario folders. Doing so creates an identical set of
folders and files in the new location.
Note: Copied projects need to have been created in Analyzer 12.2
to be used. In order to use an Analyzer 2.0B project
scenario, you must import it first (see page 2-7 for
instructions).
See “Preferences,” particularly the section on the Locations tab
view (page 2-35), for information on adding project directories and
setting a new default project directory.

Preferences
The settings in Preferences allow you to specify how Analyzer will
act each time it is used.
To access Preferences:
Click Options on the Tools menu, and then click Preferences on
the sub-menu.
Analyzer displays the Preferences dialog box.
Click To do this
OK Save changes and close the Preferences.
Apply Save changes without closing Preferences.
Cancel Close Preferences without saving changes. (Clicking
Apply and then immediately clicking Cancel would
have the same effect as clicking OK.)
General In the General tab view, you can select the following:
• Prompts
Select which prompts appear.
; Close Project – prompt to save any changes when closing
project.

; Overwrite Project – prompt to confirm overwriting
project that has the same name as the one being created.
; Delete Project – prompt to confirm deletion of project.
; Delete Area – prompt to confirm deletion of area.
; Delete Component – prompt to confirm deletion of
component.
; Cancel Component Edit – prompt to save changes when
you click Cancel after editing a Component Specifications
form.
; Delete Library – prompt to confirm deletion of library.
; Delete Report Group – prompt to confirm deletion of
Report Group in Kbase. Does not apply to Analyzer.
• Evaluation
; Display results after evaluation - mark to have Analyzer
open Aspen Icarus Reporter and load reports after you run
an evaluation.
; Scan for Errors before evaluation – mark to have
Analyzer scan for errors before evaluation.
• Item Report
Select which type of report you wish to display when
generating an Item Report.
HTML Item Report – mark to display the HTML Item
Report, like the one shown on page 9-103, in the Main
Window
{ Capital Cost Report – mark to display the Capital Cost
Report in Icarus Editor.
{ Reporter Report – mark to display the Single
Component Summary, exported from Aspen Icarus
Reporter, in the Main Window.
• Display
; Save Window States – mark to have Analyzer save the
position of Project Explorer, the Main Window, the
Palette, and the Properties Window, as well as selected
columns on the List view. Unmark to have Analyzer open
with the default interface arrangement (shown on page 2-
11).
; Display IPE& Analyzer Choice Dialog on Kbase – mark
to have Kbase ask you at startup whether to use IPE or
Analyzer in the Kbase environment. This option is

included here because Preference selections, except for file
locations, made in one product affects all other Aspen
Icarus products in the AES suite.
; Show Report Groups in Kbase – mark to have Kbase
display Report Groups.
Forms The Forms tab view provides options related to Component
Specification and Installation Bulk forms.
; Display P&I Installation Bulks in Grid – mark to have
Analyzer display all items on the Installation Bulk
specification forms for Pipe and Instrumentation. If you
unmark the checkbox, Analyzer allows you to select, when
opening the form, the items to include.
Use OK Button in Installation Bulks Form to Go to
Main Component Form – mark to have Analyzer return
you to the main Component Specifications form when you
click OK at an Installation Bulks form. Otherwise, clicking
OK simply closes the Component specifications.
Save Component When Switching to Different
Installation Bulk or Main Component Form – mark to
have Analyzer save the Component specifications when
you switch to a different form on the Component’s
Options menu.
Backup The Backup tab view lets you select when backups are to be
performed. You can select both options.
; Automatic Task Backup – mark to have Analyzer
perform a backup before executing major tasks, such as a
project evaluation.
; Timed Backup (Interval, in minutes) – mark to have
Analyzer perform a backup at a specified interval. Specify
the interval in the box provided.
You can also select to either have Analyzer overwrite the project
backups or create unique backups.
Overwrite Project Backups – mark to have Analyzer
overwrite the previous backup every time the program
performs a backup.
{ Unique Project Backups – mark to have Analyzer retain
previous backups by creating a unique backup each time.
Depending on the frequency of backups (see task and
timed backup options above), selecting Unique Project
Backups could result in large amounts of disk space being
consumed by backups.

Process The Process tab view provides options for importing from an
external project.
Import Connected Streams – mark to include connected
streams when importing an external project.
; Import Installation Bulks – mark to include installation
bulks when importing an external project.
The Process tab view also provides options for unsupported
simulator models and custom models.
Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item – mark
to have Analyzer map, by default, unsupported simulator
models to quoted cost items.
“Unsupported Models” refer to models not listed in the
Project Component Map Specifications dialog box shown
on page 3-30. Analyzer does not recognize them and,
therefore, cannot map them to Icarus project components.
If this option is left unmarked, Analyzer will not map
unsupported models. As a result, a unit operation could
appear disconnected in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD).
Quoted cost items are not project components, but act as
place markers to ensure that unit operations remain
connected in the PFD.
Note that marking this option will not affect the mapping
of supported simulator models. If a simulator model is
listed in the Project Component Map Specification dialog
box, then the specified mapping will be used. Further, if a
simulator model is listed and has no default mapping (i.e.
Current Map List section is blank), then it is assumed that
the user does not want to map such simulator models to
any Icarus project components.
For example, if this option is marked, a USER unit
operation in Aspen Plus can be mapped to a quoted cost
item if this option is marked. This ensures that the unit
operation remains connected in the PFD.
Activate Custom Model – mark to activate the Custom
Model tool explained on pages 5-25 through 5-31.
Use Automatic Mapping Selection when Available
(Beta feature) – Mark to use the Mapping Selection
feature explained in the section on 'Default and Simulator
Data' Mapping.

Locations In the Locations tab view, you can select:
• Project Directories
Add/remove alternate project directories and set the default
project directory. See “Adding Project Directories” on page 2-
35 for instructions.
• Other Location Specifications
Specify the location of various specification files and data.
Click an item in the list to display its description and location.
Click the Browse button to select a new location. Note that in
some cases the description warns against changing the location.
Adding Project Analyzer comes set up with only one project directory:
Directories
...\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\Data\Archives_Analyzer
This directory, by default, is the sole choice of project directory
when opening or saving a new project, as well as the only directory
displayed on the Palette’s Projects view.
In the Locations tab view, however, you can enter alternate project
directories, which will then appear on the Palette’s Projects view
and as choices when opening and saving projects. You can also
select an alternate project directory as the default.

To add a project directory and set a new default:
1. Click Add on the Preferences Locations tab view.
The Browse for Folder dialog box appears.
2. Select the folder you wish to add as an alternate directory and

click OK.
Analyzer adds the directory to the Alternate Project Directories
list.
3. To set an alternate project directory as the default, select it and

click Set Default.

Analyzer displays a prompt asking you to confirm the change.
Click Yes to set the new default.
If the old default location is not on the list of alternate project
directories, Analyzer displays another prompt asking if you
wish to add it to the list.
Adding the old default

directory to the
alternate project
directory list allows you
to easily revert to it.
Click Yes or No.

4. Click OK to save the changes to Preferences.
5. Before the added project directory appears on the Create New
Project dialog box and elsewhere, you will need to either
restart Analyzer or else right-click on the current project in the
Palette and click refresh on the pop-up menu.
Logging The Logging tab view is reserved for future releases, in which it
will be used to help clients with Technical Support issues. It is not
currently activated.

Defining the Project Basis
The Project Basis defines specifications that pertain to the overall

project scenario. These specifications influence the design and cost
estimate by defining system defaults and environmental variables.
Project Basis Specifications are accessed from the Project Basis
view in Project Explorer.
A red arrow on an icon

indicates that you can
right-click on the item to
access a pop-up menu.
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Defining the Project Basis • 3-1
This chapter describes the different Project Basis specifications, as
well as how to customize specification libraries.
3-2 • Defining the Project Basis Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide
Project Properties
Project Properties are initially specified when creating a new
project. To access, right-click on Project Properties in the main
Project Basis folder, and then click Edit.
You cannot edit Project Name, Scenario Name, or Units of

Measure; they can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
y Project Description: The description entered here appears as
the Project Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet
and as the Brief Description on the Executive Summary
spreadsheet. All scenarios that are under the project share the
project description. The description can be up to 500
characters in length and can be comprised of letters, numbers,
and punctuation.
y Remarks: Any remarks entered will appear immediately after
the Title Page of evaluation reports in Icarus Editor. Remarks
can be up to 6,000 characters in length and can be comprised
of letters, numbers, and punctuation. Remarks might include,
for example, the intended purpose of the estimate, executive
summary of results, or an explanation of assumptions.
General Project Data
General Project Data is initially specified when creating a project.
To access, right-click on General Project Data in the main Project
Basis folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Standard Basis Input File Specifications form appears.
You cannot edit Units of Measure, Country Base, or Currency

Symbol; they can only be specified when creating a new project.
You can edit the following:
y Currency Conversion Rate: The number of currency units
per one country base currency unit. This is for when you are
using a currency other than that of the country base.
y Project Title: Appears as the project title on reports in Aspen
Icarus Reporter and Icarus Editor, and also appears as the
Scenario Description on the Project Summary spreadsheet.
y Estimate Class: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
Intended to indicate the purpose of specifications (e.g.,
budget).
y Job Number: Appears on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
y Prepared By: Appears at the top of reports generated by
Aspen Icarus Reporter and on the Title Page in Icarus Editor.
y Estimate Date: Appears immediately under the project title at
the top of the Title Page in Icarus Editor. Reports generated by
Aspen Icarus Reporter also include an Estimate Date;
however, the Estimate Date shown in Aspen Icarus Reporter is
the date on which the project evaluation was run.
Basis for Capital Costs
The Basis for Capital Costs folder include:
y Units of measure customization.
y General specs affecting capital and operating costs, including
contingency (based on specified process description, process
complexity, and project type), process control, location,
engineering start date, soil conditions, vessel design code, and
level of instrumentation.
y Workforce wage rates (for both the overall project and by
craft), productivities, and workweek definition.
y Indexing of material costs and man-hours by COA.
Input Units of Input Units of Measure Customization allows you to customize the
Measure units of measure that appear on specification forms.
Customization Input Units of Measure Customization can only be accessed from
outside of the project in the Palette’s Libraries view. It does not
appear in the Project Explorer’s Project Basis view.
To customize input units of measure:
1. With no project open, expand the Basis for Capital Costs folder
in the Palette’s Libraries view. Expand the appropriate units of
measure basis folder – Inch-Pound or Metric. Right-click on
one of the specification files and click Modify.
Note: If you are modifying a file other than the one named
“Default”, you will need to later select the file in the
project. To do so, right-click on Basis for Capital Costs
in the Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, click Select,
and select the file.
Analyzer displays the Basis for Capital Costs library in Project
Explorer.
2. In the Units of Measure Customization folder, right-click on
Input and click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
3. If, for example, you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour)
speed in your metric-basis project, click Velocity and Flow
Rate and then click Modify.
4. On the Velocity and Flow Rate Units form, enter “CM/H” as
the new unit name for M/H. Then enter the conversion factor
between the two units in the Conversion field. In this example,
the conversion factor between the two units is 100 because:
100 CM/H = 1 M/H.
dialog box. When finished modifying input units of measure,
click Close.
Output (Reports) Output (Reports) Units of Measure Customization allows you to

Units of Measure customize the units of measure that appear on Capital Costs and
Customization other reports.
To customize output units of measure:
1. Right-click on Output (Reports) Units of Measure
Customization in the Basis for Capital Costs folder in Project
Explorer’s Project Basis view, and then click Edit on the
pop-up menu.
The Output Units of Measure dialog box appears.
2. You can change the basis for all output units of measure by
selecting a different basis in the Unit of Measure Basis section;
however, note that this voids all previous customizations.
To customize only individual units, such as velocity and flow
rate units, select the unit type and click Modify. Then, for each
unit you wish to change, enter the new unit name and the
conversion factor (between the old and new units).
In this example, centimeters

per hour (CM/H) replaces
meters per hour (M/H). A
conversion factor of 100 has
been entered because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
For example, if you want to use CM/H (centimeters per hour)

speed in your metric-basis project, enter “CM/H” as the new
unit name for M/H. Then, enter the conversion factor between
the two units in the Conversion field. In this example, the
conversion factor between the two units is 100 because 100
CM/H = 1 M/H.
dialog box. When finished modifying output units of measure,
click Close.
General Specs General Specs greatly affect the total capital and operating cost of
the project. To access, right-click on General Specs in the Project
Basis view’s Basis for Capital Costs folder, and then click Edit on
the pop-up menu.
The section of the Standard Basis file containing General Specs

appears in a specification form.
Process Description, Process Complexity and Project Type

combine to generate contingency (as a percent of total project
cost). They are interdependent, and the final value is a nonlinear
combination of the individual contribution. As an example of the
various rule-based deductions used, consider the selections made
in the Standard Basis file pictured above:
y Process Description: New and unproven process
y Process Complexity: Highly complex
y Project Type: Grass roots/Clear field
Note: You must clear the Since the process is new and unproven, contingency value is made
Contingency Percent field “high” compared to the base condition. Also, since the process
for the system to calculate
the contingency based on complexity is high, the contingency is “raised” again. The Grass
your changes. roots/Clear field project type “lowers” the contingency because of
reduced site constraints.
Field Description
Process Also drives the design allowances for all
Description equipment whose material cost is system-
generated. User-entered costs are not
affected. A new and unproven process has a
higher design allowance compared with a
proven process. This is applied against all
non-quoted equipment
Process Used to adjust contingency. Highly complex
Complexity implies high temperature/pressure and more
instrumentation and controllers (e.g., batch),
whereas simplicity implies offsites.
Process Control You can provide digital, analog or distributed
control system for the project and the process
control strategy is fixed with this choice.
Project Information
Project Location Adjusts the various location dependent cost
fields based on the actual geographical
location of the project site. The system
calculates values such as freight (domestic
and ocean), taxes/duties, wage rates and
workforce productivities.
Project Type Used to determine the configuration of the
project’s electrical power distribution and
process control systems.
Contingency This field will have the value of the
Percent contingency percentage calculated by the
standard basis expert based on user
specification of project information. This
allows the user to modify the value estimated
by Analyzer. This value represents:
(i.) Construction Contingency
Field Description
(ii.) Material Contingency
(iii.) Engineering Contingency
Estimated Start These three fields show the year, month, and
Year/Month/Day day that the basic engineering will begin.
of Basic Refer to Icarus Reference, Chapter 31:
Engineering Engineering, for a definition of engineering
functions.
Soil Condition Specifies the nature of the soil most
Around Site prevalent around the site. This impacts the
development of all foundations, the amount
of pilings developed, any excavation and
trenching work items, and the construction
rental requirement. For descriptions of soil
types, see Icarus Reference, Chapter 19,
“Civil”.
Equipment Specification
Pressure Vessel Specifies the design code used for pressure
Design Code vessels design. The following design codes
can be chosen:
y ASME = ASME code, Section VIII, Div 1
y BS5500 = British code, BS5500
y JIS = Japanese code, B8243
y DIN = German Code, AD Merkblatt
Vessel Diameter Specifies the vessel dimension in the
Specification component specification form as inside
diameter (ID) or outside diameter (OD).
P and I Design Specifies the level of instrumentation
Level provided for the equipment. The P and I may
be standard instrumentation (STD) or highly
instrumented (FULL). Refer to the Piping
and Instrumentation Drawings for
instrumentation on specific equipment.
Data Affected by General The following is a detailed description of the data affected by the
Specs General Specs and the magnitude of their effect depending on the
different selections.
• Domestic Freight (% of material)
Specifies cost of domestic freight as a percentage of material
costs. The value for this field depends on the Project Location
selected in General Specs.
Domestic freight percentages for the different locations are:
North America = 4
South America = 5
Central America = 5
Europe = 1
Asia = 1
Africa = 4
Australia = 2
• Ocean Freight (% of material)

Specifies cost of ocean freight as a percentage of material costs.
The value for this field depends on the project location selected
in the standard basis. Ocean freight for the different locations is
adjusted based on the percentage of plant material that can be
purchased locally. The percent adjustments for the different
locations are:
North America = 0
South America = 8
Central America = 5
Europe = 0
Asia = 0
Africa = 8
Australia = 12
The final value of the field is calculated by the following
formula:
O.F (%) = % Adjust * (100 - % material locally purchased) / 100
• Taxes/Duty (% of material)
Specifies taxes as a percentage of total material costs. The value
used in the capital cost evaluation depends on the project
location chosen in the file. They are:
North America = 6.25
South America = 4.00
Central America = 4.00
Europe = 0.00
Asia = 6.00
Africa = 4.00
Australia = 7.00
• Contingency (%)
Specifies allowance for contingencies as a percentage of the bare
plant cost. This field depends on the selection made for the
following fields in the standard basis file:
Process Description
Process Complexity
Project Type
You must clear the Contingency Percent field for the system to
calculate the contingency based on your changes.
The following data defines the general design conditions to be
applied to the entire project being estimated; this information is
used to reflect the desired project design methodology.
• Equipment Design Allowance (%)
Specifies percent allowance for design changes for system
developed equipment costs. The value depends on the Process
Description field. The following values are selected for the
different project conditions:
New and unproven process = 15
New process = 10
Redesigned process = 7
Licensed process = 5
Proven process = 3
• Equipment Rotating Spares (%)

Specifies a percentage of the purchase cost of all rotating
equipment in the estimate to allow for spare rotors, seals and
parts. The allowance for spares is developed based upon-0
purchased equipment cost values for pumps, compressors,
drivers and generators. The following value is chosen for the
above field based on the Project Location:
North America = 7
South America = 10
Central America = 10
Europe = 7
Asia = 10
Africa = 15
Australia = 7
• Soil Condition at Site

Specifies the soil type used to develop data for civil work
throughout the project. Based on the soil type chosen, soil
loading and soil density are selected. The Icarus Reference
provides a complete definition for all the soil types. Once the
soil type is selected, the system automatically selects the type of
piles used in the project. The following pile types will be
selected:
Soil Type Pile Type
Soft clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Firm clay Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Wet sand Creosoted wood - 18-30 tons
Sand+clay Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Dry sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Sand Precast concrete - 24-50 tons
Gravel Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Soft rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hardpan Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Med-rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Hard rock Steel h-pile - 60-170 tons
Pile foundations are designated according to the country base

default capacities and spacing. Pile foundations are provided for
equipment and structures whose weight (including concrete)
exceeds one-half the pile compression capacity.
• Power Distribution
The type of project is used to configure the electrical power
distribution system inside Analyzer. The power distribution
specification generated by Analyzer provides the means of
designating MAIN and UNIT substations and the cabling
between them.
Note that no transmission LINE is provided for any of the
different choices of “Project Type.”
Components Included
Project Type MAIN Substation UNIT
Grass roots/Clear field Transformers, MCC, SW
Switchgears Transformer
Plant addition - Switchgear MCC

adjacent to existing
plant
Plant addition - inside Switchgear MCC

existing plant
Plant addition - None Added None Added

suppressed
infrastructure
Plant Modifications / Switchgear MCC

Revamps
In addition, for plant modifications/revamps, the capital cost

excludes cable costs related to connecting the main substation
with the unit, whereas a default distance of 1,000 FEET [300 M]
(excluding hook-up allowance) is used to cost the power
distribution components for the remaining project types.
• Process Control
Specifies the desired type of control scheme: Analog, DDCTL
(Distributed Digital), or PLC (Programmable Logic Controllers)
Components Included
Project Type Operator Center Control Center
Grass roots/Clear field YES YES
Plant addition - NO NO
suppressed infrastructure
All others NO YES
• Project Schedule
The system develops a project schedule based upon the estimate
scope of work including dates and durations for design
engineering, procurement, delivery of materials and equipment,
site development and construction. The construction schedule is
integrated with the cost estimate to provide the basis for
estimation of schedule-dependent costs such as equipment rental
requirements, field supervision and construction management.
The schedule commences at the start of basic engineering, as
indicated by the date for basic engineering in the standard basis
file.
In addition, the General Specs provide defaults for various general

design conditions. These design conditions, along with the system
defaults, reflect the project design methodology. This in turn
affects costs for equipment, material and manpower, and the
overall project schedules. These defaults are not editable in
Analyzer. The following defaults (based on their major categories)
are used by Analyzer to convey specifications for the project
design data:
Item Defaults
Equipment Remote shop fabrication maximum
dimensions:
Maximum diameter: 14.5 FEET [4.5 M]
Maximum length: 100 FEET [30 M]
Maximum weight: 250 TONS [225 TON]
Piping Pipe Fabrication: Remote shop fabricated

piping
Specifies the general method of pipe
fabrication for the project.
Civil Concrete Mix type: READY - Ready mix

(purchased)
Steel Steel finish type: PT – painted steel
Item Defaults
Project Schedule Start engineering phase: BASIC – Basic

engineering phase
Delivery Schedule Adjust (%): 100

Specifies an adjustment, as a
percentage, to the schedule durations
developed by the system for delivery of
equipment items, bulk materials,
control system. This adjustment applies
to receipt of vendor data and
fabricate/ship lead times.
Construction Schedule Adjust (%):100
Specifies an adjustment, as a
percentage, to the schedule durations
developed by the system for all
construction manpower.
Bar Symbol: *
Specifies the symbol to be used to print
summary activity bars.
Gap Symbol: -
Specifies the symbol to print the gaps
within activity bars.
Critical path symbol: c
Specifies the symbol to be used to print
the critical path.
User bar symbol: x
Symbol for printing user-defined bars
on bar charts.
Engineering % man-hour: 100

Adjustment for Adjustment of the duration of the basic
Basic Engineering engineering phase. A value less than
Phase 100% will shorten the duration. A value
greater than 100% will increase the
duration.
Item Defaults
Engineering % man-hour: 100
Adjustment for Adjustment of the duration of detail
Detailed engineering. A value less than 100%
engineering Phase will shorten the duration. A value
greater than 100% will increase the
duration.
Contracts Contract number: 1

(scope/definition) Specifies the number used to reference
this contract, its description, scope of
effort and profile of indirects,
overheads, fee, contingency, etc.
Company title: PRIME CONTRACTOR
Specifies the description of the contract.
This description is used as the title in
appropriate reports.
Construction Construction Workforce specifications are divided into General

Workforce Rates and Craft Rates.
General Rates The General Wage Rates information globally sets wage rates and
productivities for all crafts. To access, right-click on General Wage
Rates in the Project Basis view’s Basis for Construction Workforce
folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Analyzer displays the Wage General Info specifications form in

the Main Window.
Descriptions of the General Wage Rate specifications follow.
Field Description
Number of Number of shifts used during construction. If
shifts any premium pay is involved with second and
third shift work (beyond overtime pay), such
premium should be indicated by a properly
averaged craft rate per shift.
Productivity Specifies whether to use multi-shift /workweek
adjustment adjustments or not.
Indirects If wage rates are to be treated as all-inclusive,
the indirects may be deleted for this workforce
by specifying “-”. Selecting an all-in rate
suppresses all construction indirects: fringes,
burdens, small tools, construction rental
equipment, etc.
All Crafts Percent of Base

Workforce Enter B for system base. (Reference to a
reference base previously defined workforce number applies
to Icarus 2000 only.)
Field Description
Wage Rate Wage rates for all crafts as a percentage of
percent of base reference base wage rates.
Productivity Productivities for all crafts as a percentage of

percent of base reference base wage rates.
All Crafts Fixed Rates

This input may be used to globally set the wage rates and
productivities of all crafts in this workforce to fixed values.
Wage rate all Specifies the fixed wage rate (in the project
crafts currency) for all crafts in the workforce. See
discussion in Icarus Reference.
Productivity all Specifies the fixed productivity value for all
crafts crafts in this workforce. See discussion in
Icarus Reference. If no value is specified, the
system defaults to 100%.
Work week per Refer to the description of workforces in
shift Icarus Reference for the effect of changing the
work week and number of shifts upon
productivity and job duration. The standard
work week plus overtime must not exceed 84
hours per week per shift.
Standard work Specifies number of standard hours per week
week per man per shift.
Overtime Specifies number of overtime hours per week
per man per shift.
Overtime rate Specifies overtime pay expressed as a
percent percentage of standard pay (e.g., time and one
standard half = 150%).
General Craft Wages

The general craft wages are for crafts that could appear in most
crews and whose productivities and/or wage rates are dependent
on the type of crew.
Helper wage rate UK Base only. Specifies wage rate for craft
help as a fixed rate to be used in all crews.
Helper wage UK Base only. Specifies the wage rate for
percent craft rate craft help as a percent of the principal craft in
the crew. This value must be less than 100%.
Field Description
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foremen as a fixed
rate rate to be used in all crews. Default: 110% of
rate of highest paid craft in crew.
Foreman wage Specifies the wage rate for foreman as a
percent craft rate percent of the highest paid craft in crew. This
value must be greater than or equal to 100%.
Default: 110% of rate of highest paid craft in
crew.
Craft Rates Craft Rates set the wage rate and productivity individually for each
craft. To access, right-click on Craft Rates in the Project Basis
view’s Basis for Capital Costs\Construction Workforce folder, and
the click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Analyzer displays the Wage Rate Info specifications form in the

Main Window.
To add multiple definitions

to Craft Wage Rates, click
the Add button on the
button bar:
Use these fields to set the wage rate and productivity individually
for each craft.
Field Description
Craft wages/prod. Wage rates and productivities may be
assigned to individual crafts. Those crafts
not referenced are assigned wage rates
and productivities specified in General
Wage Rate or the system default values.
Field Description
Craft code Identifies the craft to which the following
wage rate and productivity apply.
The craft code must be an existing system
craft code.
Wage rate/mh Specifies the wage rate (in the project
currency) for this craft for standard hours.
Productivity Specifies the productivity of this craft as

a percentage of the system’s base. (See
discussion in Icarus Reference)
Indexing The Material and Man-hour specification forms in the Indexing

folder allow you to manipulate the material and/or man-hour costs
for process equipment and installation bulks. You can also adjust
these indexes by location by using the Location specification form.
For example, you could specify to increase the material costs
associated with a type of process equipment.
Indexing is used to tailor Kbase to mimic your work methods and
costs. If your equipment costs for a category are consistently offset
from Kbase’s values, use Indexing to correct that.
To adjust the Material or Man-hour index:
1 Right-click on Material or Man-hour and click Edit.
2. To adjust the index for all equipment or for all of one of the
installation bulks, enter the index value in the box provided.
For example, entering “200” in the Equipment box will double
the material costs for all items under the equipment account
group.
To adjust the index for a sub-category, click the arrow-button
in the box. This accesses a similar form listing sub-categories
corresponding to the Code of Accounts (see Icarus Reference,
Chapter 34, for a complete list). Adjustments to a sub-category
override adjustments to the account-group.
3. Click OK to close the form and apply changes.

To adjust by location:
1. Right-click on Location and click Edit.
2. Type the location description.
3. Type the Code of Account (COA) to indicate the start of the
COA range, or click the red arrow and then click Select by the
subcategory on the COA Subcategory Selection window.
The Equipment COA Selection window appears.
Click Select again by the COA.
The COA is entered on the form.
4. Do the same to indicate the end of the COA range.

5. Enter the amount to escalate material costs and/or the amount
to escalate man-hour costs.
6. To escalate another range, click Add.
7. Click OK to close the form and apply changes.
Process Design
The Process Design specifications are used in Analyzer projects
that contain a simulator input. These specs allow Analyzer to map
simulator models into Icarus project components. For example, a
distillation column model in a simulator may be mapped to a
combination of equipment such as a double diameter tower, an air-
cooler (for a condenser), a horizontal tank (for a reflux drum), a
general service pump (for a reflux pump) and a thermosiphon
reboiler.
The Process Design Specifications indicate the default settings that
the system uses for mapping all models of the same class. These
specs can be customized in files and used in many projects.
Simulator Type and Simulator Type and Simulator File Name are described under
Simulator File Name “Loading Simulator Data” on page 4-15.
Simulator Units of The Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs are used in
Measure Mapping mapping simulator units to Analyzer units, serving as the
Specs cross-reference. To access, right-click on Simulator Units of
Measure Mapping Specs in the Project Basis view’s Process
Design folder.
The Units of Measure Specification dialog box appears.
Each simulator
cross-reference
UOM file contains a
basis (which may be
METRIC or I-P). The
basis indicates the
Analyzer base units
set to which
simulator units will
be converted.
The left side of the screen displays the simulation output units. The
right side of the screen displays the corresponding Analyzer units.
The conversion factors between the two units are entered in the
lower-center section of the screen.
Analyzer provides a set of common simulator units and their
conversions to Analyzer units. You can modify and/or add units to
these files.
Specifying the Mapping To specify the mapping for a simulator unit:
for a Simulator Unit
1. Select the simulation unit from the Units Used list in the
Simulation Output section. In the example below, the
simulation unit is CM/HR (Centimeters/Hour).
2. Select the appropriate units category from Units Category list
in the Analyzer section. In the example below, the units
category is Velocity.
3. Select the appropriate Analyzer unit from Units list in the
Analyzer section. In the example below, the Analyzer unit is
M/H (Meters/Hour).
4. Enter the conversion factor between the two units (the
simulation unit and the Analyzer unit) in the Conversion Factor
box. In the example below, the conversion factor between the
two units is 100 because:
100 CM/HR = 1 M/H
If an equivalent Analyzer unit is
not found, select
Miscellaneous as the Units
Category and map the
simulator unit to Other in the
Units window.
5. Click Save to save the mapping. When a unit has been mapped
and saved, a green box appears next to the simulation unit. A
yellow box indicates the unit is not mapped.
Deleting a Mapping To delete a mapping, select the simulator unit and then click
Delete.
Removing a Unit To remove a particular unit from the simulation units list, first
select the unit and then click Remove.
Adding a Unit To add a new unit to the list, enter the new unit symbol in the New
Units to Add box in the Simulation Output section and click Add.
Changes will not affect existing project components.
Changing Existing To change existing components, you should un-size the item or un-
Components map the items and then re-map and re-size.
Once all of the units have been specified, click OK to store and
save the specifications.
It is critical that all simulator units of measure be mapped into
Analyzer units. When the simulator output is loaded, Analyzer
identifies all units of measure in the file. Any units not mapped in
the project’s current simulator cross-reference UOM specification
are automatically added to the list and you are alerted to the need
to define the mapping and re-load the file.
You must correct this in order to continue without problems.
Complete the steps above to specify the mapping for a simulator
unit. Scroll through the Units Used list for any yellow-tagged units.
Map all these, save the file, and re-load the simulator data.
Project Component The Project Component Map Specifications dialog box contains a
Map Specifications list of models for the selected simulator and a list of the
corresponding Icarus project components to which the simulator
models will map. To access, right-click on Project Component
Map Specifications in the Project Basis view’s Process Design
folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Models that are mapped in the current file are marked with an
asterisk (*). If no asterisk is present, then that model will not
generate any project components when loaded, mapped, and sized.
Exclude simulator models from the mapping process by selecting
the simulator item and then clicking Delete All Mappings.
You can select a simulator item and review the mapping(s) for that
item. To change one of the mappings, select an item in the Current
Map List, click Delete One Mapping, and then create a new
mapping.
To create a new mapping, click New Mapping and then select an
appropriate Icarus project component.
For simulator column models, an additional specification can be
made. Since a column may be mapped to multiple pieces of
equipment, Analyzer requires an identification for each of these
mappings. Refer to Mapping Simulator Models in Chapter 4 for
tower/column configuration mapping identifications.
Default Simulator Mapping Specs
The following tables list models that are mapped to Analyzer project components. Models not supported can be
mapped to a quoted item if you mark “Map Unsupported Models To Quoted Cost Item” in Preferences (Process tab).
AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Map Specs

Model Name Model Description Analyzer Default
CCD Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
CFUGE Centrifuge filter Centrifuge SOLID-BOWL
COMPR Compressor/turbine Centrifugal gas compressor / Gas turbine with combustion chamber
CRUSHER Solids crusher Jaw crusher
CYCLONE Solid-gas cyclone Cyclone Dust collector
DECANTER Liquid-liquid decanter Vertical vessel – process
DISTL Shortcut distillation rating Single-diameter trayed tower
DSTWU Shortcut distillation design Single-diameter trayed tower
ESP Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FABFL Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse
FILTER Continuous rotary vacuum Rotary drum filter
FLASH2 Two-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FLASH3 Three-outlet flash Vertical vessel – process
FSPLIT Stream splitter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX Two-stream heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYCYC Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
PUMP Pump/hydraulic turbine Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
RADFRAC Rigorous fractionation Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
Floating head heat exchanger (condenser)
U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
Horizontal drum (accumulator)
Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux pump)
PETROFAC Consists of 42 configurations. Single-diameter trayed tower (column)
It has been confirmed that the
following can be mapped to
Analyzer: U-tube reboiler (reboiler)
PREFLIF- preflash block with Horizontal drum (accumulator)
furnace, zero pumparounds Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump (reflux pump)
and zero sidestrippers.
Furnace block
CDUIOF – crude block with
furnace, three pumparounds
and three sidestrippers.
CDU 3 – vacuum block with
two pumparounds and two
sidestrippers.
RBATCH Batch reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RCSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, reactor jacketed
REQUIL Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Equilibrium reactor-gibbs Agitated Tank – enclosed, energy jacketed minimization
RPLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
RSTOIC Stoichiometer reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RYIELD Yield reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SCFRAC Short-cut distillation Single-diameter trayed tower
SCREEN Wet or dry screen separator Vibrating system
SWASH Single-stage solids washer Rotary drum filter
VSCRUB Venturi scrubber Washer dust collector
Default Simulator Mapping Specs (continued)
Chemstation’s ChemCAD V Map Specs

Model Model Description Analyzer Default
BAGH Baghouse filter Cloth bay baghouse dust collector
COMP Adiabatic (isentropic) or polytopic Compression Centrifugal Axial Gas Compressor
CFUG Basket centrifugal filter Atmospheric suspended basket centrifuge
CRYS Crystallizer or melting by cooling/heating Batch vacuum crystallizer
CSED Solid-wall basket centrifuge separating solids from Solid bowl centrifuge
liq slurry
CYCL Gas-solid cyclone separator Cyclone dust collector
DRYE Dryer Direct rotary dryer
EREA Equilibrium reactor Agitated tank reactor
ESPT Electrostatic precipitator Low voltage electrical precipitator
FIRE Fired heater Floating head heat exchanger
FLAS Multipurpose flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
FLTR Vacuum or constant-pressure filter Rotary disk filter
GIBS Gibbs reactor Agitated tank reactor
HCYC Hydrocyclone Water cyclone (separation equipment)
HTXR Heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
KREA Kinetic reactor (plug flow or continuous stirred Agitated tank reactor
tank reactors)
LLVF Vapor/liquid/liquid flash Vertical cylindrical vessel
MIXE Stream mixer (flash calculation at output Vertical cylindrical vessel
pressure)
PUMP Liquid pump (to increase pressure of liquid Centrifugal pump
stream)
REAC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated tank reactor
SCDS Simultaneous correction rigorous fractionation Single diameter trayed tower
(single column)
Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
(reflux pump)
SCRE Screen Single deck rectangular vibrating screen
TOWR Inside/out rigorous fractionation (single column) Single diameter trayed tower
(reflux pump)
WASH Washer Washer dust collector
Hyprotech’s HYSIM Map Specs

BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
(reflux pump)
COMPRESSOR Compressor Centrifugal gas compressor
CSTR Continuous stirred-tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
EXPANDER Expander Gas turbine
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones - mineral
separation
PIPING Pipeline
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and
others
PUMP Pump Centrifugal single or multi-stage pump
RATEHEATEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
Hyprotech’s HYSYS Map Specs

AIR COOLER Air cooler Air cooler, free-standing or
rack-mounted.
BAG FILTER Baghouse filter Dust collector cloth bay
COLUMN Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
CSTR Continuous stirred-tank Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
CYCLONE Gas-solid separator Cyclone dust collector
FILTER Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
HEATER Heater/Cooler Floating head heat exchanger
HEATX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
HYDROCYCLONE Solid-liquid hydrocyclone Water only cyclones – mineral
separation
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single-diameter packed tower and
others
REQUI Equilibrium reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RGIBBS Gibbs-energy reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
RSTOIC Stoichiometric reactor Agitated Tank – enclosed, jacketed
SOLIDSEP Solids separator Cyclone dust collector
SimSci’s PRO/II Map Specs

CENTRIFUGE Centrifuge Solid bowl centrifuge
COLUMN UNITS Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Floating head heat exchanger
(condenser)
(reflux pump)
CRYSTAL Crystallizer Oslo growth type crystallizer
CSTR Continuous stirred tank Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
DECANTER Countercurrent decanter Rotary drum filter
DEPRESSURE Non-steady-state depressure Vertical vessel - process
DRYER Solids dryer Atmospheric tray dryer
FLASH FLASH Vertical vessel - process
HEATEX Simple heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
PLUG Plug-flow reactor Single diameter packed tower
REACTOR Reactor Agitated Tank - enclosed, jacketed
RIGHTEX Rigorous heat exchanger Floating head heat exchanger
ROTDRUM Rotary drum filter Rotary drum filter
SHORTCUT Distillation column Single-diameter trayed tower
Design Criteria After the simulator model is loaded into Kbase, mapping and
sizing of the items can be performed. If an item is already sized
inside the simulator, the sizing parameters are automatically
brought into Kbase and used.
Items not sized by the simulator can be sized following the
instructions in Chapter 6. In addition to process information
obtained from the simulator, certain design specifications may be
required before sizing can be accomplished.
Kbase’s Sizing Expert uses design values based on the user-
defined field values on specification forms in the Design Criteria
sub-folder. The values on these forms provide the basis for
developing design specifications from operating conditions for all
equipment to be sized.
You can enter design conditions (design pressure and temperature)

for all equipment (using the Common form) and also enter design
conditions for types of equipment. (Conditions entered on the
equipment type forms override those on the Common form).
Common
Design pressure and temperature entered on the Common
specifications form applies to all equipment except equipment for
which you have separately specified these design conditions.
Design Pressure
Click on the Design Pressure field to open the Design Pressure
Specifications form. The specifications form lets you specify
rules for calculating the design pressure based on the range in
which the operating pressure falls. The design pressure is
calculated from the operating pressure using the formula shown
on the form. You can modify the pressure limit (upper and
lower limit) as well as parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of IPE, the “Design Pressure –

Multiplier” field was used. This field has now been
replaced by the Design Pressure Specifications
form. If projects created using these earlier versions
are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value
specified. This ensures that old projects can be
carried over using the same design criteria.
Design Temperature
Click on the Design Temperature field to open the Design
Temperature Specifications form. The specifications form lets
you specify rules for calculating the design temperature based
on the range in which the operating temperature falls. The
design pressure is calculated from the operating temperature
using the formula shown on the form. You can modify the
temperature ranges (upper and lower limit) as well as
parameters A and B.
Note: In earlier versions of IPE, the “Design Temperature

- Increase” field was used. This field has now been
replaced by the Design Temperature Specifications
form. If projects created using these earlier versions
are opened, then the parameters A and B are
automatically adjusted based on the multiplier value
specified.
Pumps
In addition to entering design pressure and temperature (see
instructions under Common, page 3-36), you can enter the
following design criteria for pumps:
Pump Overdesign Factor
The pump overdesign factor is used by Kbase to increase the
volumetric throughput of the pump and the power requirement
of the pump. The total volumetric flow rate calculated from the
simulator information is multiplied by the value provided in
this field to estimate the design flow rate for the equipment.
For example:
Operation flow rate: 250 GPM
Pump overdesign factor: 1.1
Calculated design capacity: 250 X 1.1 = 275 GPM
Compressors
following design criteria for compressors:
Driver Type
Specifies the driver type used for compressors. The default
value is “None.” The selections are NONE, GAS ENGINE,
MOTOR, TURBINE.
Heat Exchangers
following design criteria for heat exchangers:
Launch MUSE
MUSE™ performs detailed simulation of multi-stream plate-
fin heat exchangers made from brazed aluminum, stainless
steel or titanium.
A valid MUSE version 3.3 license is required to use this
feature.
Select “Yes” to launch MUSE during interactive sizing of plate
fin heat exchangers. Select “No” to run MUSE in the silent
mode.
Furnace Fractional Efficiency
The furnace duty obtained from the simulator is the absorbed
duty. Total fired duty is obtained by dividing the absorbed duty
by fractional efficiency. This value should be <1.0.
Fuel Heating Value
The Lower Heating Value (LHV) used to estimate the fuel
consumption by fired furnaces.
Air Cooler Inlet Temperature
This field represents the default value that shall be used as the
inlet air temperature in the case of Air Coolers.
Air Cooler Exit Temperature
Air Cooler Exit Temperature is used when estimating the
surface area of air cooled heat exchangers. The value given in
this field is used as the exit temperature for the air cooler.
If the field is empty or has value of 0.0, then the Sizing Expert
assigns the exit air temperature value to be 10.0 DEG F greater
than the inlet air temperature.
For example, if the Air Cooler Inlet Temperature is 77.0 DEG
F and you do not enter the Air Cooler Exit Temperature, Kbase
uses 87.0 DEG F as the default value.
Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
In the design of shell and tube heat exchangers, design
engineers sometimes apply the 2/3rd rule in calculating the
design pressure. As per ASME heat exchanger code, if the
design pressure of the lower-pressure side (either tube or shell)
is at least 2/3rd the design pressure on the high-pressure side,
then overpressure in the high-pressure side will not result in
rupture in the lower-pressure side (provided relief devices have
been properly sized).
When specified, the 2/3 rule will increase the design pressure
of the low pressure side to at least 67% of the design pressure
of the high pressure side, even when the operating pressure on
the low pressure side could result in a lower design pressure as
per the Design Pressure field.
Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor
The calculated heat transfer area is multiplied by the value
given in the field.
The mechanical design is performed for the final heat transfer
area.
For example:
Calculated surface area = 1000 SF
Heat Exchanger Area Minimum Overdesign Factor = 1.1
Surface area used for mechanical design: 1000 X 1.1 = 1100
SF
Note that the final surface area in general is greater than the
calculated value because of mechanical considerations.
Towers
following design criteria on the Towers form (applies to all
towers):
Bottom Sump Height (For Trayed and Packed Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to
that required for separation is provided at the bottom for liquid
level and reboiler return.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the
tower.
R/R-Minimum (For SHORTCUT model in Pro/II)
The SimSci simulator shortcut distillation model calculates the
number of theoretical stages required for different ratios of
operating reflux ratio (R) to minimum reflux ratio (R-
Minimum).
The number of stages should be available in the simulator
report for the ratio chosen.
Vapor Disengagement Height (For Trayed and Packed
Towers)
For both trayed and packed towers, extra height in addition to
that required for separation is provided at the top for vapor
disengagement before passing to the condenser.
The value in this field is added to the calculated height of the
tower.
Packed Towers
following design criteria for packed towers:
Packing Type
Two types of packings, random and structured, are used in
packed towers. The type of packing affects the flood point
pressure drop estimation and the packing efficiency (HETP)
value.
The value in this field is used by the Sizing Expert in the
calculation of the tower diameter and height.
Packing Factor for Packings
Packing factor is used in the Kister and Gill correlation to
estimate pressure drop at the flood point. Once the pressure
drop is known, the flood velocity is calculated using the latest
versions of the generalized pressure drop correlation (GPDC)
charts for both the random and structured packings.
Packed Tower Derating Factor
With certain systems, traditional flooding equations
consistently predict higher flood points than those actually
experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an empirical
derating factor (< 1.0) is applied. The derating factor is
multiplied by the predicted flood vapor load or liquid load
obtained from the traditional equation to obtain the actual or
derated flood load for the given system.
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming
tendency of the system. The higher the foaming tendency, the
lower the derating factor.
If you do not enter a value, Kbase uses 1.0 as the derating
factor.
Packed Tower Flooding Factor
Packed towers are usually designed for 70 to 80 percent of the
flood point velocity. This allows a sufficient margin for
uncertainties associated with the flood point concept and
prediction and to keep the design point away from the region at
which efficiency rapidly diminishes (just below the flood
point).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the
user-provided value is not available.
HETP
The concept of HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical plate)
enables comparison of efficiency between packed and plate
columns. Because there are only a few variables that
significantly affect HETP and due to the unreliability of even
the best mass transfer models, rules of thumb for HETP
successfully compete with the mass transfer models.
For the packing types available in Kbase (given in the Icarus
Reference), Kbase estimates the HETP value based on the
packing shape, dimensions and type of material. If a user-
provided value is available, then the Sizing Expert uses the
value in the above field for calculating the height of the packed
tower.
Packed Section Height
The value represents the height of each packed section and is
used in the design of packed towers to estimate the number of
packed sections.
Surface Area Per Unit Volume
Higher specific surface areas (surface area per unit volume)
increases vapor-liquid contact area and therefore, efficiency.
For structured packings, Kbase determines this value
empirically and uses it in estimating HETP if you have not
already specified an HETP value.
A default value of 75 SF/CF is used in the absence of a
user-entered value.
Trayed Towers
following design criteria for trayed towers:
Trayed Tower Flooding Factor
Flooding is the condition where pressure drop across a tray is
sufficient to cause the dynamic liquid head to be equivalent to
the tray spacing plus the weir height. At this point, the liquid
backup in the downcomer is just at the point of overflowing the
weir on the plate above. When this happens, the column fills
with a foamy liquid and becomes inoperable.
The flood factor is the fractional velocity approach to flooding,
i.e., (Actual Vapor Velocity)/(Vapor velocity at the point of
flooding).
The Sizing Expert uses the default value specified if the user-
provided value is not available.
Foaming Tendency
Vapor disengagement is easy in non-foaming, low-pressure
systems. However, vapor disengagement from downcomer
liquid in foaming systems is difficult as the liquid hangs on to
the entrained vapor. Sufficient residence time must be provided
in the downcomer to allow adequate disengagement of vapor
from the descending liquid. Industrial practice has created a
guideline for the mum downcomer velocity of clear liquids
based on their foaming tendency.
The following values for the downcomer liquid velocity are
used based on the choice for the above field.
Downcomer Liquid Velocity, (FPS)
Tray Spacing, INCHES
Foaming
18 24 30
Tendency
Low 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 – 0.6 0.6 – 0.7
Moderate 0.3 – 0.4 0.4 – 0.5 0.5 - 0.6
High 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 – 0.25 0.2 - 0.3
experienced. To allow for such discrepancies, an empirical
The trayed derating factors are often related to the foaming
lower the derating factor. If the user-specified value is not
available, a derating factor is selected based on the value of
foaming tendency.
The default value for foaming tendency is Moderate.
Trayed Tower Derating Factor
experienced. To allow for such a discrepancy, an empirical
The derating factors are often vaguely related to the foaming
lower the derating factor.
If the user-provided value is not available, or the value 0.0 is
entered in the field, then the derating factor is selected based on
the foaming tendency of the liquids in the column.
Relative Volatility of Key Components
The number of theoretical stages for a trayed tower is obtained
from the simulator report. The actual number of trays is
calculated by using the tray efficiency value provided by the
user in the design criteria file.
However, if the field is empty or has a 0.0 value, the tray
efficiency for the separation is estimated by using the
correlation of relative volatility of key components with tray
efficiency. The O’Connell correlation is used to estimate the
overall tray efficiency.
Tray Efficiency
Overall column efficiency is defined by:
E_oc = N_t/ N_a
where:
N_t = Number of theoretical stages required for the separation
minus the sum of theoretical stages provided by the
reboiler, condenser, and intermediate heat exchangers.
N_a = Number of actual trays in the column.
Several empirical correlations are available in the literature.
Also, rigorous theoretical predictions based on gas and liquid
film resistances are available to assist in predicting the tray
efficiency.
If the user specification is not available for the field, then the
value is estimated using empirical correlations from the
literature.
Configurations Towers
Use this form to specify design criteria for tower configurations.
Vessels
following design criteria on the Vessels form (applies to all process
vessels):
Residence Time
The amount of liquid holdup in the vessel is estimated by the
liquid volumetric flow through a vessel in a specified amount
of time. The vessel volume divided by volumetric flow rate is
defined as the residence time for the vessel.
For example:
Liquid flow through the vessel: 100 CFM
Residence time: 5 MIN
Calculated liquid volume in the vessel: 100 CFM X 5 = 500
CF.
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio (For Vertical and
Horizontal Vessel Design)
Kbase defaults for this field are used if the field is empty or has
the value of “0.0.” The Kbase defaults depend on the operating
conditions for the vessel. Based on the operating pressure of
the vessel obtained from the simulator report, the following
values are used:
Pressure (PSIA) Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
0 – 250 3
250 – 500 4
> 500 5
For example:
Vessel operation pressure: <250 PSIA
Diameter: 6 FEET
Calculated vessel height: 6 X 3 = 18 FEET
Residence time overrides Process Vessel Height to Diameter
Ratio.
Minimum Vessel Diameter
The Minimum Vessel Diameter field is used if the vessel
diameter calculated by the sizing routines is less than this
value.
Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method
When sizing vertical and horizontal vapor liquid separators,
Kbase computes the maximum allowable vapor velocity using
the method selected in this field.
Liquid Entrainment Method:
This is an empirical correlation developed by Watkins and
is a function of vapor and liquid densities, and the
parameter Kv, which itself is a polynomial function of
vapor and liquid flows and densities.
Particle size separation method:
This method estimates the disengagement velocity of the
liquid droplet in the continuous vapor phase. The design
velocity is determined as a percentage of the
disengagement velocity.
Average Liquid Particle Diameter (For particle size separation
method)
This field specifies the default average liquid droplet diameter.
This value is used in the design of horizontal and vertical
vessels by the particle size separation method (which can be
selected in the Vapor/Liquid Separator Sizing Method field
right above this field).
Design Factor Multiplier for Disengagement Velocity (For
particle size separation method)
This field is used in the calculation of the maximum allowable
design velocity, which is a percentage of the disengagement
velocity.
For example:
Disengagement velocity : 10 FEET/SECOND
Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity: 0.5
Maximum allowable design velocity: 10 X 0.5 = 5
FEET/SECOND
Separation Factor (For liquid entrainment method)
In the liquid entrainment method, the separation factor is used
to determine the maximum allowable vapor velocity. The
separation factor is either entered by the user in this field or
computed by Kbase using the relation described in the vessel
sizing design procedure.
Agitated Vessels
following design criteria for agitated vessels:
Agitator Type
The various types of agitators that can be chosen for design are
described in the Icarus Reference. The type of agitator selected
determines the default driver power and impeller speed. This is
used to estimate the agitation requirements in tanks.
Storage Vessels
following design criteria for storage vessels:
Number of Holding Days
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume
of liquid required for a certain period of operation. Kbase uses
this field to determine the liquid volume stored in the vessel.
For example:
Inlet flow rate: 500 CF per day.
Number of holding days: 30 (specified by user).
Liquid volume inside the storage vessel: 500 X 30 = 1,500 CF.
Holding Hours in a Day
Storage vessel sizing is determined by estimating the volume
of liquid required for a certain period of operation. Kbase uses
this field to determine the liquid volume required per day.
For example:
Inlet flow rate: 500 CFH.
Holding Hours in a Day: 24 (specified by user).
Final volume per day : 500 X 24 = 12,000 CF/day.
Storage Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Once the volume of the storage vessel is determined based on
the process fluid flow rate and design conditions, the actual
dimensions (height and diameter) of the equipment must be
estimated. You can specify the dimensional requirements of the
equipment using this field.
A default is used if the field is empty or has value 0.0. The
default depends on the operating conditions for the vessel.
Vapor Free Space (% of Total Storage Vessel Volume)
A percent volume of the sized vessel in excess of the required
liquid volume.
Horizontal Vessels
following design criteria for horizontal vessels:
Vapor Area /Cross-Sectional Area
Once Kbase calculates the maximum vapor velocity, the
velocity and flow rate are used to determine the vapor space
required. The vapor space is then divided by the vapor area
/cross-sectional area to get the total required cross-sectional
area.
The process vessel height to diameter ratio overrides this field.
Separation Factor Multiplier
For horizontal vessels, the separation factor is normally higher
under similar operating conditions than for vertical vessels.
Therefore, the calculated separation factor is multiplied by the
separation factor multiplier.
Minimum Boot Length
When horizontal vessels are used for three phase separations,
the heavy second liquid phase is removed in the drip leg
situated at the bottom of the vessel.
Minimum Boot Diameter
This field represents diameter of the boot leg which is designed
to remove the heavy second liquid.
Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
The bootleg cross-sectional area is estimated using the liquid
velocity field specified in this field and the process vessel
height to diameter ratio.
Vertical Vessels
following design criteria for vertical vessels:
Minimum Disengagement Height
This is the height from the liquid level to the mist eliminator.
Minimum Height Above the Mist Eliminator
Used in the calculation of the total vessel height.
Height of Mist Eliminator
Height of mist eliminator section.
Minimum Ht. Btw Low and High Liquid Level Taps
The liquid level based on residence time should meet this
minimum specification. (Field is at bottom of form, not in
Vertical Vessels section.)
Ht. Btw Inlet Nozzle and High Liquid Level Tap
Represents the height between the inlet nozzle (center line) and
the high liquid level tap. (Field is at bottom of form, not in
Vertical Vessels section.)
Ht. Btw Low Liquid Level Tap and Tangent Line
Represents the height between the low liquid level tap and the
tangent line. (Field is at bottom of form, not in Vertical Vessels
section.)
Miscellaneous
Vibrating Screen Feed Material
This field specifies the solid material type used by solids
handling equipment. The material type affects the screen unit
capacity which is defined as the amount of solids (TPH)
flowing through one square foot of screen cloth based on
material, having 6 to 8% moisture, screen cloth having 50% or
more open area; 85% screen efficiency.
Based on the choice made for this field and the screen opening
size, the screen unit capacity is estimated.
The following choices are available for this field:
Sand and Gravel
Limestone/Crushed Stones
Coal
Cinders
Coke
Wood
Cyclone Inlet Linear Velocity
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear
velocity of 150 FPS. You can enter a different velocity here.
Configurations Flash
Use this form to specify design criteria for flash configurations.
Utility Specifications Most chemical processes require heating or cooling process utility
fluids to operate. In many cases, the choice of which utilities are
used plays an important role in determining the total project cost
by defining heat transfer equipment sizing. In addition, utility costs
form an important part of the operating costs of the plant.
In the design of heat exchangers and reboilers, Analyzer permits
you to select appropriate process utility fluids for the application.
You can select utility fluids from the list already present in
Analyzer or can create your own based on utility fluid classes
allowed by Analyzer. Once the utility resource for the equipment is
selected either by you or by the sizing expert, then an actual utility
process stream is created for the equipment. The utility stream
contains the amount of utility used by the equipment. During the
operating cost evaluation, Analyzer processes all the utility streams
connected to the equipment to determine the utility cost for every
utility resource used in the project.
You can override these selections by a combination of
disabling/enabling appropriate utilities and re-mapping and re-
sizing the equipment items. Alternately, you can specify the
desired utility in the interactive Sizing Expert. This method is
available even if the utility has been disabled.
To modify or create a utility stream:
1. Right-click on Utility Specifications in the Project Basis view’s
Process Design folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
The Develop Utility Specifications dialog box appears.
Analyzer provides 11 default utility streams resources:

• Cooling Water
• High Temp Heating Oil *
• Low Temp Heating Oil **
• Refrigerant – Ethane
• Refrigerant - Ethylene
• Refrigerant - Freon 12
• Refrigerant - Propane
• Refrigerant - Propylene
• Steam @165 PSI
• Steam @100 PSI
• Steam @400 PSI
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
2. To modify an existing utility stream, highlight it on the Modify
Existing Stream list and click Modify.
To create a new utility stream, click Create in the Option
section. Then, in the Create New Utility Stream section, type
the name and select one of the following fluid classes:
• High Temp Heating Oil *
• Low Temp Heating Oil **
• Refrigerant – Ethane
• Refrigerant – Ethylene
• Refrigerant – Freon 12
• Refrigerant – Propane
• Refrigerant – Propylene
• Refrigerant 50 Utility
• Steam
• Water
* High temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM A.
** Low temperature heating oil has the properties of DOWTHERM E.
Click Create.
3. Enter or modify the specifications on the Utility Specifications
form.
The form contains the following fields:

• Description:
Describes the utility fluid resource in the sizing report
generated by Analyzer. Also, the field value is used to
represent the utility fluid usage and its related cost in the
investment analysis spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
• Fluid:
Determines the type of utility fluid described by the
current specification. The fluid class is used to determine
the heat transfer coefficient, fouling tendency and related
thermal and transport properties used by sizing expert.
• Design Temperature
Specifies the temperature, which will be considered in the
estimation of the design temperature for the process
equipment carrying the utility fluid.
• Design Pressure:
Specifies the pressure, which will be considered in the
estimation of the design pressure for the process
equipment carrying the utility fluid.
• Inlet temperature:
Provides the inlet temperature for the utility fluid.
• Exit temperature:
Provides the exit temperature condition for the utility fluid.
• Pressure:
Provides the operating pressure for the utility fluid.
• Energy transfer per unit mass:
Specifies the amount of energy provided or removed by
the utility fluid over the specified temperature range. The
value in this field is used to estimate the amount of utility
required for the given process conditions.
• Unit Cost:
Provides the cost value used to estimate the utility cost for
the project.
• Unit Cost Units:
Provides the units for the value provided in the unit cost
field.
When you specify a new utility fluid resource, all the
information on the specification form must be provided;
otherwise, the sizing expert will not be able to use the
utility fluid resource properly.
Using the utility specification form, you can specify a
maximum of 20 utility fluids.
If different utility fluid resource was used by simulation,
then it is added to the utility resource in Analyzer.
• Utility type:
Describes the usage of the utility fluid. Select either Heat
source or Heat sink.
4. Click OK when done entering the utility specifications.
Investment Analysis
Investment To specify parameters required for investment analysis, right-click
Parameters on Investment Parameters in the Project Basis view’s Investment
Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Analyzer displays the Investment Parameters in the Main Window.
A description of the parameters follows.
General Investment
Parameters
Period Description
This field allows the user to enter text indicating the
name/description of a period. The period is defined in “Number of
Weeks per Period.” The period description is used in the display of
some of the results in the spreadsheets.
Number of Weeks per Period

The period used for investment analysis is defined in terms of
number of weeks.
Number of Periods for Analysis

The number of periods to include in the cashflow and other project
totals and calculations.
Tax Rate
The tax rate for investment analysis, in terms of percent per period,
is used to calculate the percentage of earnings before taxes that
must be paid to the government.
Desired Rate of Return
The desired rate of return, in percent per period, for the investment.
Economic Life of Project
This field indicates the length of time in terms of periods over
which capital costs will be depreciated.
Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
This number indicates the approximate worth of capital costs at the
end of the Economic Life of Project. The number is expressed as a
percent of initial capital cost.
Depreciation Method
There are four depreciation methods allowed in Analyzer. The
description of each follows:
• Straight Line — The straight line method is used most
commonly. In this method, the Salvage Value is subtracted
from the Total Project Cost. This result is then divided by
the Economic Life of Project, so that the project is
depreciated evenly over its economic life.
• Sum of the Digits — When this method is used, the
Depreciation Expense decreases during each period of the
Economic Life of Project. Therefore, the highest value for
the depreciation occurs in the first period and decreases
every period thereafter. The sum of the digits multiplier is
n/((N(N+1))/2), where N is the Economic amount is the
Total Project Cost less its Salvage Value. For the duration
of the project’s economic life, this factor is multiplied by
the depreciable amount.
• Double Declining (Balance) — When this method is used,
the project is depreciated in geometric increments. The
multiplier for the first period is 2/N, where N is the
Economic Life of Project. For the second period, the
depreciation rate, D2, is (1-D1)D1 where D1 is 2/N. For
the third period, the depreciation rate, D3, is (1-D1)D2.
For the fourth period, the depreciation rate is (1-D1)D3.
These factors are multiplied by the Total Project Cost.
This process (multiplying the factor by the capital cost)
continues until the Straight Line Method produces a higher
value for the depreciation. When the Straight Line Method
produces a higher value, this higher value is used for the
remaining depreciation calculations.
• Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) — The ACRS
approach assumes that operations begin during the second
half of the first period and stop during the first half of the
last period. Therefore, as a result of the two half-periods
(one at the beginning and one at the end of the operating
cycle), it takes 6 periods to depreciate a project which has
an Economic Life of 5 periods. The ACRS adapts the
Double Declining Balance Method to the half-life system.
The depreciation rate for the first period, D1, is 2/N, where
N is the Economic Life of Project. However, the half-life
convention reduces this factor to 1/N. For the second
period, the depreciation rate, D2, is D1(1-1/ N). For the
third period, the depreciation rate, D3, is D1(1-1/N-D2).
This process (multiplying the factor by the Total Project
Cost continues until the Straight Line Method produces a
higher value for the depreciation. When the Straight Line
Method produces a higher value, this higher value is used
for the remaining depreciation calculations.
Escalation Parameters Project Capital Escalation

This number indicates the rate at which project capital expenses
may increase expressed in percent per period. If the addition of
Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period and start-up period is
greater than one whole period, Project Capital Escalation is used to
escalate the capital expenses for periods beyond the first period.
Products Escalation
This is the rate at which the sales revenue from products of the
facility is to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Escalation
This is the rate at which the raw material costs of the facility are to
be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per period.
Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
This is the rate at which the operating and maintenance costs of the
facility are to be escalated (increased) in terms of percent per
period. The operating labor costs include operators per shift and
supervisory costs.
Utilities Escalation
User-entered percentages reflecting the anticipated utility price
increase each period.
Project Capital Parameter Working Capital Percentage

The working capital expressed as a percentage of total capital
expense per period indicates the amount required to operate the
facility until the revenue from product sales is sufficient to cover
costs. It includes current assets such as cash, accounts receivable
and inventories. When the facility starts producing revenue, this
cost item can be covered by the product sales.
Operating Costs Operating Supplies

Parameters
This field indicates the cost of miscellaneous items that are
required in order to run the plant in terms of cost per period.
Laboratory Charges
This is a cost per period indicating the cost of having product
analyzed each period.
Operating Charges
This includes operating supplies and laboratory charges. It is
specified as a percentage of the operating labor costs. (If the user
specifies a value for either “Operating Supplies” or “Laboratory
Charges”, the system will add the two entered values and calculate
the percentage of Operating Labor Costs. (This is done for
compatibility with earlier releases of the system.)
Plant Overhead
This field specifies charges during production for services,
facilities, payroll overhead, etc. This number is specified as a
percent of operating labor and maintenance costs. This number
should not be used for the construction of the facility, only for
operation after start-up.
G and A Expenses
This represents general and administrative costs incurred during
production such as administrative salaries/expenses, R&D, product
distribution and sales costs. The user specifies this number as a
percentage of subtotal operating costs.
Facility Operation Facility Type

Parameters
This field defines the facility type. The following types are
currently available:
• Chemical Processing Facility
• Food Processing Facility
• Oil Refining Facility
• Petrochemical Processing Facility
• Pharmaceutical Facility
• Pulp and/or Paper Processing Facility
• Specialty Chemical Processing Facility (A specialty
chemical is defined as a chemical which is produced in low
quantity and has a usually high price per unit.)
The type of facility affects the number of operators/shift and
maintenance costs of facility equipment.
Operating Mode
This refers to the operating mode of the facility. The available
options are:
• Continuous Processing - 24 Hours/Day
• Continuous Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
• Batch Processing - 24 Hours/Day
• Batch Processing - 1 Batch per Shift
• Batch Processing - More than 1 Batch per Shift
• Intermittent Processing - 24 Hours/Day
• Intermittent Processing - Less than 24 Hours/Day
The operating mode of the facility affects the number of
operators/shift and maintenance costs of facility equipment.
Length of Start-up Period
After the facility has been constructed (i.e., gone through
engineering, procurement and construction), the plant must go
through the owner’s start-up period until it starts producing the
product to be sold. This period is referred to as Length of Start-up
Period in weeks and is added into the EPC duration.
Operating Hours per Period
This field refers to the number of hours per period that the plant
will be operating.
Process Fluids
Process Fluids indicate the types of fluids involved in the process.
The selection affects operating and maintenance costs. The
selections are:
• Liquids
• Liquids and Gases
• Liquids and Solids
• Liquids, Gases, and Solids
• Gases
• Gases and Solids
• Solids
Operating Unit Costs To specify operating unit costs, right-click on Operating Unit Costs
in the Project Basis view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then
click Edit on the pop-up menu.
Analyzer displays the Operating Unit Costs in the Main Window.
The Operating Unit Costs file specifies Labor Unit Costs and
non-heat transfer Utility Unit Costs.
Labor Unit Costs are given for Operators and Supervisors. The
total cost of operating labor is calculated by:
1. Determining the total number of operators and supervisors
necessary to run the facility for a certain number of hours.
2. Adjusting that number for the number of hours the facility
operates per period.
3. Multiplying that number by the respective Labor Unit Costs
and adding them together.
Labor Unit Costs Operator

The loaded wage rate paid for operating the facility in terms of the
cost per operator per hour. Operator labor includes labor that is
associated with operating the facility.
Supervisor
The loaded wage rate paid for supervision in terms of the cost per
supervisor per hour. Supervision includes all labor associated with
overseeing personnel who operate the facility.
Utility Unit Costs The non-heat transfer utility unit costs are also specified in this file
as “over the fence” costs. Utilities used for process heating and
cooling are given in the Utility Specifications File.
Electricity
The unit cost per KWH of electricity used for the facility.
Potable Water
The potable water unit cost per MMGAL or MB used for the plant.
Fuel
The fuel unit cost per MMBTH or MEGAWH used for the plant.
Instrument Air
The instrument air unit cost per KCF or MB.
Raw Material An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to provide

Specifications an accurate figure for total project expenditure. Since operating
costs are usually a large part of this cost, it is important to
accurately account for all raw materials consumed in the process.
Analyzer allows you to identify simulator streams as raw materials
for the process.
The raw material costs will be directly placed in the Project
Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) for use in cash flow
analyses.
To develop raw material specifications:
1. Right-click Raw Materials Specifications in the Project Basis
view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the
pop-up menu.
The Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog box appears.
2. In the Option section, click the Create option button.
3. In the Create New Stream section, type a name for the stream.
4. Select the Basis and the Phase for the stream.
5. Click Create.
The Raw Material Specifications form appears.
6. The following input information is required in order to estimate

the raw material costs during the evaluation of the operating
costs for the project: Process Stream (or “none” if user-
defined); Rate (do not specify a rate if a process stream is
selected); and Cost Per Unit.
In addition to the above minimum information, you have to
specify certain field values for the raw material fluid program
to estimate the raw material rate necessary for the cost
estimate.
If you specify “none” in the Process Stream field, then the
value for the Rate field must be specified in the appropriate
units. If you specify a process stream, then the program
determines the raw material rate in the desired Specification
Basis and units.
You can specify a maximum of 150 raw material streams.
The Raw Material Specifications form contains the following
fields:
• Description
The value you provide in this field will be used to
describe the raw material in the Project Summary
investment analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
• Specification Basis
This field describes the raw material properties from the
following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas
Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
• Process Stream
This field provides a list of fluid streams present in the
current project. You can select any stream to represent
the raw material. Also, there is a provision in Analyzer
for you to provide actual value for the raw material rate
if none of the process streams represent the raw
materials for the project. In this case, you must specify
the field value as “none.”
• Rate
This field gives the total rate of raw materials
consumed for the process in the desired rate units.
When a new raw material fluid is specified, Analyzer
checks whether enough information has been specified
to estimate the raw material cost.
• Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current
raw material. The choices available for the field vary
with the selection made for Specification Basis and
your choice of Base UOM:
Specification
Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
LB/H KG/H
Mass, Liquid
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
LB/H KG/H
Mass, Solid
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Gas
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Liquid
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Solid
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
BTU/H W
Energy
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
• Unit Cost
This field provides the cost value per unit mass, volume
or energy used to estimate the raw material cost for the
project.
7. When you are done entering raw material specifications, click
OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the
Develop Raw Materials Specifications dialog box. You can
enter a maximum of 150 raw material streams using this dialog
box. When done, click Close.
Product An investment analysis conducted on any process needs to include

Specifications an accurate figure for the project’s total revenue. In order to do so,
it is very important to accurately account for all the products
obtained from the process.
Analyzer allows you to identify simulation streams as product
materials for the process. Once the simulation stream is defined,
Analyzer determines the necessary amount of product materials
generated based on the information provided in the product
material specification file.
The product material costs are directly placed in the Project
Summary spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) , where they are used for
further cashflow analyses.
To develop product specifications:
1. Right-click on Product Specifications in the Project Basis
view’s Investment Analysis folder, and then click Edit on the
pop-up menu.
The Develop Product Specifications dialog box appears.
2. Mark the Create checkbox in the Options section.

3. Enter a new stream name, select a basis and phase, and click
Create.
The Product Specifications form appears.
4. The following input information is needed for Analyzer to

estimate the product material costs during the evaluation of the
operating costs for the project:
• Description
The value specified in this field is used to describe the
product material fluid in the Project Summary investment
analyses spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS).
• Specification Basis
This field describes the product material properties from
the following list:
Mass, Gas
Mass, Liquid
Mass, Solid
Volume, Gas
Volume, Liquid
Volume, Solid
Energy
• Process Stream
This field provides a list of streams present in the current
project. You can select any of the streams to represent
the product material. Also, there is a provision in
Analyzer for the user to provide an actual value for the
product material rate if none of the process streams
represent the product materials for the project. In this
case, the user must specify the field value as “none.”
• Rate
This field defines the total rate of product materials
obtained for the process in the desired rate units. Do not
enter a value if you have specified a process stream.
When a new product material is specified, Analyzer
checks whether the minimum information necessary to
estimate the product material cost has been specified.
The following minimum information must be present before
Analyzer can proceed with the estimate.
• Rate Units
This field describes the flow rate units for the current
product material. The choices available for the field vary
with the selection made for Specification Basis and your
choice of Base UOM:
Specification
Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Gas LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
LB/H KG/H
Mass, Liquid
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
Specification
Basis I-P METRIC
Mass, Solid LB/H KG/H
KLB/H MEGAG/H
MLB/H TON/H
TPH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Gas
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Liquid
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
GPH M3/H
Volume, Solid
MMGAL/H L/S
CFH
KCFH
BTU/H W
Energy
MMBTU/H KW
MEGAW
CAL/H
• Unit Cost
The field provides the cost value used to estimate the
product material cost for the project.
5. When you are done entering product specifications, click
OK.
The new stream appears in the Existing Stream list on the
Develop Product Specifications dialog box. You can enter
a maximum of 150 product material streams using this
dialog box. When done, click Close.
Developing Streams
After opening a project, new streams can be developed. You have
the option to develop completely new streams or use an existing
stream as a base. When an existing stream is used as a base, the
new stream can be either copied from the existing stream
(Absolute Basis mode) or copied from and linked dynamically to
the existing stream (Relative Basis mode).
To develop streams, right-click on Streams in the Project Basis
view’s main folder (at the bottom), and then click Edit on the
pop-up menu.
The Develop Streams dialog box appears.
Viewing or Modifying To view or modify an existing stream, select the stream on the
an Existing Stream Modify tab view. You may need to use the scrollbar(s) to locate a
stream if a large number of streams exist in the project. With the
desired stream highlighted, click Modify to have the stream
information displayed in a specifications form.
The functions of the six buttons on the Develop Stream
specifications form are explained below:
Click To do this:
OK 1. Perform a check on the information currently
present in the Develop Stream specifications
form to ensure that all information needed to
specify the stream is completed. Analyzer
generates error messages indicating missing
data.
2. Generate estimates for any specifications not
entered.
3. Save the information in the Develop Stream
specifications form. The Develop Stream
specifications form closes and the Develop
Streams dialog box re-appears.
Apply Same as clicking OK, but does not exit the
Develop Stream specifications form. This allows
you to review the estimates and revise the data.
Update Same as clicking Apply, except that if the Primary
Fluid Component, the Temperature, and/or the
Pressure were changed, then all the physical
properties of the stream will be estimated using
these new values.
Cancel Exit the Develop Stream specifications form
without making checks and does not save or
Click To do this:
change any information in the database.
Reset Reset the information in the Develop Stream
specifications form to the values previously saved
into the database. Any changes have been made
since opening the form will be lost.
Mixture Define a stream as a mixture. Opens the Mixture
Information dialog box discussed below.
Most Develop Stream specifications need no further explanation.
Those that do are described below.
y Primary Fluid Component
One of the most important specifications in this form is
Primary Fluid Component, which is classifies the chemical
components of a stream. The fluid selected here is used as the
basis for any properties that are unavailable and need to be
estimated to complete the specifications for the stream. The
available general fluid classifications are:
y Alcohol y Medium Hydrocarbon Liquid
y Aromatic Liquid y Miscellaneous Inorganic Liquid
y Halogenated Gas y Miscellaneous Organic Gas
y Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid y Organic Acid
y Hydrocarbon Gas y Very Heavy Hydrocarbon Liquid
y Inorganic Gas y Solid
y Light Hydrocarbon Liquid
The following pure components are also available for

selection as the Primary Fluid Component of a stream:
y Acetic Acid y Glycerol y Phosphoric Acid
y Ammonia y Hydrogen y Propane
y Argon y Isopropyl Alcohol y Propanol
y Carbon Monoxide y Methane y Propylene
y Carbon Dioxide y Methanol y Steam
y Ethane y N-Butanol y Sulfuric Acid
y Ethanol y Nitric Acid y Toluene
y Ethyl Benzene y Nitrogen y Water
y Ethylene y Oxygen
If the Primary Fluid Component is specified, the other needed

information will be filled in with default values. This feature is
only apparent when no temperature or pressure is entered into
the Develop Stream specifications form and the Primary Fluid
Component is changed. After changing the Primary Fluid
Component, either press Enter or click on another field and the
default values will be loaded. If either the pressure or
temperature value is changed from the default value, clicking
OK, Apply, or Update will estimate the properties at the new
condition(s).
y Base Stream
The Base Stream field contains the name of the stream on
which the displayed stream was based. This cannot be
changed.
If the name begins with the character “$”, the stream was
created using Absolute Basis and the stream name following
this character is that of the parent stream. A stream created
using Absolute Basis uses the data from the parent stream;
however, if the parent steam’s data changes afterward, the
Absolute Basis stream is not updated.
If the value begins with the character “@”, the stream was
created using the Relative Basis and the stream name
following this character is that of the parent stream. A stream
created using Relative Basis is updated when its parent
stream’s data changes.
y Description
Select information from the menu to describe the particular
stream. For example, you can indicate the source component
of the stream (e.g., From Pump P-103) or tag it with one of the
available utility stream names.
y Mass Flow
The Mass Flow fields are used to determine the phase of the
stream. For instance, if the stream has only Liquid Mass Flow
specified, the stream is totally liquid; therefore, it will have no
vapor properties estimated for it. The reverse is true for a case
with only a Vapor Mass Flow specified. For cases with both
types of flow, all properties will be estimated and the Primary
Fluid Component will belong to the phase of the largest mass
flow.
Note: Analyzer automatically calculates Total Mass Flow
from the individual mass flow values.
y Density
The Density fields are required information. Thus, if a
particular phase has a mass flow rate specified, then the
corresponding density must also be specified. Clicking Update
will estimate any required density fields based on the flow
rate, except in the case of Solid Mass Density. It is
recommended that you enter a Liquid Mass Density if one is
available.
Mixture Specs Dialog Clicking Mixture on the Develop Stream specifications form
Box accesses the Mixture Specs dialog box.
After you click Apply,

Analyzer normalizes
the Fraction values
to total a sum of one.
The values shown to
the right would
change into the
values shown on the
next page.
The mixture information specified in this dialog box is used to

estimate properties as a mixture of the specified composition. If no
mixture information is present, the stream is assumed to be pure
Primary Fluid Component. The fraction information can be entered
on either a Mass or Mole Fraction Basis, as specified in the
Fraction Basis section.
The Cancel and Reset buttons behave in a similar manner as their
respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form.
The OK and Apply buttons also behave in a similar manner as their
respective buttons on the Develop Stream specifications form,
except the checking is different. Here, a check is made to ensure
that the fractions have a total sum of one. If not, the values are
normalized to give a total sum of one, as indicated below.
The check also combines duplicate entries into one entry by
combining the two fraction specifications.
After the check is done, the components are sorted in order of
decreasing fractional amount, as shown above. When you click
OK, Analyzer loads into the specifications form the name of the
fluid with the highest fraction and the properties of the mixture
generated from the contributions of the individual components.
Estimation of Utility Utility usage estimation is based on the stream information. All the
Usage and Resulting streams that are present in the project are taken into consideration
Costs in Analyzer for the estimation of the utility usage for the project. This includes
all utility streams, user-defined streams, simulator streams, and
pre-map Streams. The Description field on the Develop Stream
spreadsheet can be used to designate streams as utilities. If the
Description field for a stream exactly matches (exact text
characters and spaces) the Description field for any utility resource
as given on the Utility Specifications spreadsheet, then that stream
is included in the utility usage calculation. If you change the
description field of any of the simulator or pre-map streams, then
the new description you provided is used for this calculation.
Also, stream connectivity information is used to identify the nature
of the stream. If the stream is being generated then it is considered
to be revenue for the project, and if it is being consumed it is
considered an expense. (Note: Streams that are connected at both
ends to process equipments are ignored in estimating the utility
usage costs. Also, utility streams that have a zero unit cost do not
show up in the final report.)
User-defined streams that are not connected to any equipment (do
not show up in the PFD) are considered as input streams, i.e.,
consumption.
System-generated utility streams are included in the utility usage
calculation as long as they are connected to equipment. A case
where they would be disconnected would be if you manually
disconnect these streams or if the equipment to which these
streams are connected is deleted.
Stream Connectivity Process streams are “connected” to project components in a real

way. You can see this in the Process Flow Diagram (PFD) that you
can display after loading and mapping simulator blocks. Each
stream has a Source end and a Sink end. The Source end connects
to an Outlet port on a component and the Sink end to an Inlet as
depicted below:
In the PFD view, when you Edit Connectivity (see page 4-49) for
the Sink end of a stream and move the cursor over a component,
only Inlet port(s) turn green, thereby indicating their availability
for making a connection to a Sink end.
The same concept also carries into the Interactive Sizing form (see
page 6-8). Only streams whose Sink ends are not connected are
listed in the pulldown for any Inlet. This explains why the Inlet and
Outlet pulldowns will include different streams.
Since the connectivity in the PFD and the Interactive Sizing form
are two ways of looking at the same information, Analyzer tracks
your changes and synchronizes them in both views. Thus, if you
change the connectivity in one view, Analyzer automatically
changes it in the other view.
When you first map and size components, the streams in the
simulator will be connected to the project components and the
underlying process conditions of those streams are available for
further use. For example, you may create new streams based on the
properties of any stream, connected or not, then use these new
streams as Sources/Sinks for connecting new components (you
might do this to set up spares). You may also add a New Mapping
to an item already mapped and the newly mapped and sized item
utilizes the underlying stream properties.
Creating A New Streams can be created from scratch or by using a base stream.
Stream To create a stream from scratch:
1. Go to the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box.
Without selecting a stream from the Base Streams list, click
Create. (The Basis selection will not matter.)
The Create Stream dialog box appears.
2. Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream dialog
box. This name must not be the same as any existing streams
in the project. Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
See page 3-66 and
3-67 for descriptions
of the buttons and
fields on this form.
3. Enter values for the new stream. See page 3-71 for
descriptions of the different fields. When done, click OK.
To create a stream based on an existing stream:

1. At the Create tab view on the Develop Streams dialog box,
select the stream to be used as the base.
2. Select the Basis mode. If the Basis mode is Relative, the data
from the two streams will be linked so that when the base
stream is changed the new stream will inherit these changes. If
the Basis mode is Absolute, the data from the base stream is
copied to the new stream at the time the new stream is created.
Changes in a base stream will not affect a new stream created
via Absolute basis.
3. Click Create.
The Create Stream dialog box appears.
4. Enter a name for the new stream in the Create Stream window.
This name must not be the same as any existing streams in the
project. Click OK.
Analyzer displays the specifications form for the newly
created stream. The data is that of the Base Stream. Data
appears gray (dimmed) to indicate that it is relative to a
referenced Base Stream.
See page 3-66 and

3-67 for descriptions
of the buttons and
fields on this form.
Even in a Relative Stream, you may override any value with a

manual entry. If you do so, the text turns black, indicating that
that value is absolute and therefore no longer references a
Base Stream.
5. Make modifications to the data and click OK.
Deleting a Stream To delete a stream:

1. At the Delete tab view, select the stream to be deleted. You
may need to use the scrollbars to locate a stream if a large
number of streams exist in the currently opened project.
Note: only user-added

streams and streams added
by the Sizing Expert as
utilities can be deleted.
Click Delete.
A dialog box will appear asking for confirmation of the delete
action.
2. Click OK to delete the stream.
– or –
Click Cancel to retain the stream.
Specification Libraries
The default specifications are derived from files that you can
access, when outside of a project, from the Palette’s Libraries
view.
It includes specification files for the following:

y Basis for Capital Costs
y Cost Libraries (see Chapter 7, “Developing and Using Cost
Libraries”)
y Design Criteria
y Investment Parameters
y Operating Unit Costs
y Product Specifications
y Project Component Map Specifications
y Raw Material Specifications
y Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs
y Utility Specifications
When you create a project scenario, Analyzer selects the
specification file to use based upon the selected units of measure
basis. However, you can right-click on any of the above Project
Basis specification categories in Project Explorer, click Select on
the pop-up menu, and select a different file from which to derive
the default specifications.
Customizing When no project is open, you can create your own specification
Specification files or edit existing files. Then, when in a project, you can select
Libraries your specification files. For example, if you frequently created
project scenarios that used the same design basis, you could create
a Basis for Capital Costs specification file with those design basis
specifications. Then you could just select this file, instead of
entering the specifications every time.
If, after making modifications to your libraries, you wish to revert
to the original libraries, you can copy or import the copy of the
installed libraries provided in the following folder:
…\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\Program\Sys\Libraries
Creating a File To create a specification file:

1. With no project open, go to the Libraries tab view in the Palette
and expand the desired specification category.
2. Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder
– Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click
on the Investment Parameters folder. For Project Component
Map Specifications, right-click on the simulator type folder.
On the pop-up menu, click New.
The New [Specification Category] dialog box appears.
3. Enter a file name and, if desired, a file description.

4. Click OK.
5. Analyzer creates the file and displays the specifications in a
separate window.
6. Edit the specifications just as in a project.
When you are done, close the specifications window. If a
library file is open, you cannot access another library file or
open a project.
See page 3-84 for instructions on selecting the newly created
specification file to use in a project.
Modifying a File To modify an existing specification file, right-click on it in the

Palette (Libraries view) and click Modify on the pop-up menu.
Importing a File You can import specification files from elsewhere on your
computer or network.
To import a file:
1. In the Palette (Libraries view), expand the library to which you
wish to import a file.
2. Except for Investment Parameters and Project Component Map
Specifications, right-click on the units of measure basis folder
– Inch-Pound or Metric. For Investment Parameters, right-click
on the Investment Parameters folder. For Project Component
Map Specifications, right-click on the simulator type folder.
On the pop-up menu, click Import.
3. In the Select a File for Import dialog box, locate the file and
then click Open.
The file is copied to the appropriate sub-folder.
Duplicating a File To duplicate a file:
1. In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file you wish
to duplicate, and then click Duplicate on the pop-up menu.
2. Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new file.
Click OK.
Analyzer creates the file and displays the specifications in a
separate window.
4. Edit the specifications just as in a project.
When you are done, close the specifications window. If a
library file is open, you cannot access another library file or
open a project.
Deleting a File To delete a specification file:

In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the file to be
deleted, and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Note: You cannot delete files named Default, only modify them.
Selecting to Use a After creating a new specification file, you still need to select it in
Different Project Explorer for Analyzer to use its specifications.
Specification File
To select a specification file:

1. In Project Explorer (Project Basis view), right-click on the
Project Basis specification category and click Select on the
pop-up menu.
Analyzer displays a dialog box listing the files available for the
selected category.
2. Select a new file from which to derive default specifications

and click OK.
Changing File If you decide to store specification library files in a directory other
Directory Location than the default, move the default files to the new location and
recreate the same sub-folder arrangement. Otherwise, Icarus will
generate an error when you point to the new location.
Loading and Mapping Simulation
Data
If the process you wish to evaluate in Analyzer is based on a

simulator file report from a process simulator software program,
the first step, after creating a project scenario and defining the
Design Basis, is to load and map simulation data.
Analyzer supports reports from the following simulators:
• AspenTech’s Aspen Plus Version 12.1
• Chemstation’s ChemCAD for Windows Version 5.3.2
• Hyprotech’s HYSIM Version STD/C.271
• Hyprotech’s HYSYS Version 2.4.1
• SimSci’s PRO/II with PROVISION Version 5.1
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Loading and Mapping Simulation Data • 4-1
Preparing Simulation Reports
For Analyzer to load the simulation data, an appropriate ASCII
output report needs to be generated from the simulator. Most
simulators describe the various steps needed to generate ASCII
reports. This section provides additional procedures to generate
reports in an Analyzer-compatible format.
The procedures provided here start with the default report
generation options. If the default report generation options are not
in use, it may be necessary to change them back to the default
settings for creating an output report for Analyzer.
Aspen Plus Report Aspen Plus provides a template containing the property sets that a
Generation project needs in order to generate an output report for Analyzer.
Note: If you use the template, the following component
specification, if entered in AspenPlus, will need to be
re-entered in IPE:
Block – CCD
STAGE EFFICIENCY
To use the template, open the project in Aspen Plus and complete
the following steps:
Note: If you use the 1. Click Import on the File menu.
template, the following
component specifications, 2. Navigate to “Program Files\AspenTech\Aspen Icarus 12.2
if entered in AspenPlus,
will need to be re-entered 2003\Program\Load.” (This is the default path; it may differ
in IPE: depending on where you installed Aspen Icarus.)
Block - CCD
· STAGE EFFICIENCY
3. Depending on the simulation units of measure, select the
Block - RADFRAC
appropriate simulator directory (e.g. Aspen Plus) and then the
· PACKING RATE corresponding template.
SECTION (s)
· REBOILER EXIT If you do not use the template, complete the following steps to
PRESSURE
· REBOILER EXIT
create the required property sets in Aspen Plus for importing a
TEMPERATURE report into Analyzer:
· REBOILDER VAPOR
FRACTION 1. On the Data menu, click Properties. This will open the data
· REBOILER INLET
MOLAR FLOW RATE browser to the property specifications.
COOLER AT STAGE (for 2. In the data browser tree structure, open the folder Prop-Sets
a RADFRAC block)
· FLOW RATE located in the Properties folder.
· PHASE
· PRESSURE 3. Click New to create a new property set.
· TEMPERATURE
4. Type a name for the property set or use the default name. Click
OK.
5. In the Substream combo box, select All.
4-2 • Loading and Mapping Simulation Data Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide
6. Scroll down the list of available properties click those you wish
to select. To start the scroll window, click in a physical
properties cell:
MASSVFRA
MASSSFRA
MASSFLMX
VOLFLMX
MASSFLOW
TEMP
PRES
MWMX
7. The specifications for this property set are complete as
indicated by the check mark displayed on the tree view of the
data browser.
8. Click the Prop-Sets folder. You will see the property set you
just created in the object manager and the status should be
Input Complete.
9. Create the second property set by once again clicking New.
OK.
11. Click the Qualifiers tab.
12. In the cell labeled “Phase,” select Total.
13. Click the Properties tab.
14. In the Substream listbox, select ALL.
KJ/KG-K
BTU/LB-R
15. Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property
and pick either of the following units:
16. The specifications for this property set are complete.
17. Click the Prop-Sets folder. The newly created property set will
appear in the object manager with an input complete status.
18. Create the final property set needed by Analyzer by clicking
New.
OK.
20. Click the Qualifiers tab.
21. In the Phase cell select Vapor.
22. Click the Properties tab.
23. Select the following properties for this property set:
VOLFLMX
MASSFLMX
KMX
MUMX
CPMX
MWMX
24. Now click the Units cell corresponding to the CPMX property
and pick either of the following units:
KJ/KG-K
BTU/LB-R
25. The creation of property sets is complete. Now these property
sets need to be specified for use in the generation of a report.
26. If the Setup folder is not already expanded, expand it by
clicking on the plus sign next to the folder symbol.
27. Click Report Options.
28. Click the Stream tab.
29. Click the Property Sets button.
30. Move the three property sets you just created to the Selected
property sets box.
31. Click the > button to move them to the Selected property sets
box.
32. Click Close.
The specifications required for loading an Aspen Plus report file
are now complete. You may close the data browser window.
After running the simulation, you must create an output report by
clicking Export on the File menu.
In the Save As dialog box, use the drop-down menu to select
Report Files (*.rep) or XML files (*.xml).
Type a file name or accept the default value and then click Save.
This will create the ASCII report file needed to load into Analyzer
with the name given above.
Note: The order on any of the tower models must be set to TOP-
DOWN in order for the tray information to get loaded into
Analyzer correctly. This is the default setting.
Aspen Plus Utilities
If a unit operation block has a utility specified, the utility resource
specifications and usage data will be transferred into Analyzer.
After loading the simulator data, a preference screen will appear.
Specify any missing data for the Aspen Plus utilities in order for
the Aspen Plus utility to be properly handled. The Aspen Plus
utilities will appear as new utility resources. The appropriate
project components will use the specified utility resource, based on
the Aspen Plus utility used in the simulation.
A message box will appear if utility resources are modified or

deleted from the Aspen Plus simulation prior to a reload of data
into Analyzer. You can choose to delete the old imported Aspen
Plus utility resources in Analyzer, or just add/update existing
imported utilities in Aspen Plus.
Aspen Plus – A link from Aspen Plus to Analyzer allows you to load changes
Analyzer Simulator into Analyzer when simulation settings are changed in Aspen Plus.
link
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into a
new Analyzer project scenario:
1. Run the simulation in Aspen Plus
2. From the File menu, click Send To and select Aspen Icarus.
When the prompt appears, the Analyzer project name will be
designated to be the name of the simulation file from Aspen
Plus. Aspen Plus will designate the scenario name. If the
scenario name is changed, any future attempts to run the link
for the same project will result in a new Analyzer project being
created. It is recommended that the scenario name designated
by Aspen Plus be left as it is for maximum usability.
3. Click OK.
4. Specify the Project Description, Remarks, and the Units of
Measure. Click OK.
The Input Units of Measure Specifications dialog box appears.
5. Verify the Input Units of Measure Specifications and click OK.
The General Project Data dialog box appears.
6. Verify the General Project Data and click OK.
Analyzer displays a prompt to load the Simulator Data.
7. Click OK.
If the simulation has specified units that are undefined, a
prompt will appear to do so. Define all Aspen Plus units with
those available in Analyzer.
To load process simulator data through the Aspen Icarus link into
an existing project scenario:
1. Run the simulation in Aspen Plus
2. From the File menu, click Send To and select Aspen Icarus.
Analyzer displays a prompt to load simulator data.
3. Click OK. Since all other project basis settings have been
specified, mapping and sizing can be performed at this time.
ChemCAD Report These instructions apply to both ChemCAD for Windows, Version
Generation 5.3.2, and for previous versions of ChemCAD. The specifications
are the same for all versions.
From the main menu, select Report from the Output menu. In
ChemCAD for Windows, just select the Output menu from the
menu bar. The following needs to be specified for report options:
“Select Streams”
Print All Streams: Y NOTE: Check box in ChemCAD for
Windows
“Select Unit Operations”

Print All Unit Operations: Y NOTE: Check box in
ChemCAD for Windows
“Stream Properties”
The following stream properties must be selected or de-selected as
indicated below:
Property Select De-Select
OVERALL PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Temperature X
Pressure X
Mole Vap frac X
Enthalpy X
Molecular wt. X
Total act.dens X
VAPOR PROPERTIES
Mass flow rate X
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Vap. Act. Dens X
Vap. Viscosity X
Vap. Cp X
Vap. Thrm. Cond X
Liq. Surf. Tens. X
LIQUID PROPERTIES
Mole flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Liq. act. Dens X
Liq. Viscosity X
Liq. Cp X
Liq. Thrm. Cond. X
SOLID PROPERTIES*
Mass flow rate X
Molecular wt. X
Density X
PSD X
DISTILLATION OPTIONS
Tray profile X
Tray properties X
Tray sizing X
Property Select De-Select
Packed column sizing X
TRAY COMPOSITIONS
Mass flow rate X
* Solid properties are located on Page 2 of Stream
Properties in ChemCAD for Windows.
The component mass flow rates for individual streams must be
included in the output report. This is specified by going to the
Stream Flowrate/Composition menu under Reports/Output menu.
Pick Mass Flowrate.
If you wish Analyzer to use tray-sizing information from the
simulator, then you must include the appropriate sizing
information. This is specified to be included in the output report by
going to the Distillation Summaries under the Reports/Output
menu and selecting the appropriate sizing section (packed or
trayed).
After the completion of all these specification, generate the output
report by selecting Calculate and Give Results. This should
generate an output report. You may rename it if you wish. This is
the file to be used as input for Analyzer.
HYSIM Report Copy the following .spc files from the ...\Aspen Icarus 12.2
Generation 2003\Program\Load\Hysim directory to your HYSIM working
directory before generating output inside the simulator.
MIXER.SPC
TEE.SPC
HTXRATE.SPC
BALANCE.SPC
CALC.SPC
MASSBAL.SPC
MOLEBAL.SPC
For all other operations, use the default .spc files provided by
Hyprotech.
For HYSIM version 386|C2.12 or earlier, copy the stream format
file STRSUM.FMT located in the Aspen Icarus 12.2
2003\Program\Load\Hysim directory to your HYSIM working
directory. If you have HYSIM version STD:C2.63 and above, copy
the stream format file STRSUM2.FMT located in the Aspen Icarus
12.2 2003\Program\Load\Hysim directory to your HYSIM
working directory and rename it STRSUM.FMT. You will have to
either delete or rename the existing STRSUM.FMT file to perform
this.
The output report generated from HYSIM should contain
operation output (defined as spec_sheet in HYSIM) and the
complete stream summary. Both of these outputs must be saved
under the same file name. The information gets appended to the
file and does not get overwritten.
To generate the operation output and stream summary (Required):
1. Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
y operation output
y stream summary
2. From the main menu, click Print.
3. From the print option, select File and click Enter.
4. Select the same file (file_name) as above and click Enter.
5. Click Print option and click Enter.
6. Select the Stream option and click Enter.
7. Inside the stream option, select Summary and press Enter.
8. The list of streams present in the current project is displayed.
Select the <-> option for all the streams to be written in
file_name.
The above procedure creates the required report (file_name) which
can be loaded into Analyzer and used for project evaluation.
If sizing operations are performed inside the simulator and you
desire the information to be carried over to Analyzer, the following
steps must be performed in addition to the above procedure:
1. Load the desired project inside HYSIM (*.sim).
sizing summary
2. From the main menu, click Size.
3. Inside the size option, choose the unit operation desired and
click Enter.
4. Select the particular equipment (e.g. col-101) and click Enter.
5. Select auto_section or user_section and click Enter.
6. After the sizing calculations are performed, select Print.
7. Select File and click Enter.
8. Select the same file name (file_name) and click Enter.
9. Click Summary and click Enter.
IMPORTANT NOTES:
y The operation names and stream names can not contain the
following characters:
+, -, *, or spaces
y The ASCII report has to be created in the default units
specified by HYSIM for the ENGLISH and the SI modes of
operation. You can run a simulation in any simulator-
provided units. However, prior to creating the report file,
you must convert the units to the default specifications
provided by HYSIM.
y During the sizing procedure for the column operation, if
user_section is chosen, care should be taken to check that
the stage numbers are not repeated in the different sections
of the same column operation. The following two examples
demonstrate the correct and incorrect specifications.
Correct Incorrect
user_section_1 : (start stage) 1 user_section_1 : (start stage) 1
(end stage) 10 (end stage) 10
user_section_2: (start stage) 11 user_section_2 : (start stage) 3
(end stage) 15 (end stage) 15
y The user_section name should not contain the following

characters:
+, -, *
y The report format should be such that the width of the
report should be less than or equal to 4 streams wide. This
can be accomplished from the format option provided in
HYSIM.
y Stream summary should follow the operation output in
the report, i.e. the order should be maintained.
HYSYS Report Analyzer’s External Simulation Import Tool imports HYSYS

Generation simulator data into Icarus database files, which you can then load
into Analyzer.
To import HYSYS simulation data for loading into Analyzer:
1. Click External Simulation Import Tool on the Tools menu.
The Simulator Link dialog box appears.
2. Click on the Browse button for the Simulator File field.
Select the process simulator project you created and click

Open.
3. Click on the Browse button for the Export File field. The
Export File will contain the exported simulation results data
from the selected HYSYS project. Do not include any file
extensions for this file. The import tool will automatically
assign a “d01” extension to this file.
4. Select the location and enter the file name you want to be used
to contain the exported data. You can also select an existing
file. Click Save.
5. Click Connect on the Simulator Link dialog box. HYSYS will
be automatically started with the selected project.
The following figure shows the file Cheplant.hsc in the
HYSYS interface.
6. Click Export on the Simulator Link dialog box to start the

process of exporting the simulation data from the selected
HYSYS project into the Export File.
Once finished, you will see five files with the name you gave
to the “Export File”. These files contain the exported data.
Note that these files should always go together, in case you
want to copy them to another location.
D:\test\cheplantn.d01 Å Icarus database file
D:\test\cheplantn.d02
7. Click Disconnect on the Simulator Link dialog box. The tool
will close HYSYS. If would like to keep HYSYS running and
make changes to your simulation, you can use the “Export
Again” button to export the data again into the “Export File”.
8. Exit the import tool.
9. Start Analyzer and create a new project. Select Hyprotech’s
HYSYS as the Simulator Type.
10. When selecting the simulator report file, select the “Export
File” (the file with the extension .d01) created using the import
tool
To load, map, and size this project, continue as described in this
guide.
SimSci’s PRO/II with Two methods can be used for generating reports from PRO/II with
PROVISION Report PROVISION. The input keyword file (*.inp) may be altered to
Generation include the required print options using keywords for those using
PRO/II directly or you may change the print options from within
the PROVISION user interface.
For either method, the operation names and stream names should
not contain the following characters: +, *
Note: When specifying sidestrippers, each sidestripper must be
identified by a unique four-character name. Currently,
sidestrippers are not always identified by their full user-
given names in PRO/II with PROVISION report files.
Sometimes, they are identified by only the first four
characters of the user-given names. Therefore, to properly
load sidestripper information into Analyzer, sidestripper
Unit identifiers (UID’s) must be used, which are only four
characters long.
To prepare the SimSci report in PROVISION:

1. From the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure
that the Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must
be entered.
2. From the Output menu, select Report Format.
3. From the Input menu, select Problem Description. Make sure
that the Problem Identifier field is not blank; something must
be entered.
4. From Report Format menu, select Miscellaneous Data.
5. Set the Report Width field to 80 Columns (the PROVISION
default value).
6. From the Report Format menu, select Stream Properties.
7. Check Molar Flowrate and Weight Fraction.
8. From the Report Format menu select Unit Operations.
9. For each column unit operation:
A. From the Unit Operations list, select Column.
B. Click the Print Options button while unit is highlighted.
C. Select Molecular Weights, Actual Densities, Actual
Volumetric Flowrates, and Transport Properties and
Flowing Enthalpies and Standard Liquid Densities from
their respective column print options window.
D. Click OK.
E. Repeat for each remaining COLUMN unit operation in list.
F. See the NOTE in the KEYWORD section regarding
COLUMN sidestripper’s UID’s.
10. Click Close to finish.
Use the default options for remaining unit operations.
Using Keywords 1. For General Print Options, use the following keywords:
Print INPUT = ALL
STREAM = ALL
RATE =M
WIDTH = 80
2. For COLUMN operations, use the following keyword:
Print PROPTABLES = PART or ALL
Loading Simulation Data
The following loading procedure translates the specified process
simulator report file into Analyzer.
To load process simulator data:
1. In Project Explorer, Project Basis view, right-click on
Simulator Type in the Process Design folder and then click
Edit.
The Select Simulator Type dialog box appears.
2. Select one type from the list and click OK.

Analyzer displays a message saying what the new simulator
type is.
Click OK.
3. Right-click on Simulator File Name in the Process Design
folder and then click Edit.
The Open dialog box appears, showing all simulator files in the
Report folder. You can browse other drives and folders, as
well.
4. Select a file and click Open.

Note that the List view now displays the pathname of the
selected simulator file when you select Simulator File Name in
Project Explorer.
5. Click on the toolbar or, from the Run menu, click Load
Data.
A confirmation window appears.
Click Yes.
Analyzer loads the simulator data.
When the loading of the data is finished, the Process view of
Project Explorer is populated with simulator areas and simulator
blocks.
Viewing Data Derived You can right-click on a block and click Modify on the pop-up
from Simulator menu to access simulator-derived data (read-only).
Click Cancel to close.
Working with Block Flow Diagrams
Analyzer automatically generates a Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
from a loaded simulator report. Providing a graphical
representation of the process, the BFD displays computational
blocks and their connections.
The blocks in the diagram correspond to tree items displayed in the
Project Explorer’s Process view. Color-coding of the blocks in
both the Process view and the BFD agree; mapped items are
displayed green and unmapped items are displayed yellow.
Displaying the Block To display the Block Flow Diagram:

Flow Diagram Select Block Flow Diagram from the View menu.
The BFD appears in the Main Window.
A block can be moved by

clicking on the center of
the block and dragging it
to the desired location.
Doing so will also move
the streams connected to
the block. If the simulator
data is reloaded, Analyzer
regenerates the block and
stream locations.
In addition to the blocks displayed in the Process view, the BFD
displays streams, direction of stream flows, inlets, and outlets.
The commands on the View menu change when the BFD is active.
(See “Block Flow Diagram View Menu” on page 4-22 more
information.)
The Drag & Find There is a quick and easy way to find a block on the BFD. Drag the
Feature block from the Project Explorer’s Process view and drop it
anywhere in the BFD. The part of the BFD displayed changes so
that the block you want to find appears in the upper-left corner of
the Main Window.
Drag a block from Project Explorer

(Process view) to the BFD
Analyzer finds the block on the diagram
Accessing Right-clicking on blocks in the BFD accesses the same commands
Commands in the available when you right-click on a block in Project Explorer’s
Block Flow Diagram Process view.
Block commands
Clicking Modify accesses simulator-derived data (read-only), as

shown on page 4-17.
The Map command and Delete Mappings command are explained
in the next section, “Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus Project
Components,” starting on page 4-23. Alteration of mapping will
5
alter the blocks color based on its status.
Stream commands You can double-click on a stream to access the Develop Stream
specifications form. This form is explained on page 3-70.
Zooming You can use the Zoom In and Zoom Out buttons to increase or
decrease the magnification by degrees:
You can also select an exact magnification by using the Zoom

dialog box.
To use the Zoom dialog box:
1. Click Zoom on the View menu
The Zoom dialog box appears.
2. Mark the desired magnification, or mark Custom and enter a

percentage between 10 and 1,000.
3. Click OK to change magnification and close the dialog box.
Or click Cancel to close the dialog box without changing
magnification.
The Zoom dialog box also has two options that affect printing:
Fit into one page
Mark this box to have Analyzer re-size the BFD to fit onto one
page when printed. This automatically selects the next option,
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get, since the screen image will
reflect the size required to fit on one printed page.
What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get (WYSIWYG)
When WYSIWYG is unchecked, zooming in or out will only
affect the magnification factor on the screen, while the printer
always prints at 100%. However, if WYSIWYG is checked, the
magnification factor on the printer will be changed so that the
printed image will have the same size as the image appearing
on the screen.
Block Flow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow Diagram is
active.
Toolbar – View or hide the toolbar. See page 2-21 for descriptions of
toolbar buttons.
of the status bar.
Palette.
Workbook Mode – Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 2-13 for
an explanation of Workbook Mode.
Evaluation needs to have already been run. See Chapter 8, “Evaluating
the Project,” for details.
See “Reviewing Investment Analysis” on page 9-77 for instructions.
simulator data.
command is not active until you have mapped the simulator items.
Grid Visible – View or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid – Move blocks in increments corresponding to the grid
lines when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds – View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks will be when printing.
Ports Visible – View or hide ports in the Process Flow Diagram. Does
not apply to Block Flow Diagram.
Zoom – Access Zoom tool. See page 4-20.
Mapping Simulator Items to Icarus
Project Components
Mapping is the process of converting each simulator block (i.e.,
model or unit operation) into one or more Icarus project
components.
To map simulator items:

1. If you want to map all items, access the Map dialog box by
doing one of the following:
• Click on the toolbar.

− or −
• From the Run menu, click Map Items.
If you want to map a single block or all blocks in an area, right-
click on the block or area in Process view and then click Map
on the pop-up menu.
You can also right-click on a block in the Block Flow Diagram

and click Map on the pop-up menu.
The Map dialog box appears.
If you clicked
the Map button on
the toolbar or clicked
Map Items on the
Run menu, only the
Map All Items
checkbox is available
in the Source
section.
If you selected Map

from a pop-up menu,
both Map Selected
Item(s) – the default
choice – and Map All
Items is available.
2. Select the desired mapping options.

Option Description
Source
Map Selected Map the selected simulator block or
Item(s) the simulator blocks in the selected
simulator area. This option is
available only if you selected Map
from a pop-up menu.
Map All Items Map all simulator items in the
project.
Basis
Last Mapping Map a block according to the last
time it was mapped. This option
retains only the type of Icarus project
component(s) to which the block
was last mapped.
Default Use the Component Map Specs file
for the basis.
Default and Use the Component Map Specs file
Simulator Data for the basis, but override the
mapping using specific data in the
simulator. For example, if you select
this option and a reboiler type is
specified in the simulator report, an
equivalent reboiler type will be used
in the mapping.
Option Description
Further, if the
"Preferences>Process>Use
Automatic Mapping Selection when
Available" was selected, then
additional engineering rules of
thumb will be used for a selected
category of equipments (e.g., pumps,
compressors, and heat exchangers)
to come up the mapping
recommendations. (Note: Currently
this mode is active only when blocks
are mapped one at a time.)
Users are encouraged to review these
recommendations and either accept
them or select a different equipment
type based on their knowledge of
their processes and practices.
Options
Size Icarus Size the mapped Icarus project
Project component(s).
Component(s) If you are mapping a single item to a
single component that can be sized
using the interactive Sizing Expert
See Chapter 6 for (see list on page 6-1), the Interactive
instructions on using
the Sizing Expert. Sizing form will appear after
mapping.
Otherwise, Analyzer uses its
automatic sizing.
Although the Sizing Expert is
unavailable when sizing multiple
components, you can still use it later
(assuming the component is one of
those that can be sized interactively).
Just right-click on the mapped
component and click Re-Size on the
pop-up menu.
Click OK.
The Project Component Map Preview dialog box appears.
All simulator items
are displayed
because Map all
Items was selected
at the previous
dialog box. Those
components being
mapped have
asterisks next to
them.
If you selected Map Selected Item(s) at the Map dialog box,

the Simulator Items list displays just the selected simulator
block(s). If you selected Map all Items, the Simulator Items
list displays all simulator blocks.
The Current Map List displays the components, if any, that are
already mapped to the simulator block highlighted on the
Simulation List.
The Configuration option box is active only for blocks
representing column models. (In the sample project, Block B7
represents a column model.)
You must use the arrow scroll
buttons to see all 10 possible
configurations. Selecting a
configuration type automatically
fills in the Current Map List with
the components required for that configuration type. See
“Tower Configurations” on page 4-32 for more information.
3. Click New Mapping to map a block highlighted on the
Simulator Items list to an Icarus project component.
If the simulator block represents a column model that does not
yet have all its required mappings, the Select a Suffix dialog
box appears, listing the types of components (indicated by
suffixes that appear at the end of Item Descriptions on the List
view) that still need to be mapped to the block.
See Tower
Configurations on
page 4-29 for more
information.
Suffix To indicate
bottoms split bottoms splitter
bot exchanger bottoms exchanger
bottoms pump bottoms pump
cond condenser for the tower
cond acc condenser accumulator
ovhd overhead exchanger
exchanger
overhead split overhead splitter
ovhd pump overhead pump
precooler first heat exchanger in “split”
configuration”
reb reboiler for the tower
reflux pump reflux pump
tower main tower
trim second heat exchanger in
“split” configuration”
other user-selectable.
spray cond Spray condenser
spray cond Pump for recirculating the
exit pump spray condenser exit
sc tot recycle Splitter in Spray Condenser
splitter Configuration that generates
the total recycle stream
sc cooler Heat exchanger in the Spray

Condenser Configuration that
cools the entire total recycle
stream
sc tot recycle Trim splitter in Spray
trim splitter Condenser Configuration 2
(page 4-44)
sc trim Heat exchanger in the Spray
Condenser Configuration that cools
the entire total recycle stream
Select a suffix and click OK.
The Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box appears.
4. Select a component.
The Project Component Map Preview dialog box now displays
the component category's item symbol (e.g., AG) and the
component type (e.g., DIRECT) in the Current Map List. More
component details are displayed in the Icarus Project
Component Description section.
By default, the Component Name field contains the block
name. You may want to modify it to be more descriptive and to
distinguish the component from others to which the block has
also been mapped. This can be as simple as adding a descriptor
at the end.
Each component mapped from the block must have a unique

name; if another component already has the default component
name, Analyzer prompts you to enter a unique name after you
select another component.
5. Click OK to complete the mapping.
If you selected to size the mapped component(s), Analyzer also
performs automatic sizing or, in cases in which a single item is
being mapped to a single component for which interactive
sizing is available, the Interactive Sizing form appears. See
Chapter 6, “Sizing Project Components,” for information on
this feature.
With the block now mapped, the List view displays the
components mapped from the simulator block.
Component Status You may notice a "?" in the Status column of a project component
mapped from the simulator block. This indicates that there are still
specifications that need to be entered for the component. To enter
the specifications, right-click on the component and click Modify
Item on the pop-up menu. Entering specifications in the required
fields will change the status to OK. Required fields are indicated
by color-coding explained on page 5-7, under “Entering
Component Specifications”.
If you do not enter the specifications and the "?" remains in the
Status column, the item will not be included in the project
evaluation and will have "0" cost associated with it. It will not
cause SCAN messages.
Deleting Mappings To delete mappings, right-click on the simulator area or simulator

block in Process view and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Tower Configurations
Since a column may be mapped to multiple pieces of equipment, Analyzer requires that you select a
tower configuration at the Project Component Map Preview dialog box.
There are 10 possible configurations for selection:

• Standard – Single
• Standard – Total
• Standard – Total w/Circ.
• Standard – Split Full configurations include the
following equipment not found in
• Standard – Split Total standard configurations: overhead
• Standard – Split Total w/Circ. pump, overhead product heat
exchanger, bottoms product pump,
• Full – Single and bottoms product heat exchanger.
• Full – Single w.Circ.
• Full – Split
• Full – Split w/Circ.
"Single" and "Split" refer to the number of overhead condensers, "Split" signifying multiple
condensers.
"Total" indicates that the reflux pump handles the total outlet liquid flow from the accumulator. In
such configurations, the splitting into a reflux and overhead liquid product occurs after the reflux
pump.
"Circ." indicates that there is a pump between the bottoms splitter and the reboiler giving a forced
circulation configuration around the reboiler.
Tower Configurations (continued)
Based on the tower configuration selected, Analyzer automatically creates a model for each tower
block and then maps the model to an Icarus project component. In addition, you can specify how
the condenser requirements should be split between the Precooler and the Trim cooler in the
Design Criteria File. In the event that subcooling is present, the precooler will completely condense
the overhead vapor and the trim cooler will perform the subcooling; the split specification in the
Design Criteria file will be ignored when subcooling is present.
The following figures display the possible configurations. The default item description suffixes (see
page 4-28) are used to identify the configuration parts, each of which is mapped to an Icarus project
component.
Standard - Single
CONDENSER
(Cond)
CONDENSER
EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)
MAIN TOWER ACCUMULATOR

(Tower) REFLUX EXIT WATER
OVERHEAD
OVERHEAD LIQUID
REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT PRODUCT
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS
LIQUID
PRODUCT
- continued on next page –
Standard – Total
CONDENSER
(Cond)
CONDENSER
EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)
OVERHEAD
MAIN TOWER REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT
ACCUMULATOR
EXIT
REFLUX PUMP
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS
LIQUID
PRODUCT
Standard – Total w/ Circ.

CONDENSER
(Cond)
CONDENSER
EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)
OVERHEAD
MAIN TOWER REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT
ACCUMULATOR
EXIT
REFLUX PUMP
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
CIRCULATION
BOTTOMS SPLIT PUMP EXIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
CIRCULATION
PUMP
(circ pump)
BOTTOMS
LIQUID
PRODUCT
Standard – Split
PRECOOLER TRIM COOLER

(Trim)
TRIM
COOLER
EXIT
OVERHEAD
OVERHEAD PRECOOLER VAPOR
VAPOR EXIT EXIT PRODUCT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)
MAIN TOWER
ACCUMULATOR
(Tower) REFLUX
EXIT WATER
OVERHEAD
REFLUX PUMP OVERHEAD LIQUID
SPLIT PRODUCT
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS
LIQUID
PRODUCT
Standard – Split Total

(Trim)
TRIM
COOLER
EXIT
OVERHEAD
OVERHEAD PRECOOLER VAPOR
VAPOR EXIT EXIT PRODUCT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)
MAIN TOWER
OVERHEAD ACCUMULATOR
(Tower)
SPLIT EXIT WATER
REFLUX
REFLUX
PUMP EXIT
REFLUX PUMP
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
FEED PRODUCT
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS
LIQUID
PRODUCT
Standard – Split Total w/ Circ.
Full – Single
CONDENSER
(Cond)
CONDENSER
EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)

OVERHEAD
PUMP EXIT
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT EXCHANGER
(Ovhd exch)
OVERHEAD
PRODUCT PUMP
(Ovhd pump)
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS BOTTOMS
PUMP LIQUID
EXIT PRODUCT
BOTTOMS
EXCHANGER
(Bot exch)
BOTTOMS
PUMP
Full - Single w/ Circ.

CONDENSER
(Cond)
CONDENSER
EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)

OVERHEAD
PUMP EXIT
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT EXCHANGER
(Ovhd exch)
OVERHEAD
PRODUCT PUMP
(Ovhd pump)
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
CIRCULATION
BOTTOMS SPLIT PUMP EXIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
CIRCULATION
PUMP
(circ pump)
BOTTOMS BOTTOMS
PUMP LIQUID
EXIT PRODUCT
BOTTOMS
EXCHANGER
(Bot exch)
BOTTOMS
PUMP
Full – Split
(Trim)
EXIT EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)

OVERHEAD
PUMP EXIT
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT EXCHANGER
(Ovhd exch)
OVERHEAD
PRODUCT PUMP
(Ovhd pump)
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
BOTTOMS SPLIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS BOTTOMS
PUMP LIQUID
EXIT PRODUCT
BOTTOMS
EXCHANGER
(Bot exch)
BOTTOMS
PUMP
Full – Split w/ Circ.

(Trim)
EXIT EXIT OVERHEAD
VAPOR
OVERHEAD PRODUCT
VAPOR EXIT
ACCUMULATOR
(Cond Acc)

OVERHEAD
PUMP EXIT
OVERHEAD
LIQUID
PRODUCT
OVERHEAD OVERHEAD
REFLUX PUMP
SPLIT EXCHANGER
(Ovhd exch)
OVERHEAD
PRODUCT PUMP
(Ovhd pump)
FEED
BOTTOMS
RETURN
REBOILER
(Reb)
BOTTOMS
EXIT
CIRCULATION PUMP
BOTTOMS SPLIT EXIT
BOTTOMS
SPLIT EXIT
CIRCULATION
PUMP
(circ pump)
BOTTOMS BOTTOMS
PUMP LIQUID
EXIT PRODUCT
BOTTOMS
EXCHANGER
(Bot exch)
BOTTOMS
PUMP
Spray Cond Config 1 w/ Circ.
Note: Flow rate of the Spray Cond Total Recycle (SCTR) stream is calculated using Ratio of
Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates = mSCTR / (mOVH LIQ PROD+ mREFLUX). Ratio
of Recycle to (Ovhdliqprod + Reflux) Flowrates is an input specified in the Design Criteria.
mSCTR = mass flow rate of the SCTR stream.
mOVH LIQ PROD = mass flow rate of the Overhead Liquid Product stream.
mREFLUX = mass flow rate of the Reflux stream.
Spray Cond Config 2 w/ Circ.
The duty for the “SC COOLER” and “SC TRIM” exchangers are calculated using
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty = QSCTRIM / QCONDENSER
QCONDENSER = QSCTRIM + QSCCOOLER
Where
Ratio of SC Trim Duty to Overall Duty is an input specified in the Design Criteria
QSCTRIM = “Spray Condenser Cooler” Duty
QSCCOOLER = “Spray Condenser Trim” Duty
QCONDENSER = Total Overhead Condenser Duty, obtained from Simulator Data
Then the temperatures of the streams exiting the Spray Condenser Cooler and Spray
Condenser Trim exchangers are calculated using an Q = mCpDeltaT calculation.
Flow rate of the streams exiting the SC Tot Recycle Trim Splitter are determined using:
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio = mSCRTSEx1 / mSCCEx
mSCCEx = (mSCRTSEx1 + mSCRTSEx2)
SC Trim Splitter Flow Split Ratio is an input specified in the Design Criteria
mSCCEx = mass flow rate of the “SC Cooler Exit” Stream
mSCRTSEx1 = mass flow rate of the “SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex1” Stream
(this is the one that subsequently goes through the SC TRIM exchanger)
mSCRTSEx2= mass flow rate of the “SC Rcy Trim Splitter Ex2” Stream
Specifying Additional Components
Icarus project components can be added to areas mapped from a
simulator report. However, these project components must initially
be added in a user-added area. You can later rearrange the
components in Project Explorer’s Project view, drag components
from a user-added area to an area mapped from the simulator
report.
Follow the instructions for adding a project component on page 5-
4.
If the component you add is process equipment, Analyzer adds an
icon representing the new equipment item in the upper left-hand
corner of the Process Flow Diagram (PFD). The next section,
“Working with Process Flow Diagrams,” includes instructions
(under “Editing Connectivity” on page 4-49) for connecting an
added component to a stream in PFD view.
Working with Process Flow Diagrams
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) provide graphical representations of
Icarus process equipment mapped from simulator blocks and the
interconnecting streams. You can edit the layout and connectivity
of the mapped items from PFD view. You can also add streams.
Analyzer provides intelligent port selection, so that when drawing
a stream you see the candidate ports highlighted in green as you
move the cursor over them.
To access PFD view, click Process Flow Diagram on the View
menu.
Use the Drag-and-Find

feature to locate any
equipment item on the
PFD. Drag an equipment
item from Project Explorer
(Project view) and drop it
on the PFD. The icon in
the PFD that corresponds
to the selected equipment
will be positioned in the
upper left-hand corner
(regardless of magni-
fication).
Editing the Layout To change the position of an item, use your mouse to drag the item
to its new position. Analyzer reroutes any streams connected to the
item.
To change the route of a stream, click on the stream, then drag the
stream to straighten it or to create an elbow-bend. Note that if you
eventually select Reroute All Streams from the Run menu,
Analyzer chooses the most logical routes for all streams.
Process Flow Diagram View Menu
The View menu contains some options that are only displayed when the Block Flow Diagram is
active.
Toolbar – View or hide the toolbar. See page 2-21 for descriptions of
toolbar buttons.
of the status bar.
Palette.
Workbook Mode – Turn Workbook Mode on and off. See page 2-13 for
an explanation of Workbook Mode.
Evaluation needs to have already been run. See Chapter 8, “Evaluating
the Project,” for details.
See “Reviewing Investment Analysis” on page 9-77 for instructions.
simulator data.
command is not active until you have mapped the simulator items.
Grid Settings – Access Grid Properties dialog box, where you can set
the grid increments and select to view or hide grid lines.
Snap to Grid – Move blocks in increments corresponding to the grid
lines when dragging to new location.
Show Page Bounds – View or hide page separation lines. When
displayed, you can see where page breaks will be when printing.
Ports Visible – View or hide ports.
Zoom – Access Zoom tool. This is the same as in the Block Flow
Diagram (see page 4-20).
Add Stream – Access the Develop Streams dialog box. See “Adding A
Stream,” page 4-50, for details.
Draw Disconnected Stream – Access the Disconnected Streams dialog
box. See “Drawing Disconnected Streams,” page 4-52, for details.
Edit Connectivity – Activate the Edit Connectivity feature. See “Editing
Connectivity,” page 4-49, for details.
Setting Grid You can select to display grids of any increments. In addition, you
Properties can select the color of the grids and whether to be in Snap to Grid
mode.
To set grid properties:

1. Click Grid Settings on the View menu.
The Grid Properties dialog appears.
2. Set the Across and Down grid increments in the Increments

section. Specify in the Units section whether the specified
increments are in inches or centimeters.
3. Mark the Snap to Grid check box to turn on Snap to Grid
mode. When you drag a block in this mode, the block’s
bounding outline moves in increments corresponding to the
grid.
4. Click Color to select a grid color.
5. Finally, in the Visibility section, select whether to show or hide
the grid.
Click OK to apply the settings.
Editing Connectivity The Edit Connectivity feature allows you to make changes to the
layout of items in the PFD. Since this involves connecting and
disconnecting streams to ports, the Ports Visible option should be
Ports Visible
button on, as it is by default.
Connecting a Stream to To connect a stream to a different inlet port:

Different Inlet Port
1. Click the Edit Connectivity button on the toolbar:
2. Place the cursor over the end of the
stream you wish to connect to a
different inlet port.
The cursor becomes an arrow.
3. Click on the end of the stream.
The cursor now appears as a
crosshairs.
4. Move the cursor to another inlet port.
When the cursor is in close proximity
to a component, the component's
available inlet ports display green.
5. Click on the new inlet port.
Connecting an Added Project components that you add to the project appear in the upper
Project Component to a left-hand corner of the PFD and are not connected to any streams.
Stream
To connect an added project component to a stream:
1. Click the Edit Connectivity button:

2. Place the cursor over the added
project component that you wish to
insert into an existing stream.
The cursor becomes a hand.
3. Click on the component.
A bounding outline, representing the
component, appears around the
cursor.
4. Move the cursor over a stream. Click
when you have placed the cursor
over the desired stream.
Analyzer disconnects the Sink end of the stream from the inlet port
on the current component, then automatically re-connects it to the
inlet port on the inserted component.
Analyzer also creates a new stream,
which appears white and has
properties relative to the initial
stream. Analyzer connects the Source
end of this new stream to the outlet
port of the inserted item and the Sink
and to the inlet port of the original.
The added item can now be sized manually or using the Size Item
option, which either automatically sizes the item or, if interactive
sizing is available, accesses the Sizing Expert. The Sizing Expert,
explained in Chapter 6, will utilize the newly connected streams.
Adding a Stream From PFD view, you can create a new stream and specify its
connectivity. The process of developing streams is explained in
detail under “Developing Streams,” page 3-69.
To add a stream:
1. Click the Add Stream button on the toolbar:

The Develop Streams dialog box appears.
2. In the Base Stream section, select a steam to use as a basis.
3. In the Basis section, select a Basis Mode:
Absolute If the Basis Mode is Absolute, the data from the
base stream is copied to the new stream at the time
the new stream is created. If the data of the base
stream is altered at any time after this point, the
data of the new stream remains unchanged.
Relative If the Basis Mode is Relative, the new stream’s
data is dynamically linked to that of the stream on
which it’s based. This means that alterations to the
data of the base stream immediately affect the new
stream.
4. Click Create. The Create Stream dialog box appears.
5. Type a name in the Stream Name field and click OK.

The Develop Streams specifications form appears.
6. Make any desired modifications and click OK.
7. Move the cursor, which appears as a
square, to an outlet port.
Analyzer provides intelligent port
selection, highlighting the candidate
ports in green.
Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired outlet port.
8. Move the cursor, which now appears as
crosshairs, to an inlet port.
Click when you have placed the cursor
over the desired inlet port.
Drawing a To draw a disconnected stream:
Disconnected Stream 1. Click the Draw Disconnected Stream button on the toolbar:
The Disconnected Streams dialog box appears.
2. Select a stream and click OK.

3. Draw the stream as described in the previous instructions for
Adding a Stream.
Working with Right-clicking on a stream accesses a pop-up menu with the

Streams following commands.
Select In order to
Modify Access the Develop Stream dialog box
listing the stream’s specifications, which
you can modify.
Disconnect Erase the stream from the screen and store
it, so that you can select it when using the
Draw Disconnected Stream feature (see
above).
Reconnect Source Reconnect the stream to a new outlet port.
Reconnect Sink Reconnect the stream to a new inlet port.
Delete Delete the stream.
Defining Project Components
When developing an Analyzer project, project components can be

See Icarus Reference
added in Project view to user-defined areas (areas not mapped
for information on from the simulation report). Once added, you may drag them to
individual components.
different areas. Project components are the pieces of the process
plant (or mill) that, when linked together, complete a process.
Components are categorized as follows:
Category To define
Process Equipment Equipment for gas, liquids and solids
handling and off-site/packaged systems.
Plant Bulks Material commodities that service a
section of the plant or the whole plant.
Plant bulks are divided into categories:
Piping, Civil, Steel, Instrumentation,
Electrical, Insulation and Paint.
Site Development Modifications that must be done to the
site. Site development items are divided
into categories: Demolition, Drainage,
Earthwork, Fencing, Landscaping,
Roads-Slabs-Paving, Piling and
Railroads.
Buildings Civil structures directly involved in the
process or for off-site use.
Quoted Equipment A way to enter special equipment not
found in Process Equipment above.
Unit Cost Library Items from a Unit Cost Library. See
Chapter 7, “Developing and Using Cost
Libraries.”
Equipment Model Items from an Equipment Model
Library Library. See Chapter 7, “Developing and
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Defining Project Components • 5-1

Using Cost Libraries.”
5-2 • Defining Project Components Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Adding an Area
To add an area:
1. In Project Explorer’s Project view, right-click on the Main
Project folder.
2. Click Add Area on the pop-up menu.

The Area Information dialog box appears.
3. Define the area, including name, type, and dimensions.

The Area Type determines how equipment will be installed
in the area. See Chapter 36 of Icarus Reference for
information.
4. Click OK.
Project Explorer now displays the new area.

Adding a Project Component
Analyzer provides two methods for adding a project
component:
• Drag-and-drop
Drag a component from the Palette to an area on Project
Explorer’s Project view and enter an item description. This
adds the component to the area without displaying the
Component Specifications form; the specifications are left
to be entered at your convenience.
• Pop-up menu
Right-click on an area and click Add Project Component
from the pop-up menu, then select a component from the
Project Component Selection dialog box and enter an item
description. This adds the component and also displays the
Component Specifications form, where you can complete
the component definition right away.
Method 1: Dragging a To add a component using the drag-and-drop method:

Component from the 1. With the Palette
Palette (Components view)
and Project Explorer
(Project view)
displayed, drag a
Note: The Recent Items component from the
folder in the components list to an
Components view stores
the last 10 project area on the Project
component selections. Explorer.
To drag: click on the

component and hold
down the mouse
button, Move the
cursor until over an
area, and release the
mouse button.

The New Component Information dialog box appears.
2. Enter an item description (required) and User Tag Number

(optional), then click OK.
The component is added. Project Explorer displays a block for the
component under the selected area. The List view displays general
information. You may notice a question mark (?) in the Status
column on the List view. This indicates that there are still
specifications that need to be entered for the component. To enter
the specifications, follow the instructions under “Entering
Component Specifications” on page 5-7.
Method 2: Using the To add a component using the pop-up menu:

Pop-Up Menu 1. In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on a non-
simulator area and click Add Project Component on the
pop-up menu.
The Project Component Selection dialog box appears.

2. Enter the Project Component Name.
3. Highlight the category to which the desired equipment
belongs (process equipment, plant bulks, site development,
buildings, quoted equipment) and click OK.
Analyzer displays a list of sub-categories. Continue to
narrow down the selection to a specific component. Then
click OK.
The component is added to the area.
The Component Specifications form is automatically
displayed. You can either complete the definition of the
equipment item now or later.

Entering Component Specifications
After adding a component, you still need to enter at least some
component specifications to complete the component’s definition.
Many component specifications have default values used when no
value is entered, but most component specifications require further
input. If a component added still has any specifications requiring
input, a question mark (?) appears in the status column of the List
view for that component.
You do not have to enter specifications immediately upon adding a
component; you may wish to wait until more information about a
project becomes available.
As more information about a project becomes available, you may
also wish to modify previously entered component specifications.
The following instructions apply as well to modifying previously
entered specifications.
To enter or modify component specifications:
1. If the Component Specifications form is not already
displayed in the Main Window, display the form by
right-clicking on the component and clicking Modify Item
on the pop-up menu. You can right-click on the component
in either Project Explorer (Project view) or List view (Area
level)
Double-clicking on the component will also display the
Specifications form.
Color coding
y Red Border: An entry must be

made in the field. All
specifications forms have at least
one required entry field.
y Green Borders and Thick Gray
Borders: An entry must be made
in either the field with the thick
gray border or in the two fields
with the green borders. The field
with the thick gray borders and
the fields with the green borders
are mutually exclusive. In the
form pictured to the right, either
the pump size must be selected
or the fluid head and liquid flow
rate must be entered. The
Properties Window notes this in
the Description.

2. Enter the specifications. Fields with red borders are
While on either required. If there’s a combination of two fields with green
the component or
installation bulks borders and one with a thick gray border, an entry must be
specifications made either in the two fields with the green borders or in
form, you can quickly
determine the net effect of the field with the thick gray border.
all your changes by clicking
the Evaluate button and 3. To define installation bulks for the component, click the
reviewing the resulting Options drop-down and select the type of bulks to define.
report. See page 8-63 for
more information.
See “Defining Installation Bulks” on page 5-9 for a

complete description of installation bulks.
4. After defining the component and installation bulks, save
the specifications form by clicking OK.

Defining Installation Bulks
Installation bulks are items directly associated with the component
being defined and are used to complete the installation of the item,
e.g., a foundation for a vessel. The difference between an
installation bulk and a plant bulk is that an installation bulk is
associated with a component, whereas a plant bulk services the
whole plant or mill.
Installation bulks may be defined when entering or modifying
equipment or plant bulk specifications. Most components are
automatically outfitted with installation bulks, so this feature is
typically used to adjust, modify, or delete selected bulks. However,
because quoted equipment is not automatically outfitted with
installation bulks, this feature also serves as the method for
defining all installation bulks required for quoted equipment.
To access installation bulk specifications:
1. Display the Component Specifications form.
2. Click the down-arrow on the Options button.
3. Click the type of installation bulks you wish to view or define.

Analyzer displays the specifications form for the selected
installation bulk items. See the subsections that follow for
descriptions of the different types of installation bulks. When you
are done defining

the installation bulk, save your changes in either of two ways,
depending on what you intend to do next:
If you want to continue modifying this component’s
installation bulks or component specifications, click
Apply to save the changes. You can now select either
Project Component or another type of installation
bulks from the Options menu.
If you are done making changes to the installation
bulks and to the component specifications, click OK
to save the changes and close the specifications
window.
Mat’l / Man-hours Using Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments, you can specify percent

Adjustments adjustments of system calculated values as follows:
Category Percent adjustment for
Equipment Material cost (COA 100-299)
Setting Man-hours (COA 100-299)
Piping Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
300-399)
Civil Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
400-499)
Steel Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
500-599)
Instrumentation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
600-699)
Electrical Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
700-799)
Insulation Material costs and/or man-hours (COA
800-899)
Paint Material costs and/or man-hours. (COA
900-999)
These adjustments compound material and man-hour indexing
applied to the same COA’s. User-entered material costs and
man-hours (entered using either Quoted Equipment or
Mat’l/Man-hours % Additions) are not affected by these
adjustments.
A special options section at the bottom of this form allows you to
specify non-default installations for the item, including demolition
(i.e., dismantlement) of the component and its installation bulks.

For example, to demolish a component item:
1. Click Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments on the Options menu
of the Component Specifications form.
2. Scroll down to the Special Options section and, from the
Installation Option scroll list, click DEML.
Selecting the demolition

(DEML) option causes the
following changes to the
component:
Material costs are set to
zero.
Man-hours and labor costs
are charged to demolition
COAs (e.g., 109, 309, 409,
etc.)
Piping and civil man-hours
are down-adjusted:
− Shop fab man-hours
are removed from
piping man-hours.
− Civil formwork/bracing
man-hours are
removed.
3. Go back through the Mat’l/Man-hour Adjustments form

and make the proper adjustments to account for the relative
difficulty of demolition versus new build.
For example, if you know unsetting the component is 15%
easier than initially setting it, then enter 85% in the Setting
labor adjustment field.
4. Save your changes in either of two ways, depending on
what you intend to do next:
If you want to continue modifying this
component’s installation bulk or component
specifications, click Apply to save the
changes to the Mat’l Man-hour Adjustments.
You can now select either Project
Component or another installation bulk from
the Options menu.

If you are done making changes to the
installation bulks and to the component
specifications, click OK to save the changes
and close the specifications window.
Mat’l / Man-hours Using Mat’l/Man-hours Additions, you can add lump sum material
Additions costs and/or man-hours to a specified COA. All additions are
reported “as is.” Additions are neither indexed nor adjusted by
Mat’l/Man-hours Adjustments. Up to 20 additions may be
defined per component.
Pipe – General Specs Use Pipe – General Specs to define the rules for developing all
installation piping on the selected component. You can use many
fields to define general piping specifications, such as:
• Material
• Pressure
• Temperature
• Installation - above or below grade
• Fluid or electric tracing
• Flange class and type
• Stress relief
• Insulation type
• Insulation jacket type
• Paint treatment
Pipe – Item Details Use Pipe – Item Details to specify individual runs of piping and
associated fittings, tracing, paint and insulation. The line is
developed using the rules defined in Pipe – General Specs unless
they are re-defined with Pipe – Item Details. Up to 40 lines may be
defined/adjusted for each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple
items have been added, select in Preferences to not display
all items. If Display P&I Installation Items is unmarked on
the Preferences General tab view, selecting Pipe – Item
Details will display a dialog box from which you can select
the item you wish to edit or select to add a new item. See
page 2-31 for instructions on entering Preferences.
The component starts with piping depicted in the Piping and
Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the

component’s piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the
P&ID button on the Component Specifications form. It displays
the piping you are adjusting on the Pipe Details Installation Bulk
form.
You can revise the pipe volumetric model for a component line-by-
line. Specifications on the Pipe – Item Details Installation Bulk
form override the project-, area- and component-level
specifications that otherwise determine the design of all lines of
pipe. For example, area dimensions determine all lengths of lines
generated by volumetric models except those lines for which you
enter a specific length.
The Piping Volumetric Model field offers the following options:
“blank” - Specified pipe only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the

complete piping model for this item. However, in addition to
discarding all of the automatically generated lines of pipe, this also
discards all the associated drains/vents and pipe-associated
instrumentation. The system now generates only piping,
drains/vents and on-/in-line instrumentation for those lines that you
subsequently define. Once you have used this option, the other
options below cannot be used because the model is already
discarded. If you subsequently re-create a line that the volumetric

model would have automatically created, the associated on-/in-line
instrumentation is automatically “re-created.”
A - Add line to pipe volumetric model
This option is used to add a new line of pipe to a component. The

number of the new line must be higher than any other
automatically created or user-defined line. For example, if a
component generates lines 1 to 6, then an added line may have the
number 7 to 40. The area dimensions will have no effect on the
length of these lines. It is not necessary to add line numbers in
numeric order; however, they will be generated and reported in
numeric order. To associate instrumentation with a new line,
specify that a sensor or control element location is this line
number. Line 40 is reserved for drains/vents.
C - Change lines on pipe volumetric model
This is a commonly used option. It is used to modify automatically

generated lines of pipe; user-specified lines are not changed. The
line is generated exactly at it would have been in the absence of
your specifications, except for the items which you change. You
may use this to change only the metallurgy, diameter or length of a
run, or only the valves and fittings (including setting the quantity
to 0) or any combination of these.
D - Delete line on pipe volumetric model
This option deletes a single line of automatically generated pipe

and its associated drains/vents and instrumentation.
R - Replace line on pipe volumetric model
This option replaces the automatically generated line completely

with the exact line that you specify. If you do not define something
for this line, you do not get it. For example, if you specify a line of
fixed length containing no valves or fittings, then you only get the
straight-run of pipe.
To make more than one specification for Pipe – Item Details, click
the Add button. This adds an item specs column to this form.
To delete any unwanted or unused column(s), select any cell in that
column (or drag for a range of columns). Then click the Delete
button. Incompletely specified columns must be either completed
or deleted before saving.

Duct Duct installation bulk items specify individual runs of process
ductwork and associated fittings and insulation. Up to 5 duct lines
may be specified for each component. Use the same methods
described for multiple lines of pipe.
Civil Civil installation bulk items specify bulk excavation and up to

three different foundation types/sizes. The available foundation
types are listed in the Icarus Reference.
From the specified foundation types and volumes, Analyzer
calculates:
• Excavation and backfill
• Form work (plywood/backup lumber with reuse)
• Rebar
• Sand mat (or ring wall foundation types only)
• Grout
• Anchor bolts/embedments
Steel The Steel installation bulk specifies the following:

• Ladders
• Stairs
• Platforms
In addition, up to three different steel items may be specified.
Instrumentation Instrument installation bulk items specify individual

instrumentation loops or parts of loops with associated sensors,
transmitters and signal cabling. Up to 50 loops may be defined for
each component.
Note: To reduce the time required to retrieve data when multiple
instrument items have been added, select in Preferences to
not display all items. If Display P&I Installation Items is
unmarked on the Preferences General tab view, selecting
Instrumentation will display a dialog box from which you
can select the item you wish to edit or select to add a new
item. See page 2-31 for instructions on accessing and
entering Preferences.
The component starts with instrumentation depicted in the Piping
and Instrumentation Drawings manual. You can also display the

component’s piping and instrumentation drawing by clicking the
P&ID button on the Component Specifications form. It displays
the instrumentation you are adjusting on the Instrumentation
Installation Bulk form.
You can revise the instrument volumetric model for a component
loop-by-loop. Specifications entered on the Instrumentation
Installation Bulk form override the project-, area- and component-
level specifications that otherwise determine the design of all
instrument loops.
The Instrument Volumetric Model field offers the following

options:
“blank” - Specified loop only, no volume. model
This option should rarely be used. It is a rapid way to discard the

complete instrument model for this item. The system then
generates instrumentation for those loops that you subsequently
define. To define new loops, you continue to use this “blank”
option for each successive loop. Once you have used this option,
the other options below cannot be used because the model is
already discarded.
A - Add loop to instr. volume. model
This option is used to add a new loop to a component. The number

of the new loop must be higher than any other automatically
created or user-defined loop. It is not necessary to add loop
numbers in numeric order; however, they will be generated and

reported in numeric order. For example, if a component generates
loops 1 to 6, then an added loop may have the number 7 to 50.
D - Delete loop on instr. volume. model
This option deletes a single loop, including sensor, transmitter,

cable, control center connections and final control element.
R - Replace loop on instr. volume. model
This option replaces the automatically generated loop completely

with the exact loop that you specify. If you do not define
something for this loop, or you selectively delete a part, you do not
get it. For example, if you specify a sensor and transmitter only,
then you only get the signal generated and sent to the control
center.
“+” - Append to previous loop w/same no.
This option is used to append extra sensors or control valves to the

immediately preceding, user-defined loop (you must also correctly
specify the loop number of the preceding loop). It may not be used
to append items to automatically generated loops; to do this, you
should first use the replace option to redefine the loop, then use the
“+” option. Whether you are appending a sensor or control
element, you should make entries for both the sensor and control
valve locations.
To define more than one adjustment, use the same methods
described earlier for Pipe – Item Details (page 5-14).
Instrument Loop On the Instrumentation Installation Bulk form, there are eight Loop
Adjustment Modification fields, which allow you to remove different elements
of the instrument loop from the project. Select “-” from the
drop-down menu to remove an element.
Two of the elements, sensor and control valve, can also be
specified as quoted (“Q”) or vendor-provided (“V”) equipment.
When either “Q” or “V” is selected, the system includes
installation man-hours for the element but not material costs.

Deleting the process connection removes all of the instrument
piping.
The indicating signal and control signal runs are reported together,
so removing one would decrease the amount of cable and supports
by half.
The following diagram shows how the eight adjustable loop
elements fit into the loop design:
Notes:
(A) Junction boxes can be
found under PLANT
BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION,
JUNC-BOX.
(B) Multi-core runs can be
found under PLANT
BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION,
ELECTRONIC SIGNAL
WIRE. You can specify it
with or without the
junction box.
(C) Control centers can be
found under PLANT
BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION,
MULTIFUNCTION
CONTROLLERS
(electronic) or PLANT
BULKS,
INSTRUMENTATION,
INSTRUMENT PANEL –
ANALOG (pneumatic).
Electrical The Electrical installation bulk specifies local equipment lighting,

control wiring power/cable, and motor starters for up to three
different types of electrical loads.

Insulation The Insulation installation bulk specifies insulation and
fireproofing for component and installation bulk steel. For
components, the insulation type, jacket type, thickness and area
may be specified. For component and steel fireproofing, type,
rating and area may be specified.
Paint The Paint installation bulk specifies surface preparation and

painting of component and installation bulk steel. Paint for pipe is
specified under piping. Entry field specifications include:
• Size of area to be painted
• Number of prime and final coats
• Percent of painted area to be sandblasted
• Galvanizing (for steel)

Importing Areas and Components
Analyzer allows you to import entire areas or individual
components from other project scenarios. By importing a
component, you also import all associated installation bulks.
To import an area or component:
1. In the Palette’s Projects view, double click on the project
scenario from which you wish to import.
This displays the project areas in the scenario.
Expand an area folder to display the components in it.
2. To import a component:
Drag the component to the desired area in Project Explorer,
Project view.
Analyzer adds the component to the area.
To import an area and its components:
Drag the area to Main Project in Project Explorer.
Analyzer adds the area and its components.
To import all the components in an area to an existing area in
the current project scenario:
Drag the area from the Palette to the desired area in Project
Explorer.
Analyzer adds the components to the area without creating
a new area.

Importing an Entire Scenario
As well as allowing you to import individual areas or components,
Analyzer lets you import an entire scenario using a drag-and-drop
operation. This imports all the areas and components in the
selected scenario. You can select in Preferences whether to also
include installation bulks and/or connected streams (see page 2-
34). By default, installation bulks are included and connected
streams are not.
To import an entire scenario:
1. Have Project Explorer’s Project view open, since you will
drag the scenario there.
2. Click on the scenario in the Palette’s Projects view.
3. Drag the scenario from the Palette to Project Explorer’s

Project view.
Analyzer displays a confirmation window.
Note: you can only import

scenarios that have the
same units of measure as
the current scenario. If the
units of measure are not
the same, a dialog box
will inform you of this
when you try to import. 4. Click yes.
The areas and components of the selected scenario are
imported.

Copying Components
The Copy command copies a selected component and all of its
associated installation bulks. This is useful if you want to add a
component that is similar to an existing item. The item can be
copied and modified with less effort than creating a new item.
Remember to change the Item Description when copying
components to distinguish the copy from the original.
To copy and paste a component:
1. Right-click on the component in either Project Explorer or the
List view (at area level, so that components are listed), and
then click Copy on the pop-up menu.
You can also copy multiple components at once: select the
desired components on the List view, right-click on one of the
components, and click Copy on the pop-up menu.
2. Right-click on the area to which you want to add the
component(s) and click Paste on the pop-up menu.
The component is added to the area.
Note: If the area contains a component with the same name as the
one being pasted, Analyzer changes the new component’s
name so that “#1#” appears at the beginning.
Cut and Paste If you want to delete (cut) a component from one area and add
(paste) it in another area, use the same procedure as above, except
click Cut instead of Copy on the pop-up menu.
Drag and Drop You can also move a component from one area to another by
dragging it.

Deleting Components
The Delete command removes a component and all associated
installation bulks from the project.
To delete a component:
List view and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
A confirmation dialog box appears.

2. Click Yes to delete the component or click No to retain the
component.
You can also delete multiple components at one time: select the
components on the List view, right-click on one of the
components, and click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Re-numbering After deleting components, you may wish to re-number the

Components remaining components so that the numbering contains no gaps and
reflects the order in which components were added.
For example, if you add components A, B, C, D, and E in that
order, the automatically generated Order Numbers would be 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, respectively. If you then delete components B and C and
re-number, components A, D, and E would have Order Numbers 1,
2, 3, respectively. The order in which they were created would still
determine the Order Numbers.
To re-number components:
On the Run menu, click Re-number and then click Project
Components on the sub-menu.

Deleting Areas
The Delete Area command removes the selected area and all of its
components.
To delete an area:
1. Right-click on the area in Project Explorer and click Delete
Area on the pop-up menu.

2. Click Yes to delete the area or click No to retain the area.
Re-numbering Areas Areas have reference numbers that are internally stored and then
used by the Evaluation Engine. They are not visible in the current
version of Analyzer. Just as with components, re-numbering is
intended to close gaps in the numbering after deletion.
To re-number areas:
On the Run menu, click Re-number and then click Project Areas
on the sub-menu.

Using the Custom Model Tool
The Custom Model tool allows you to base component
specifications on formulas or fixed data stored in Excel. Use the
tool to send a component’s specification values, connection stream
values, and specified bulk information (pipe-item details, material
and man-hour adjustments) to an Aspen-designed Excel workbook,
where you can enter new specification values based on your own
data or formulas. Then, use the tool to send the new data back to
Analyzer.
For instance, you could use the Custom Model tool to calculate a
pump driver power based on a flow rate and pump head or to
calculate project component costs using your own custom method
in Excel.
The specifications rules remain stored in Excel, so that you can
change the specifications in Analyzer and then revert back to the
Excel specifications by re-running the tool (if the values are fixed).
Once the tool has been used with a project component, Analyzer
associates the customized project component with the last Excel
spreadsheet used. Running the tool at the project level updates all
components for which the tool has already been run (see page 5-
30).
The tool provides template files for mixers and pumps, as well as a
general template to use as the starting point for creating files for
other components. However, for components other than pumps and
mixers, you will need to first copy the general template file (or use
Save As) and enter the slot names for the component specifications
you wish to input, as explained on page 5-29.
To use the Custom Model tool on a project component:

1. Before using this tool, you must mark the Activate Custom
Model option on the Process tab view in Preferences. See page
2-31 for information on accessing Preferences.
2. In Project Explorer, Project view, right-click on the pump or
mixer component that you wish to customize and click
Custom Model on the pop-up menu.

The User Custom Model dialog box appears. It displays the
name of the project, scenario, and project component selected
for the operation.

The dialog box also displays available Microsoft Excel (.xls)
template files.
3. Select the Excel template file that you have created for the
selected project component
4. Click Run.
Excel displays the workbook, with tabs for Input, Custom
Rules, and Output.
• The Input worksheet displays the original Icarus system
values from Analyzer. Item information is provided at the
top of the worksheet. The item information is from the
Component Specifications form. Stream information, if
available, is shown toward the bottom. Below the stream
information is information on the installation bulks for
Material and Man-hour Adjustments and Pipe Item Detail.
• The Custom Rules worksheet is provided for storing any

data that you may wish to use in the output formulas.
Input specs have been placed on the Custom Rules along
with sample alterations for the following:
− Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream.
− Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour
adjustments, and pipe item details.

• The Output worksheet displays the same component
specification slots as on the Input worksheet, but on the
Output worksheet the values can be customized. The values
are in the same column-row position as on the Input
worksheet, so that you can easily reference the Input data
when entering formulas. The entries on the Output
worksheet are sent to Analyzer when you click Apply or
OK on the Custom Model tool.
The following include customized values based on the
sample alterations on the Custom Rules worksheet:
− Mixer with three inlet streams and one exit stream.
− Pump with connection streams, material and man-hour
adjustments, and pipe item details.
These customizations have been entered solely for example
purposes.

5. Enter new specifications on the Output worksheet. For
example, if you want to double the Input flow rate value
provided on Row 10, Column C, enter the following formula:
=Input!C10*2
6. Go to the Custom Model tool and click OK to send the output
to Analyzer and close the tool.
When you display the specifications form of the component, you
will see the values from the Output worksheet.
Creating a Template To create a template for a component, open

GeneralModelTemplate.xls and save it as another file. The folder
in which you store Custom Model files is specified on the
Locations tab view in Preferences (APICustomModelDir). The
default is:
AspenTech\Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003 SP\Program\API Custom Models
Starting on Row 6, Column B for item information, enter the slot
names for the specifications that you wish to have sent from
Analyzer when the file is run for a component.

Slot names for every equipment and plant bulk item are provided
in Icarus Technology Object Definitions (API.pdf). For example,
to have the tool send Shell Design Temperature to Excel when the
file is run for Fixed Tube Heat Exchangers, you would need to
enter “CPDesignTemperatureShell”.
For connection stream information, enter slot names starting on
Row 43, Column B.
For material and man-hour adjustments, enter slot names starting
on row 70, column B.
For the pipe-item details, enter slot names starting on row 101,
column B.
Running Custom The batch update process for the Custom Model can be done one
Model Tool at of two ways. The first method is for a batch update of custom
Project-Level for model operations performed on project components that are
Batch Update already linked to a custom model template. After using the Custom
Model tool for any number of components, you may continue to
experiment with different specifications and easily revert back to
the custom specifications by running the tool at the project level.
Simply right-click on Main Project or Project Area in Project
Explorer’s Project view and click Custom Model.
If more than one project component has been selected for the
custom model (e.g. multi-selection, area selection, project
selection), a message box will appear to the user to specify the
mode of operation.

If you click Yes, you will be able to specify a custom model
template and all of the selected project components will be
processed with the one chosen template. If you click No, only
project components with a link to a custom model template will be
processed with their associated template.
Note: the output will be

based on the values in the
Output workbook in Excel.
If the Output workbook
contains formulas based
on input, changes in input
since originally running
the Custom Model will
affect the output when the
Custom Model is re-run.
This re-runs all custom models stored in the Custom Model tool.

Sizing Project Components
Overview
Sizing for Project Operating conditions for the project components mapped from
Components Mapped simulator models are obtained from the information loaded into
from Simulator Items Analyzer from the simulator report. Any Design Data in the
simulator report is also loaded and used during sizing. The
information consists of a unit operation model and the streams
connected to it.
You can size a mapped project component in either of two ways:
y Right-click on the component in Project Explorer and click
Size Item on the pop-up menu.
y Click the Size button on the Component Specifications
form:
Interactive Sizing For the following components, Analyzer provides the Interactive
Expert Sizing form that allows you to adjust sizing specifications. The
Interactive Sizing form appears when you size the component.
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Sizing Project Components • 6-1

Heat Exchangers Pumps
DHE FIXED-T-S DCP ANSI
DHE FLOAT-HEAD DCP ANSI-PLAST
DHE U-TUBE DCP API 610
DRB KETTLE DCP API 610-IL
DRB THERMOSIPH DCP CANNED
DRB U-TUBE DCP TURBINE
DCP PULP STOCK
Compressors DCP NAG DRIVE
DCP CENTRIF
DCP GEN-SERV Vessels
DGC CENTRIF DHT HORIZ-DRUM
DGC CENTRIF-IG DVT CYLINDER
DGC RECIP-MOTR DVT SPHERE
EGC RECIP-GAS DVT SPHEROID
DVT STORAGE
If interactive sizing is not available, Analyzer sizes the item

automatically using the simulator data.
Sizing for Project Project components not mapped from simulator items can be sized
Components Not if they are connected to streams. See “Creating Streams to Connect
Mapped from to Components” on page 6-4 for instructions on creating inlet and
Simulator Items outlet streams. If the component is one of those for which
interactive sizing is available (see list on page 6-1), the Interactive
Sizing form is displayed during sizing. See “Using the Interactive
Sizing Form” on page 6-8 for instructions on connecting a
component to streams during sizing.
If sizing is not available for a component, the Size option appears
as inactive.
Resizing Project If the process conditions associated with a component change, then
Components use the Re-Size command on the project component pop-up menu
to update all equipment sizing information.
The Re-Size command will clear all the previous sizing results and
then size the equipment based on the current process conditions
(those entered by the user and those available from the currently
loaded simulator file). Therefore, if the component being re-sized
is one of those for which interactive sizing is available, the
Interactive Sizing form that appears is blank.
If you would like to keep some of your component specifications
(i.e., not have them replaced by those calculated by the Sizing
Expert), do not use the Re-size command. Instead, use the Size
command or the Size button to access the Interactive Sizing form
with current specifications retained, rather than cleared. Then,
clear all fields except those you want to retain and click OK to
execute sizing. Analyzer will re-calculate only the blank fields.
6-2 • Sizing Project Components Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Creating Streams to Connect to
Equipment Items
For most components, the interactive Sizing Expert requires
selection of an inlet stream (i.e., a stream carrying fluid to the
equipment item) and an outlet stream (i.e., a stream carrying fluid
from the equipment item).
The set of instructions below show how to create streams to
connect to an item. In the example, inlet and outlet streams are
created to carry 49 DEF F water to a heat exchanger and an outlet
stream is created to carry 200 DEG F water from the heat
exchanger. In the example used in the set of instructions following
these, a heat exchanger is sized to heat water from 40 DEG F to
200 DEG F, using the streams created in the first examples.
To create an inlet stream and an outlet stream:
1. In Project Explorer’s Project Basis view, right-click on Streams
and then click Edit.
2. At the Develop Streams dialog box, click on the Create tab.

3. Select User in the Streams tree structure. Leave the Basis as
Absolute, since you are creating a completely new process
stream.

Click Create.
4. At the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
“Process-IN”.
Click OK.
5. At the Develop Stream specifications form, specify a primary
fluid component, temperature, pressure, and liquid mass flow.
Example:
y In the Primary Fluid Component field, click and select
Water.
y In the Temperature (DEG F) field, enter 40.
y In the Pressure (PSIA) field, enter 90.
y In the Liquid Mass Flow (LB/H) field, enter 50,000.
6. Click Apply. Analyzer fills in the rest of the fields in the
Liquid Information section.

7. Click OK to return to the Develop Streams dialog box, where
you now need to create an outlet stream.
8. Click User in the tree structure. Notice that the inlet stream that
you just created is now displayed under User. Select that
stream and, in the Basis section, mark Relative; the new outlet
stream will be based upon the inlet stream.

9. At the Create Stream dialog box, enter a stream name, such as
“Process-OUT”.
Click OK.
The Develop Stream specifications form appears.
Specifications that appear gray are the same as those of the
base stream. Any modifications made will appear black.
10. Enter an outlet stream temperature that corresponds to
temperature to which the heat exchanger will be heating the
fluid. In the example below, the temperature has been entered
as 200 DEG F and the pressure has been entered as 80 PSIA.
The other specifications are the same as those of the base
stream.
Click OK to apply the changes and return to the Develop

Streams dialog box, which you can now close.

Using the Interactive Sizing Form
With the necessary streams created, you are ready to perform
sizing.
To size an equipment item:
1. Add an equipment item for which interactive sizing is available
(see list on page 6-1) and display the Component
Specifications form. If you are following the example, add a
floating head shell and tube exchanger. (See page 5-4 for
instructions on adding components.)
It is not necessary to enter any values on the specifications

form before starting the Sizing Expert. However, all applicable
sizing parameters that are entered in the component
specifications form will be carried over automatically to the
sizing expert and used in calculations.

2. Click the Size button.
The Interactive Sizing form appears.
In order for the Sizing

Expert to run, you must
select process fluid
streams (one at Inlet
and one at Outlet
conditions) for at least
one side (hot or cold
side).
Any other data you

provide (e.g., Duty,
Overall heat transfer
coefficient, LMTD, etc.)
helps the Expert do its
job better, but is not
necessary.
3. Click on the Hot Inlet Stream field and then click to access a
drop-down list that includes all utility resources and
user-created streams.
Note: “fluid” refers to If you are heating a fluid, as in the example, select a utility
liquid or gas.
resource to use as the heating source. The tables on the
following page provide definitions of the utility resources.
To heat a fluid from 40
DEG F to 200 DEG F, as
in the example, the
utility “Steam
@100PSI-Analyzer
UTILITY” is
appropriate.
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to
be cooled.

Utility Resources
If you specify a utility resource as a stream, the Sizing Expert will estimate the actual utility rate
required for the heat transfer and use this rate to create utility streams as though they were
user-specified. The utility stream names are prefixed by “ICU” and are present under the Utility category
in the Develop Streams dialog box. These utility streams differ from utility resources in that they have
an actual flow rate whereas a resource is a “reservoir” that can provide utility streams at any required
flow rate.
Default Utility Resources Available for I-P Projects

Operating
Inlet temperature Exit temperature Pressure
(DEG F) (DEG F) (PSIA) Utility type
Steam @100PSI 327 327 100 Heat source
Low Temp Heating Oil 600 550 25 Heat source
High Temp Heating Oil 725 675 25 Heat source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -21 -21 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -150 -150 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -130 -130 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propylene -50 -50 15.5 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 15.5 Heat sink
Cooling Water 95 75 50 Heat sink
Default Utility Resources Available for METRIC Projects

Operating
Inlet temperature Exit temperature Pressure
(DEG C) (DEG C) (KPA) Utility type
Steam @2760KPA 229.2 229.2 2760 Heat source
Steam @1135KPA 184 184 1135 Heat source
Steam @690KPA 164 164 690 Heat source
Low Temp Heating Oil 315 287 2523 Heat source
High Temp Heating Oil 385 357 2523 Heat source
Refrigerant – Freon 12 -29.8 -29.8 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethylene -101 -101 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Ethane -90 -90 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propylene -45 -45 105 Heat sink
Refrigerant – Propane -40 -40 105 Heat sink
Cooling Water 35 24 105 Heat sink

4. Click on the Hot Outlet Stream field and then click to access
the drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
If you are heating a fluid, select again the utility to use as the
heating source.
If you are cooling a fluid, select the stream carrying the cooled
fluid from the exchanger.
5. Click on the Cold Inlet Stream field and then click to access
the drop-down list of utility resources and user-created streams.
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the fluid to
be heated.
If you are following the
example, select the
Process-IN stream that
you created in the
previous set of
instructions (see
“Creating Streams,”
pages 6-4 through 6-7).
If you are cooling a fluid, select a heat sink utility to use as a
cooling medium.
6. Click on the Cold Outlet Stream field and then click to
access the drop-down list of utility resources and user-created
streams.
If you are heating a fluid, select the stream carrying the heated
fluid from the exchanger.
If you are following the
example, select the
Process-OUT stream that
you created in the
previous set of
instructions (see
“Creating Streams,”
pages 6-4 through 6-7).
If you are cooling a fluid, select again the heat sink utility to
use as the cooling medium.
7. Click Apply. Analyzer fills in the other fields on the Interactive
Sizing form.

Note: results are
not transferred to
the Component
Specifications
form until you click
OK and the sizing
is successfully
completed (i.e.,
without generating
error messages).
8. Click OK.
Analyzer provides a message informing you of the overdesign
factor.
Click OK to accept this message.

The values obtained from Interactive Sizing now appear in the
Component Specifications form.

9. Click OK to save.
You can now run an item evaluation and see the values generated
by the Sizing Expert in the item report.

Sizing Requirements, Calculations,
and Defaults
Certain types of components have minimum input requirements
for sizing. Those requirements are provided in the following
sections, along with explanations of how the sizing is calculated
for different component types.
Air Coolers
Minimum Input Requirements
• Inlet Stream
• Exit Stream
Sizing Procedure
The air cooler thermal and detailed mechanical design equations
are given below:
For thermal design:
Q = U*A*MTD
MTD = f*LMTD
For mechanical design:

A = pi*D_tube*N_tubeRows*N_tubesPerRow* Tube_length
where:
Q = Heat Duty
U = Heat transfer coefficient
A = Bare tube surface area
MTD = Mean Temperature difference
LMTD = Log mean temperature difference, based on purely
countercurrent flow
f = Temperature correction factor
N_bays = Number of bays
N_tube_rows = Number of tube rows
N_tubesPerRow = Number of tubes per row (takes into account the
presence of a fan shaft)
Tube_length = Length of tubes
The process fluid properties (temperature, pressure, and specific

heat capacity) are assumed to be constant throughout the air cooler
and are estimated as the mean of the inlet and outlet stream
properties. The required heat duty is calculated from the inlet and
outlet process stream conditions if it is not specified.

The process fluid stream temperatures, inlet and exit, are used
along with the temperatures specified for the air stream (design
criteria specs) to calculate the LMTD. The temperature correction
factor is then used to calculate the MTD.
If the process fluid temperatures and air temperatures are
appropriate, meaning that there is no temperature crossover and the
temperature approach at the ends is reasonable, then the surface
area required for the given heat duty is estimated using the thermal
design equation. The airflow rate needed to realize this heat duty is
then calculated using the specified ambient and outlet air
conditions.
An iterative algorithm has been developed to size the air cooler.
The sizing routine calculates the heat duty that can be realized
using the specified tube bundle geometry (bay width, number of
tube rows, and tube length). It assumes defaults for parameters that
are not specified by the user. If the computed heat duty is larger
than the heat duty actually required, the iterative procedure
terminates. The tube bundle arrangement used represents the
specification of the air cooler selected. If the calculated heat duty
does not meet the required heat duty then a bigger air cooler is
chosen (i.e. parameter values are increased) and the above
procedure is repeated. The iterative procedure terminates either
when a tube bundle geometry that can meet the heat duty
requirements is found, or when even the largest available air cooler
does not meet the process requirements.
Air-side heat transfer coefficients are calculated using the relations
that take into account the tube bundle geometry.
The work of Young, Briggs, and Robinson, as summarized in [6] is
being used to evaluate the heat transfer and pressure drop of air
across the tube bundle. The pressure drop thus calculated is used in
estimating the fan power required. The number of fans required is
calculated based on the aspect ratio (tube length/bay width). For
any aspect ratio of up to 1.5, only one fan is selected.
Defaults
Tube pitch = 2.5 INCHES
Tube thickness = 0.125 INCHES
Bay width = 4 ft to 20 ft
Tube rows = 3 to 6
Maximum Tube length = 3*Bay width
Inlet air temperature (from design criteria specs)
Outlet air temperature (from design criteria specs)

Agitated Tanks
• Inlet stream
• Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The capacity of the agitated tank is determined by the following
equation:
C = Q * (T_r / 60.0)
where:
C = Capacity , CF
Q = Liquid volumetric flowrate, CFH
T_r = Liquid residence time, MINUTES
The diameter of the agitated tank is determined using L/D and

geometry:
C = (π/4) * D^2 * L
where:
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
L = Fluid height, FEET
Vessel height is obtained by the following:

H = L + h_d
where:
H = Vessel height, FEET
h_d = Vapor disengagement height, FEET
Design parameters are based on the current design criteria file if

available:
Length/Diameter Ratio: Default = 3
Vapor disengagement height: Default = 1 FEET
Agitator type: Default = ANCHOR
Driver type: Default = STD
Impeller type: Default = T6FB
Operating pressure is obtained from the simulator report. If the

report does not have a value, then the pressure of the inlet stream
having the maximum value is chosen as the operating pressure.

The operating pressure is used to obtain the L/D ratio (if user
specification is absent).
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D = 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D = 5
where:
P = Pressure, PSIA
L = Fluid height, FEET
D = Diameter of vessel, FEET
The project component must have at least one process stream

connected to the inlet and exit. Also, since the sizing procedure is
based on the liquid holding period, at least one of the streams
should have liquid phase.
The design pressure and temperature are based on the operating
pressure and temperature as modified by your entries on the
Design Criteria specifications form.
Compressors
• Inlet and Exit stream information
• Driver Power (for Reciprocating Compressors)
Sizing Procedure
The capacity requirement for the compressor is calculated from the
inlet stream information. The inlet stream flow rate and density are
used to estimate the total volumetric flow rate through the
compressor.
The compression ratio (exit to inlet pressure) is obtained from the
operating pressures of the inlet and exit stream.
The compressibility factor (inlet and exit) is based on user-
specified information, if available, or estimated by the sizing
expert based on the Primary Fluid Component.
The Icarus Evaluation Engine estimates the driver power if it is not
specified either by the user or in the simulator report. The engine
currently uses a mechanical efficiency of 100% to arrive at the
brake horsepower. The brake horsepower thus calculated, is
compared against a table of available standard motor sizes. If the
calculated brake horsepower is not found in the table, then the
motor with the next higher horsepower is selected.

When the driver horsepower is available, provided either by the
user or a simulator report, the cost engine uses this value. However
for pricing the compressor, the table of available standard motor
sizes is referred. If the specified horsepower is not found in the
table then the price of the motor with the next higher horsepower is
used.
In the case of simulator inputs, different simulators provide
information that may be slightly different. For instance, in the case
of Aspen the compressor calculations take into account any
mechanical efficiency specified during the simulation run. So the
“brake horsepower” reported in the case of Aspen, already takes
into account the mechanical efficiency. However other simulators:
SimSci (“Actual Work”); HYSIM and HYSYS (“Energy
Required”), Chemshare (“Real Work”), ChemCAD ( “Actual
Power”); do not account for mechanical efficiency. The user has to
keep this in mind and be aware of what has been accounted for in
the simulation side when using simulator information as inputs.
Defaults
Minimum inlet pressure for air compressors is 14.696 PSIA
Crushers
Minimum Input Requirement
• Inlet and Exit stream information
• Final product size.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing expert estimates the solid flow rate from the inlet
stream information. The crushing ratio (feed to product size) is set
at 4.
Work index is the total energy in KWH/TONS, needed to reduce
the feed to a size so that 80% of the product will pass through a
100-micron screen. The sizing expert assumes a default value of
13.81 for the material work index.
The total driver power required for the crusher is calculated using
material work index and the value of the product size.

The following equation is used to estimate the driver power:
P = 1.46 (T_m) (W_i) ( 1/(d_p ^ 0.5) - 1/(d_r ^0.5))
where:
P = Driver power, HP
T_m = Crusher capacity, TPM
W_i = Material work index
d_p = Product size, FEET
d_r = Feed size, FEET
Defaults
Material Work Index: 13.8 KWh/ton
Size Reduction Ratio: 4
Crystallizers
Minimum Information Required
Inlet and Exit Stream information
Additional Information
Final Product size
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the crystallizer capacity based on
the inlet and exit stream information.
Default value of 0.83 MM is used as final product size if the user
specified value is not available from the simulator report.
In addition, the following defaults values are used for the design
parameters:
Growth rate = 0.36 MM/H
The following relation determines the residence time in hours for a

batch crystallizer:
Residence time = d_p / (3 * R_g)
where:
d_p = Product size, MM
R_g = Growth rate, MM/H
Based on the minimum and maximum values for the required

fields in the component specification form, the number of
additional crystallizers are estimated.

Dryers
Inlet and Exit stream information
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the dryer capacity based on the total
evaporation rate for the drying process. For tray and drum dryers,
an average depth of 2.25 FEET is used to determine the total dryer
requirements. For vacuum and jacketed rotary vacuum dryers, the
dryer capacity is determined by obtaining value of the drying time
and the average percentage utilization of the dryer capacity.
The system defaults are as follows:
Drying time = 0.75 HOUR
Average percentage utilization = 25
The number of additional items required for the given drying

operation is determined from the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE),
which analyzes minimum and maximum values for the required
fields in the specification form.
Dust Collectors
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program estimates the vapor volume flowing through
the dust collector using the exit stream information available from
the simulator report.
In case of cyclones, the sizing program assumes a default linear
velocity of 150 FPS. The height to width ratio is fixed at 2.5.

Using the above defaults, the volumetric rate through the separator
is obtained using Zenz correlation represented by the following
equation:
Q = 2.5 (D ^ 2) V / 16
where:
Q = Vapor volumetric rate, CFS
D = Cyclone separator diameter, FEET
V = Linear velocity, FPS
In case of baghouse dust collectors, the sizing program uses Nylon

as the default filter cloth material to determine the air to media
ratio which then determines the diameter of the separator.
Air to media ratio is the flow rate of air (at 70 DEG F) in CFM.
The default ratio results in a pressure drop of 0.5 INCHES of water
when passed through 1 SF of clean fabric.
The sizing program uses a default air to media ratio of 10 CFM.
The minimum and maximum values of the required field(s) shown
in the component specification form are used to determine the
number of identical equipment items.
Filters
• Inlet stream
• Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total amount of filtration product
rate based on the exit stream information. Based on the type of
filter selected, the average dimension of the filter equipment is
selected and the filter size is then optimized for the given operation
such that the dimensions selected for the equipment are within the
minimum and maximum values as specified by the knowledge-
based engine.
In case of batch filtration, a default batch time of 0.25 HOUR is
used. In case of plate and frame filters, default value of cake
thickness of 0.3 FEET is used.
In the case of continuous operation, the cycle time default is 0.08
HOUR. Based on the actual capacity requirement and the
maximum and minimum sizes provided by the knowledge-based
engine, the number of identical items is determined.

Heat Exchangers The heat exchanger sizing program estimates the heat transfer area
required for the given operating conditions. The model also
performs detail estimation of the number of tubes, tube length, and
other internal components of the heat exchanger based on either
user-defined specifications (from the process simulator report or
the design criteria specifications) or system defaults.

Inlet and Exit Process Stream Information
Sizing Procedure
The process stream(s) are classified into various categories. The
Primary Fluid Component class provided by the user for the
process fluid(s) flowing through the heat exchanger is used to
estimate the following design parameters:
• Latent heats (vaporization and condensation)
• Fouling resistance
• Specific heat capacity of the fluid
• Liquid film resistance
• Overall heat transfer coefficient
Duty requirement for the heat exchanger is either directly obtained
from the simulator report or estimated based on the inlet and exit
process stream information for the process model. In case the fluid
undergoes phase change, a boiling point temperature, Tb, is
estimated that would lie between the inlet and exit stream
temperature. The estimated Tb is then used in the calculation of the
sensible and latent heats based on the Primary Fluid Component.
The sensible heat of any solids present in the stream is also
accounted for in the duty calculation.
In estimating the design pressure on shell and tube heat
exchangers, the 2/3rd Rule is applied if it has been selected on the
Design Criteria specifications form (see page 3-36).
If the simulator model only specifies process fluid conditions, the
heat exchanger sizing program determines the appropriate utility
from the list of utilities provided by the user. This is performed
using the Utility Specifications accessed from Project Basis view
(see page 3-49). If multiple utilities are available for heat transfer,
then the sizing expert uses the utility fluid with a temperature
approach closest to the process fluid. This minimizes the heat

transfer losses. However, a minimum of 1 degree Fahrenheit
difference in the final temperature of the process fluid and the
utility fluid must exist for the utility fluid to be selected for the
process. If an appropriate utility fluid is not available for the heat
transfer process, the heat exchanger sizing program will terminate
without estimating the heat exchanger size requirements.
The mean temperature difference (MTD) is estimated based on the
fluid temperature for both the shell and the tube side. It also
depends on the flow configuration for shell and tube heat
exchangers, which is specified by the number of shell and tube
passes. For reasons of compactness of equipment, the paths of both
fluids may require several reversals in direction. Mean temperature
differences in such cases can be obtained by applying a factor
(called the F-factor) to the terminal temperature difference. The
logarithmic mean temperature difference (based on purely counter
current flow) is multiplied by the F-factor to obtain the mean
temperature difference.
If the temperatures are not properly entered then appropriate
warning messages are displayed. In such cases it recommended
that the user check the inlet and outlet temperatures of the shell and
tube side streams and verify that they are realistic.
The overall heat transfer coefficient is either directly obtained from
the simulator report or evaluated based on the shell and tube fluid
properties (film resistance, fouling tendency present for the various
processes in the system database).
The heat exchanger sizing program determines the position of the
fluids in the shell and tube heat exchanger. The position depends
on both the process and utility fluid class.
If duty is provided by the simulator report, then the user can
override the value only through interactive sizing.
The final heat transfer area is obtained by multiplying the heat
transfer area, calculated based on the duty required, with the Heat
Exchanger Minimum Overdesign Factor. If the user does not
specify an overdesign factor then the default value is used from the
design criteria file.
If the duty generates a surface area less than minimum required for
practical design, the item report will give the appropriate warning
message.
FLOAT HEAD or U-TUBE heat exchangers have an even number
of tube passes. If the user enters an odd number for the number of
tube passes for any of these heat exchanger types, then warning
messages are generated.

The shell and tube design pressure and temperature are based on
the maximum operating conditions of the fluid flowing through the
shell and tube respectively. The design criteria menu option allows
the user to change them according to individual project
requirement.
Heat Exchanger Internals

1. The final heat transfer area is determined by the actual
number of tubes chosen for the equipment. The least
surface area of the combination of numbered tubes and
shells is changed for final design.
2. A default tube length of 20 FEET is used for calculating the
number of tubes.
3. System default values for tube diameter, tube thickness,
tube pitch and baffle distances are used if user
specifications are not available.
General Information
1. The utility requirement is estimated only when the system
determines the utility fluid. If both shell and tube side fluid
stream information is specified in the simulator report, then
the system assumes that both of the fluid streams are
process streams and that no utility fluid is expended.
2. Presently, the model defaults are used for determining the
material of construction.
3. For shell and tube heat exchangers, if the heat transfer
surface area calculated by the sizing program is greater
than the largest heat exchanger designed by the design and
cost engine, then the heat exchanger is divided into
multiple shells with identical configurations. The capital
cost estimation is then calculated based on the complete
heat exchanger.
Note: When mapping a rigorous heat exchanger model (HXRIG)

from SimSci, the number of shells in parallel is used to
determine the number of shells in Analyzer. For Analyzer,
the maximum number of shells in series is 1.

Double Pipe Heat Exchanger
The sizing expert estimates the total surface area required for the
given duty. During the capital cost estimation, detailed design for
the heat exchanger is developed based on the values for tube length
and number of tubes per shell obtained from the simulator report or
from the user.
Fin Tube Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the
given duty. During the Capital Cost estimation, detailed design for
the heat exchanger is developed based on the tube length and
number of fins per tube obtained either from the simulator report
or from the user.
Spiral Plate Heat Exchanger

The sizing program estimates the total surface area required for the
given duty. During the Capital Cost estimation, detailed design for
the heat exchanger is developed based on the tube length and
number of fins per tube obtained either from the simulator report
or from the user.
Pumps
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program calculates the total capacity requirements for
the selected pump based on the total flow rate of the inlet fluid
stream(s) obtained from the simulator.
Flow Rate/Capacity Pump flow rate is obtained from the simulator information. If the
information does not exist, then pump flow rate is calculated based
on the stream flow rates. The stream is assumed to be completely
liquid phase and no check is made for presence of vapor phase.
The pump flow rate obtained from the simulator information is
multiplied by the pump overdesign factor, also referred as the
capacity over-design factor, present in the design criteria
specification file.

Pump % Efficiency Pump efficiency is directly obtained from the simulator. If the
value is not present in the simulator report, then the default value
of 70% is used.
Pump Overdesign The user can modify the pump overdesign factor either by using
the Design Criteria specifications form or the size interactive
screen. If the over design factor is changed using the design criteria
form, then this factor is the one that would be applied to all the
pumps in that project. Modifying the over-design factor for a pump
using the size interactive interface will alter the factor only for that
particular pump. This provides the user a way to change the factor
either for all the pumps or specify them individually for each
pump.
Driver Power If the user specifies a driver power in the component specification
form, then this value is used. If the user does not provide the value,
then the cost engine calculates it. The Icarus Evaluation Engine
calculates the hydraulic horsepower based on the capacity,
viscosity and head, and then uses the pump efficiency to estimate
the brake horsepower. The brake horsepower is compared against a
set of standard available motor sizes to estimate the pump driver
power.
If multiple inlet streams are present, the minimum value of
pressure is used for determining the operating pressure of the
equipment.
Defaults (if they are not obtained from the simulators):

Operating pressure: 14.696 PSIA
Operating temperature: 77 DEG F
Calculating Pump Head

The total head developed by the pump is composed of the
difference between the static, pressure, and velocity heads.
Additionally, friction at the suction and discharge sides would also
contribute to some head loss. The pump head is calculated using
the following relation:
Head, FEET = h_d – h_s
where:
H = total pump head, FEET
h_d = discharge head, FEET
h_s = suction head, FEET

Assumptions:
1. No friction losses at the entrance and exit.
2. No static head on suction and discharge sides.
3. Velocity heads are not included in estimating the suction
and discharge heads.
Head is estimated in FEET by the following relations:

Head, FEET = (Pressure, PSIA) * (2.31)/(Fluid specific gravity)
The specific gravity of the fluid is based on inlet streams

conditions. The discharge pressure for the pump is based on the
maximum value for the exit stream(s). The suction pressure is
based on the minimum value for the inlet streams(s).
Screens
• Inlet stream information
• Screen opening size (or average product size)
Sizing Procedure
The sizing program determines the capacity of the screen based on
the inlet flow rate estimated from the stream information.
The screen opening size is used to determine the final product size.
The feed material for the vibrating screen is obtained from design
criteria file. The following choices are available:
• Sand and Gravel
• Limestone/Crushed Stones
• Coal
• Cinders
• Coke
• Wood
The material type affects the screen unit capacity which is defined
as the amount of solid (in tons per hour) flowing through one
square foot of screen cloth based on material, having 6 to 8%
moisture, screen cloth having 50% or more open area; 85% screen
efficiency.
Based on the material selected and the screen opening size, the
screen unit capacity is chosen. Further, the sizing program assumes

that five layers of particles are present on the screen. The surface
area required for the vibrating screen is obtained.
Based on the maximum and minimum values specified by the
knowledge base for the screen capacity, additional items required
by the operations are determined.
Towers
• Stage temperature, pressure, flowrates
• Number of stages
• Inlet stream
• Exit stream
Sizing Procedure
The distillation column sizing module can be used to size the
following Icarus process equipment:
• DDT TRAYED
• DDT PACKED
• TW TRAYED
• TW PACKED
• DC HE TW
The following simulator models can be used to generate the
necessary process information required for successfully executing
the application:
Simulator Models used

Aspen Plus ABSBR, DISTWU, DISTL, RADFRAC
HYSIM/HYSYS COLUMN
PRO/II COLUMN, IO, SURE, CHEMDIST,

SHORTCUT
Loading Column Model from Simulator

In Analyzer, the rigorous column unit operations loaded from the
simulator report (i.e., COLUMN UNITS model in PRO/II) are

developed in great detail, including all pieces attached to the main
column unit.
Typically, the simulator model develops stage information for the
main tower and duties for an associated condenser and reboiler.
These duties are used along with the specified fluid conditions
available from the stage information tables to generate all of the
input specifications required for the equipment.
Sidestrippers and pumparounds are separated from the main tower
if necessary during the loading process after all the relevant
information is collected for the models. Once the report is loaded,
these units are treated as separate simulator models that can be
mapped and sized independently of the main tower design.
Sidestrippers
Sidestrippers attached to tower models are separated from the main
tower model during the loading process. Sidestrippers load
information from the same tables in the report from which the
main tower information is discerned.
For example, the typical information loaded for sidestrippers in
PRO/II are:
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
COLUMN SUMMARY
—————— NET FLOW RATES —————— HEATER
TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG C KPA KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— ————— ———————— —————— —————— ————— ——————— ———————
1/ 10 200.3 600.50 22. 20.0L 8.5V

2/ 11 202.2 601.53 7.8 5.0V 20.1L
SIDESTRIPPER ABC
TYPE STREAM PHASEFROM TO LIQUID FLOW RATES HEAT RATES

TRAY TRAY FRAC KG-MOL/HR M*KJ/HR
————— —————— —————— ————— ——— —————— —————————— ———————————
FEED ABCDRW LIQUID 10 1.0000 23.00 1.3216
FEED ABCSTM VAPOR 11 .0000 5.55 .2785
PROD ABCSRVP VAPOR 10 8.46 .5325
PROD ABCPRD LIQUID 11 20.09 1.0678
Information is obtained for the sidestrippers in the same manner as

for the main tower unit (Refer to information for obtaining process
data for main tower unit).
Pumparounds
The inlet and outlet fluid conditions for pumparounds are obtained
from the stage information to which the unit is connected.
Additionally, the duty associated with each pumparound is loaded

into the unit. This unit is then separated during the loading process
and is treated as an independent simulator model that can be
mapped and sized on its own.
For example, the information required by pumparound units in
PRO/II are obtained from the following part of the column report:
COLUMN SUMMARY
————— NET FLOW RATES ————— HEATER

TRAY TEMP PRESSURE LIQUID VAPOR FEED PRODUCT DUTIES
DEG F PSIG LB-MOL/HR MM BTU/HR
———— ————— ———————— —————— ————— ————— ——————— —————————
.
.
.
40R 355.9 33.00 5618.9 4301.4L 94.6551
PUMPAROUNDS
TRAY TEMP, DEG F LIQUID FRACTION ——————————— RATES ———————————

FROM TO FROM TO FROM TO LB-MOL/HR M LB/HR STD BBL/HR
—— —— —————— ————— —————— ————— ————————— ———————— ——————————
40 40 355.9 416.1 1.0000 .4108 7273.09 995.238 3569.48
Mapping the Tower Model

Typically, column models in simulators do not include the
ancillary equipment attached to the main tower. For example, a
tower unit may really consist of the following equipment:
• Main tower
• Overhead condenser
• Condenser accumulator
• Overhead split
• Reflux pump
• Overhead pump
• Overhead product sub-cooler
• Reboiler
• Bottoms split
• Bottoms product pump
• Bottoms product heat exchanger
Both overhead and bottoms split are process stream splitters and
therefore do not represent any project component. In Analyzer,
during mapping and sizing process, they are typically mapped as a
quoted cost item with zero cost.

In addition, the equipment design could involve splitting the units
into more than one actual piece for reasons of economy. For
example, in many applications, condensers are split into a
precooler (which is typically an air cooler but also can be any other
type of heat exchanger) and a trim cooler (typically a shell and
tube heat exchanger).
Tower models (such as RADFRAC model in Aspen Plus,
COLUMN UNIT in PRO/II and COLUMN in HYSIM/HYSIS)
can be mapped into any of the following ten Analyzer
configurations:
• Standard - Single or Standard - Total

- Tower
- Condenser
- Condenser accumulator
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler.
• Full - Single
- Tower
- Condenser
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Overhead pump
- Overhead product heat exchanger
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
- Bottoms product pump
- Bottoms product heat exchanger
• Standard - Split or Standard – Split Total

- Tower
- Precooler
- Trimcooler
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
• Full - Split
- Tower
- Precooler

- Trimcooler
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Overhead pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
• Standard - Total w/Circ.

- Tower
- Condenser
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
- Circulation pump
• Full - Single w/Circ.

- Tower
- Condenser
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Overhead pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
- Circulation pump
• Standard – Split Total w/Circ.

- Tower
- Precooler
- Trimcooler
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
- Circulation pump

• Full - Split w/Circ.
- Tower
- Precooler
- Trimcooler
- Overhead split
- Reflux pump
- Overhead pump
- Bottoms split
- Reboiler
- Circulation pump
(Note: refer to Tower Configurations in Chapter 4 for detailed flow

diagrams)
These configurations should be regarded as the “maximum” model
with all potentialities satisfied. The components actually developed
depend upon the process conditions. For example, if the main
tower model does not have a condenser and a reboiler, then only
the tower model is mapped.
If the overhead product is cooler than the temperature of the fluid
from the condenser outlet, then an overhead exchanger is mapped.
A bottoms product exchanger is mapped only when the bottoms
product stream has a different temperature from the temperature of
the bottom stage of the tower.
In the case of split models, where the condenser duty is split into
precooler and trimcooler duties, the ratio of the duty split is
obtained from the Design Criteria Specifications. Also, the
overhead vapor stream flowing to the precooler is assumed to be at
dew point if the condensation temperature is not provided.

Loading Tower Input Information
1. From the tower results in the report, the tables consisting of
stage temperatures, stage pressures, stage molar vapor flow
rates and stage molar liquid flow rates are loaded in the
mapping process.
For example, in the case of Aspen Plus, the following tables in
the RADFRAC block are loaded by Analyzer in the mapping
process:
Table 1: Stage temperature and Stage Pressures are loaded
(Column 1 and 2)
ENTHALPY
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 45802+08
Table 2: Stage molar liquid flowrates and Stage molar vapor

flowrates are loaded. (Column 1 and 2)
STAGE FLOW RATE FEED RATE PRODUCT RATE
LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR LBMOL/HR
LIQUID VAPOR LIQUID VAPOR MIXED LIQUID VAPOR
1 1239. 430.0 .57657-01 430.0000
2 0.2571E+05 1669. .24001+05
3 0.2586E+05 2140.
4 0.2595E+05 2286.
5 0.2602E+05 2380.
6 0.2606E+05 2444.
7 0.2610E+05 2493.
8 0.2614E+05 2532.
9 0.2617E+05 2568.
10 0.2357E+05 2604. .23571+05
2. Inlet and exit streams (and their stage numbers) are loaded in
the mapping step.

For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for Aspen
Plus, the following portion of the report is loaded in Analyzer:
INLETS - 7 STAGE 2
OUTLETS - 8 STAGE 1
9 STAGE 10
3. When sizing information is present in the report, the mapping

program loads all the relevant information present in the sizing
sections.
For example, in the case of a RADFRAC model for Aspen
Plus, the following portion of the sizing report is loaded in
Analyzer for every section:
Case : Tray tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 29
TRAY SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — —
TRAY TYPE SIEVE
TRAY SPACING METER 0.60960
***** SIZING RESULTS @ STAGE WITH MAXIMUM DIAMETER *****
COLUMN DIAMETER METER 4.00228
Case : Packed tower sizing section
STARTING STAGE NUMBER 2

ENDING STAGE NUMBER 9
PACKING SPECIFICATIONS
— — — — — — — — — — —
PACKING TYPE BERL-SADDLE
HETP FT 2.00000
PACKING HEIGHT FT 16.0000
Determining Tower Process Conditions

Operating Temperature
The maximum temperature value for all the stages (given by
column 1) is used as the operating temperature for the tower.
Operating Pressure
The maximum pressure value for all the stages (given by column
2) is used as the operating pressure for the tower.

Minimum Operating Pressure
The minimum pressure value for all the stages (given by column 2)
is used as the minimum operating pressure for the tower.
Design Pressure
Maximum value of pressure for all the inlet streams to the tower is
compared with the operating pressure. The larger value is used for
design pressure of the tower (after applying the user-defined
design value from the design criteria file).
Design Temperature
Maximum value of the temperature for all the inlet streams to the
tower is compared with the operating temperature. The larger value
is used for the design temperature of the tower (after applying the
user-defined design value from the design criteria file).
Number of Stages
The number of theoretical stages is provided by the number of
rows in Table 1. The final number is determined by taking into
account condenser and reboiler (if they are provided). Also, the
number of stages is affected by whether the reboiler simulated in
the report is kettle or thermosiphon.
For example, in the case of RADFRAC model for Aspen Plus,
consider the following table:
STAGE TEMP. PRESSURE BTU/LBMOL HEAT DUTY
F PSI LIQUID VAPOR BTU/HR
1 149.27 20.000 -0.12156E+06 -42602. -.23509+08

2 223.45 22.000 -0.11895E+06 -87138.
3 227.79 22.100 -0.11909E+06 -92519.
4 230.39 22.200 -0.11918E+06 -95701.
5 232.06 22.300 -0.11925E+06 -97662.
6 233.25 22.400 -0.11931E+06 -98970.
7 234.18 22.500 -0.11935E+06 -99924.
8 234.98 22.600 -0.11939E+06 -0.10068E+06
9 235.72 22.700 -0.11942E+06 -0.10135E+06
10 236.74 22.800 -0.11941E+06 -0.10196E+06 .45802+08
If the reboiler is kettle, then the number of theoretical stages is

eight.
If the reboiler is thermosiphon (reboiler type is obtained from
simulator), then the number of theoretical stages is 9.
Liquid Density
Density of liquid flowing inside the column is estimated from the
density of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If liquid density
cannot be obtained from the streams, the density of water is used
as default.

Vapor Density
Density of vapor flowing inside the column is estimated from the
density of the inlet streams and the exit streams. If vapor density
cannot be obtained from the streams, the vapor density is estimated
based on gas law. The vapor density is estimated at the minimum
operating pressure and operating temperature.
Average Molecular Weight of Vapor Inside Tower
Average vapor molecular weight is estimated from the inlet and
exit streams. The lowest molecular weight of the streams is
assigned as the vapor molecular weight.
Average Molecular Weight of Liquid Inside Tower
Average liquid molecular weight is the maximum molecular
weight for the inlet and exit streams.
Sizing Procedure
The sizing procedure varies depending on the type of internals
desired and the simulator model used for the operation. The
procedure described below gives a description of the actual steps
used by the sizing module to estimate the sizes for the different
types of trayed and packed towers.
Trayed Tower Sizing

General Procedure (Followed for all tray internals):
1. The type (class) of the fluid in the column is used to estimate
some of the properties in designing the tray internals, such as
surface tension, foaming tendency, deration factor if they are
not specified by the user in the simulation output report or in
the design criteria file.
2. You can specify the Overall Column tray efficiency on the
Design Criteria specifications form (see page 3-36). If you do
not specify a value, then it is estimated using Lockett’s
modification of the O’Connell Correlation. This correlation is
based on tests on actual plant columns and has been the
standard of the industry. The tray

efficiency is used to calculate the actual number of stages
required for the separation.
EOC = 0.492 ( μL α) -0.245
where:
EOC = efficiency, O’Connell Correlation
μL = viscosity of liquid, CPOISE
α = relative volatility of key components
A default value of 1.5 is used for the relative volatility of key

components, which can be modified by the user in the design
criteria file. The liquid viscosity is either directly obtained from
the report or estimated from the fluid classification.
3. Once the internal height of the column is estimated (based on
the actual number of trays), additional height for vapor
disengagement and liquid return is based on the user-provided
value on the Design Criteria specifications form.
4. In general, the number of stages provided by the simulator
report represents the theoretical number of stages. However, if
the simulator has used tray efficiency to perform detailed
design of the tower, then the number of trays is actual trays. If
Analyzer finds that the number of trays is actual, then it uses
the value to estimate the height and does not add any additional
tray efficiency.
Using Tower Sizing Information

When a simulator report provides sizing information, Analyzer
tries to use as much of the information as possible in the final
design. When multiple sections are present in the report, the
information used by Analyzer depends on the equipment to which
the model is mapped.
Single Diameter Trayed Tower (TW TRAYED)
If multiple sections are present with different diameters and tray
spacings, then the largest values of the diameters and tray spacings
are used for the actual design of the tower.
Double Diameter Trayed Tower (DTT TRAYED)
For double diameter trayed tower, the two largest diameters in the
sectional report are used in the design. Once the tower is divided
into two sections (based on diameter), the value of the tray spacing
for each section is based on the stage numbers present in each
section. The largest values of tray spacing for each section are used
to estimate the tower height.

For example, for Aspen Plus, assume the following sizing
information is obtained from the report after completing the
loading process.
Section 1:
Diameter = 5 FEET
Tray Spacing = 24 INCHES
Stages = 2 to 4
Section 2:
Diameter = 6 FEET
Stages = 5 to 7
Section 3:
Diameter = 8 FEET
Stages = 8 to 10
The sizing program will design a double diameter tower with the
following dimensions:
Top Section Diameter = 6 FEET

Top Section Tray spacing = 30 INCHES
Top Section Stages = 2 to 7
Bottom Section Diameter = 8 FEET
Bottom Section Tray spacing = 18 INCHES
Bottom Section Stages = 8 to 10
The program estimates the cross sectional area for each stage.
Then, the maximum value is used to design the single diameter
tower. In case of double diameter tower, the program estimates the
diameter for the bottom section and the top section based on the
cross sectional area estimated for each stage.
Sieve Tray Design

• The capacity factor, CSB, is evaluated based on the
correlation developed for entrainment flooding by Kister
and Haas. Jeronimo et. al correlation is used to estimate
the clear liquid height in the spray regime. Strictly, the
Jeronimo and Swistowski correlation predicts the clear
liquid height at the transition from the froth to the spray
regime. However, empirical evidence has shown that clear
liquid height in the spray regime is much the same as clear
liquid height at that transition.
• The CSB estimated at the flooding point is used to
evaluate the flooding vapor velocity.
• The bubbling area is calculated based on flood velocity,
the derating factor and the safety factor. (Column default
design is 90% of flood.)

• Downcomer liquid velocity is based on the foaming
tendency of the fluid and tray spacing. Foaming tendency
can be specified in the design criteria file.
• The downcomer cross-sectional area is based on the
downcomer velocity and the maximum liquid flow inside
the tower.
• The total tower cross-sectional area is calculated by adding
the bubbling area and the downcomer area.
• The diameter of the tower is obtained from the cross-
sectional area by rounding the area up to the next half foot.
The minimum diameter for the tower is 1.5 FEET.
Valve Tray Design

Valve tray sizing is based on the V-type Ballast trays produced by
Glitsch. The system factors are estimated based on the fluid
classification performed on the fluid flowing through the column.
The tray diameter is evaluated for either single pass trays or two
pass trays. It is based on 24 INCHES tray spacing and 80% of
flood.
Bibliography
1. “Distillation Design”, by Henry Z. Kister.

2. “Applied Process Design For Chemical And Petrochemical
Plant”, Volumes 1 and 3, by Ernest E. Ludvig.
3. “Standard Handbook of Engineering Calculations”, by
Tyler G. Hicks
4. “Chemical Engineers HandBook”, by Perry and Chilton,
6th Edition.

Bubble-Cap Tray Design
The allowable vapor velocity and the corresponding diameter for
bubble-cap trays have been represented by the “Jersey Critical”
formula which corresponds to the work by Souder and Brown for
column flooding.
(
D = 0.0956 Wv / K ρ L ρ v ) 12
D = Diameter, FEET
Wv = vapor flow rate, LB/H
ρL = liquid density, LB/CF
ρv = vapor density, LB/CF
The factor K depends on the tray spacing as follows:

Tray Spacing, INCHES 18 24 30 30+
K 3.4 4.2 4.7 5.0
Packed Tower Design

Packed tower design is accomplished for both random and
structured packings. The various types of packings supported by
the system are described in the Icarus Reference.
Kister and Gill flood point correlation is used to estimate pressure
drop at the flood point as a function of packing factor alone.
ΔΡFL = .155 (Fp0.7)
where:
ΔΡFL = Pressure drop at flood point

Fp = Packing factor
Note: The user can provide the value for packing factor in the
design criteria menu option. The system defaults are used
for each of the different types of packings if the user
provided value is not present.
Once this pressure drop is known, the flood velocity is
calculated using the latest version of GPDC (Generalized
Pressure Drop Correlation) charts for both random and
structured packings.

HETP Prediction
HETP value can be provided by the user in the design criteria
option. If the value is not specified, rules of thumb prediction
reported in literature are used to predict the packed tower
efficiency.
For random packing columns, the following rules are used for
estimating HETP (FEET):
HETP = 1.5 dp
dp = Packing diameter, INCHES
HETP > DT for DT < 2 FEET
For estimating the structured packing efficiency, the following rule

of thumb is used:
HETP, INCHES = 1200 /ap + 4
ap = Packing surface area per unit volume, SF/CF
System Defaults
The following system default values may be modified in the design
criteria file and component specification form:
Trayed Tower Defaults

Tray Type = Sieve
Tray Spacing = 24 inches
Flooding Factor = 80 %
Foaming Tendency = Moderate
Packed Tower Defaults

Packing Type = Random
Packing Material = 1.0PPR
Specific area per unit volume for the packing = 0.75 SF/CF
General Defaults
Top vapor disengagement height = 4 FEET
Bottom sump height = 6 FEET
SimSci’s SHORTCUT Column Operation

In case of SHORTCUT column operation, the simulator provides
only the minimum reflux ratio for the distillation process. To
design the tower, the ratio of the operating reflux ratio and
minimum reflux ratio has to be provided. The system uses the
default value of 2.0 for the ratio. The ratio can be changed from the
design criteria file. If the simulator report does not contain
information (number of trays) for the operating reflux ratio, the
tower sizing program returns to the system without performing
sizing for the tower.

Vessels
Horizontal Vessels The following graphic shows a typical horizontal vessel.
The following design variables are specified by the user in the

design criteria file for horizontal vessels:
Residence Time
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Average Liquid Particle Diameter
Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
Separation Factor
Vapor area /cross sectional area
Separation Factor Multiplier
Minimum Boot Length (used in Horizontal Vessel Design)
Minimum Boot diameter
Boot Leg Liquid Velocity
Design Requirements
The maximum number of exit streams is three; two of the streams
can be liquid.

Calculating Diameter
Vessel diameter is based on the maximum allowable vapor
velocity inside the separator, to reduce the liquid entrainment in
the vapor.
The following two methods are available in Analyzer (chosen from
the design criteria file) to obtain vapor velocity.
1. Liquid Entrainment Method
2. Particle size separation method.
Calculating Vapor Velocity
Liquid Entrainment Method

The maximum allowable vapor velocity, to reduce liquid
entrainment is obtained as a function of liquid and vapor density
and the Separation Factor, which itself is a polynomial function of
vapor and liquid density and vapor and liquid flowrates. The
polynomial equation was based on 5% of liquid entrained in the
vapor and is valid for the range (defined below) of 0.006 to 5.0.
Analyzer allows you to override the computed value of Separation
Factor.
W = l_mfr/v_mfr * sqrt (v_rho/l_rho)
X = ln (SF)
k_v = EXP(A + BX + CX^2 + DX^3 + EX^4)
K = k_v * k_vm
v_m = K * sqrt ((l_rho - v_rho)/v_rho)
where:
l_mfr = Light Liquid Mass Flow rate
v_mfr = Vapor Mass Flow rate
l_rho = Light Liquid Density
v_rho = Vapor Density
K = System Factor
SF = Separation Factor
k_v = Polynomial Function of SF
k_vm = Separation Factor Multiplier
A = -1.877478097
B = -0.8145804597
C = -0.1870744085
D = -0.0145228667
E = -0.0010148518

The above relation for Separation Factor is valid for a “W”(SF)
between 0.006 and 5.0. If “W” falls outside the range, the sizing
program gives a warning message and the limiting value of W is
used to estimate Separation Factor.
For example, if calculated value of W is 0.001, then the value used
in the correlation is 0.006. If the calculated value of W is 10.0,
then the value used in the correlation is 6.0.
Particle Size Separation Method

This method estimates the disengagement velocity of liquid bubble
in the vapor space. The maximum allowable vapor velocity is
determined as a percentage of the disengagement velocity.
Liquid drops falling in gases appear to be spherical up to a
Reynolds number of 100. Large drops (greater than 0.3125
INCHES) will deform, with a resulting increase in drag, and in
some cases shatter.
For estimating vapor velocity, the liquid bubbles are assumed to
remain in spherical shape.
The terminal settling velocity can be obtained for different flow
conditions.
For laminar flow (K < 3),
v = g * (rho_l - rho_v) *(dp^ 2)/ (18.0 * mu_v)
and for turbulent region,

v = 1.74 (g * dp * (rho_l - rho_v) / rho_v)^0.5
where:
K = dp * (g * rho_v * (rho_l - rho_v)/ (mu_v^2) )^0.33
v = disengagement velocity
g = gravitational constant
rho_l = liquid density
rho_v = vapor density
dp = liquid bubble diameter
mu_v = gas viscosity (assumed to be 0.05 LB/FT/H)
The design velocity is then estimated by the following equation:

v_m = v*f
where:
v_m = disengagement velocity
f = design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity
v = disengagement

Calculating vessel cross-sectional area
Vapor cross sectional area is estimated based on the vapor velocity
and the vapor volumetric flow. The vapor cross sectional area is
divided by the ratio of vapor area/cross sectional area to get the
total required cross sectional area.
v_csa = v_vol/v_m
t_csa = v_csa/r_vc
where:
v_csa = Vapor area
v_vol = Vapor volumetric flow
r_vc = Vapor area/cross sectional area
t_csa = Vessel cross sectional area
Estimate Vessel diameter based on vapor flow:

D_v = sqrt ((t_csa * 4) /π)
where:
D_v = Vessel Diameter based on vapor flow
π = 3.14
Estimate vessel diameter based on liquid holdup volume and user

specified value of L/D ratio.
The maximum value of diameter calculated using vapor velocity
and liquid holdup is used for final design.
Calculating Length
Vessel liquid holdup volume is obtained based on the light liquid
flowrate and the residence time. The vessel length is then
calculated as given below:
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t

L = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2 * (1 - r_vc))
where:
L = Length
l_vol = Liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = Light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = Residence time
r_vc = Vapor area/Cross-sectional area

Checking L/D Ratio
For all liquid vessels L/D is calculated as follows:
If P <= 250 PSIA, then L/D= 3
If 250 < P <= 500 PSIA, then L/D = 4
If P > 500 PSIA, then L/D= 5
After estimating the length (L) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the
ratio of L/D is compared with the value specified by the user in the
design criteria file for “Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio”.
Estimating Boot Dimensions

Boot dimensions will be estimated only if the exit streams contain
a heavier liquid phase. Boot diameter is based on the heavier liquid
phase volume and boot liquid velocity.
Boot volume (bt_vol) = hl_vfr * r_t
Boot cross section area (bt_csa) = bt_vol / hl_vel
Boot diameter (d) = sqrt (4.0 * bt_csa /π)
Boot length (l) = (bt_vol * 4)/(π * d^2)
where:
hl_vfr = heavy liquid volumetric flow rate

hl_vel = heavy liquid velocity
l = boot length
d = boot diameter

Vertical Vessels The following graphic shows a typical vertical vessel.
The following design variables are specified on the Design Criteria

specifications form:
Residence Time
Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio
Average liquid particle diameter
Design factor multiplier for disengagement velocity

Separation Factor
Minimum Disengagement Height
Minimum height above the mist eliminator
Height of Mist Eliminator
Vessel diameter is calculated in the same manner as for horizontal

vessels. The default value of Separation Factor Multiplier is
available in the Design Criteria specifications.
Calculating Vessel Height

Vessel liquid holdup volume is based on the light liquid flowrate
and the residence time. The liquid height in the vessel is then
calculated and the additional height is added to obtain the overall
vessel height.
l_vol = l_vfr * r_t
l_ht = (l_vol * 4) / (π * D^2)
h = LLLTap_ht + l_ht+ HLLTap_ht + d_ht + me_ht + mea_ht
where:
l_vol = liquid holdup volume
l_vfr = light liquid volumetric flowrate
r_t = residence time
l_ht = liquid height based on residence time
LLLTap_ht = minimum height between low liquid level tap and
tangent line (design criteria)
ddHLLTap_ht = height between inlet nozzle and high liquid level tap
(design criteria)
d_ht = disengagement height
me_ht = mist eliminator height
mea_ht = Height above the mist eliminator
If the calculated l_ht is less than the minimum height between the
taps, specified in the design criteria, then the minimum height is
used.
Checking L/D ratio

For all liquid
After estimating the height (H) and diameter (D) of the vessel, the
ratio of H/D is compared with the value specified by the user in the
design criteria file for “Process Vessel Height to Diameter Ratio.”

Developing and Using Cost Libraries
The Libraries view on the Palette arranges libraries in a

tree-structure. Most of the libraries listed access project
specifications (explained in Chapter 3). The Cost Libraries are
unique, however, in that they comprise collections of particular
cost items that you can add as project components. The cost
libraries are customizable; you can add items to the libraries
provided, as well as add your own libraries.
Analyzer includes two types of cost libraries: Equipment Model
Library (EML) and Unit Cost Library (UCL). Each library type
may include one or more library files, which in turn may contain
one or more library items, each representing a particular type of
cost item.
Equipment Model The EML is intended to store custom equipment items, for which
Library (EML) you create component specification forms. In a project, you can
add an item from the EML as a component and fill out the form
that you earlier created.
The library can store a generic equipment item that comes in
discrete sizes, such as an extruder, or an equipment item that
follows a continuous cost-capacity relationship such as linear,
semi-log or log-log.
Unit Cost Library The UCL is intended to store and retrieve direct costs and
(UCL) installation man-hours, which are based on a simple unit of
measure (e.g., the cost of a material item or installation man-hours
per unit of area, per unit of length, per item, etc.). Costs can also be
stored in a library for indirect items such as project management
man-hours per month, crane rental (plant hire) on a daily, weekly,
monthly basis, etc.
For one-of-a-kind cost items not worth storing in a library, the unit
cost library may be used to create a dummy item for recall and
modification in a project. The dummy item is stored in the library
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Developing and Using Cost Libraries • 7-1
with as little data as possible. This can be retrieved and modified in
as much detail as required whenever you need a one-time cost
added into a project.
7-2 • Developing and Using Cost Libraries Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide
Developing and Using an Equipment
Model Library (EML)
Creating an EML The instructions in this sub-section show you how to create an
EML. The instructions in the sub-sections that follow this one,
which show you how to add an item to an EML and then add the
item to a project, use a single example that can be added either to
an Inch-Pound EML that you created or to one of the two
Inch-Pound EML’s provided.
To create an EML:
1. With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand
Equipment Model Library.
The libraries are
divided into
Inch-Pound and
Metric.
To create a library for
use in projects with an
Inch-Pound units of
measure basis, as in
the example used in
these instructions,
right-click on Inch-
Pound and click New
on the pop-up menu.
The New Equipment Model Library dialog box appears.
2. Enter a file name (required) for the EML and a brief
description (optional), then click OK.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new library.
Adding an Item to an The instructions below for defining and using an EML item follow
EML a single example from item creation through the addition of the
item to a project. Using the example provided will define the item
in such a way that it automatically generates a foundation and/or
electrical power supply bulks.
To add an item to an EML:
1. If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed,
and you may skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
a. Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
b. Expand Cost Libraries, Equipment Libraries, and
either Inch-Pound or Metric. (If following the
example provided, select Inch-Pound.)
c. Right-click on the library to which you want to add
an item, and then click Modify on the pop-up menu.
2. Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3. Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
The one- to six-character alphanumeric Reference ID uniquely
identifies the library item being added. The ID is used to sort
and search for library items. The first character must be a letter.
Click OK.
4. Enter the descriptive data for the item in the Develop
Equipment Model Library form. If you are following the
example, enter the data exactly as shown below. Be sure to
correctly enter the sizing parameters, CAPFLOW and
PWRDRVR; Analyzer knows to use GPM (or L/S for
METRIC) and HP, respectively, for these parameters.
Sizing method: the data

is in the form of either a
continuous curve
(linear, log-log or
semi-log) or a set of
discrete tabular values.
When an equipment
model library item is
retrieved into a project,
the specified size for
the project component
is used to develop the
appropriate cost,
man-hours and weight
from the library data.
4. Click OK to save your specifications.

The new item appears on the Library dialog box, which you may
now close.
Adding an EML Item To add an EML item to a project scenario:
to a Project Scenario 1. Open the project to which you want to add the EML item. For
the purposes of this example, you can use either an existing or
newly created US/I-P based project.
2. In Project Explorer (Project view), right-click on the area in
which to add the EML item, and then click Add Project
Component on the pop-up menu.
3. On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify
a project component name for the item.
Select Equipment Model Library and click OK.

4. At the Select an Equipment Model Library File dialog box,
select the EML to which you added the item and Click OK.
5. At the Select an Equipment Model Library Item dialog box,
select the item you added and click OK.
6. Enter your specifications for the item at the Component

Specifications form, as shown below. Note that the Size
parameters CAPFLOW and PWRDRVR are included on the
form.
Click OK to apply and save the specifications.

The item will now be included in project evaluations.
Developing and Using a Unit Cost
Library (UCL)
The instructions below use as an example a library of asbestos
abatement (ASBABT) costs and man-hours. This example has
been selected because environmental remediation data is difficult
to model, since costs and man-hours tend to vary greatly based on
site conditions and project types. Items of a unique and/or variable
nature are ideal for storing in a UCL.
The instructions take this example through the following stages:
library creation, adding items to the library, adding a library item
to a project as a component, and forming an assembly in the
project out of multiple UCL items.
Creating a Unit Cost To create a unit cost library:
Library 1. With no project open, go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
Expand Cost Libraries in the tree-structure, and then expand
Unit Cost Library.
The libraries are divided
into Inch-Pound and
Metric.
To create a library for
use in projects with an
Inch-Pound units of
measure basis, as in the
ASBABT example used
in these instructions,
right-click on
Inch-Pound and click
New on the pop-up
menu.
2. In the New Unit Cost Library dialog box, enter a file name
(required) for the UCL and a brief description (optional).
Click OK to create the new UCL.
An empty Library dialog box appears.
You can now add items to the new UCL.
Adding an Item to a To add items to a UCL:

UCL 1. If you just added a library, the Library dialog box is displayed,
and you may skip to Step 2. If not, follow these steps:
a. Go to the Palette’s Libraries tab view.
b. Expand Cost Libraries, Unit Cost Libraries, and either
Inch-Pound or Metric.
c. Right-click on the library to which you want to add an
item, and then click Modify on the pop-up menu.
2. Click Add on the Library dialog box.
3. Enter a Reference ID for the item in the Add Item dialog box.
Click OK.
4. In the Develop Unit Cost Library form, enter information for
the new item.
Note: Costs for the item

will be allocated to the
specified Code of
Account (COA). See
Icarus Reference
Chapter 34 for COA
definitions.
y Analyzer uses the Material Cost Per Unit and Labor Cost
Per Unit to cost the item in an estimate. If Labor Hours
Per Unit is specified and Labor Cost Per Unit is left blank,
Analyzer will calculate the labor cost using the project
wage rates at the time of the estimate.
y The Unit of Measure can be designated for “each” or by
any appropriate unit (i.e., “1000 SF” ). Be sure to
sufficiently describe the item so that you know what the
unit costs include when the item is retrieved at some
future date. The quantity is entered when the library item
is retrieved into a project.
y The Date and Source are for your reference and are not
transferred into an estimate.
When done entering specifications for the item, click OK.
5. To add a set of items as in the ASBABT example, repeat the
process (Steps 2-4) to add the following items in addition to the
one shown in the previous graphic.
Labor
Reference Code of Mat’l Cost Cost Unit of Date of
No. Item Description Account Per Unit Per Unit Measure quotation
AAB200 Polyethylene 800 .021 .004 SF 04APR01
Sheeting
AAB201 Duct Tape ( 300’ 800 3.50 ROLL 04APR01
roll )
AAB202 Adhesive Spray 800 6.00 CAN 04APR01
(60’ / can)
AAB300 Decontami- 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
nation Shower
AAB301 Neg Air 800 300.00 2 EACH 04APR01
Pressure
System
AAB400 Lighting Fixture 800 .01 EACH 04APR01
Removal
After the above are added, the Library dialog box will appear
as shown below.
6. When done adding items to the UCL, click close on the Library
dialog box.
Adding a UCL Item to To add a single UCL item to a project scenario:
a Project Scenario 1. Open the project to which you want to add the UCL item. To
add an item from the ASBABT library developed as an
example in the previous instructions, you can open either an
existing or newly created US/I-P based project.
which to add the UCL item, and then click Add Project
3. On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, specify
a project component name for the item.
Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.

4. At the Select a Unit Cost Library File dialog box, select the
UCL to which you added the item and click OK.
5. At the Select a Unit Cost Library Item dialog box, select the
item you added and click OK.
6. On the Component Specifications form, click the Option

drop-down button and select Unit Cost Items.
Analyzer retrieves the unit cost data you set up in Libraries.
7. You can now enter the quantity data and modify any of the
retrieved data.
8. Click OK to save the specifications and close the form.
Creating an This section shows how to add several items from the library to
Assembly of UCL form an assembly. In the example, the items from the ASBABT
Items library are added to form an Asbestos Abatement Area Preparation
Assembly.
To create an assembly of UCL items in a project:
which to add the UCL item, and then click Add Project
2. On the Icarus Project Component Selection dialog box, enter as
the project component name a description of the assembly.
Select Unit Cost Library and click OK.
UCL containing the first item to add to the assembly and click
OK.
first item to add to the assembly and click OK.
5. On the Component Specifications form, click the Option

drop-down button and select Unit Cost Items.
6. Click Add.
UCL containing the next item to add to the assembly and click
OK.
next item to add to the assembly and click OK.
9. Repeat the process of adding items until the form contains
columns for all the items in the assembly.
10. After entering quantities for the items click OK.

The assembly is listed as one project component on the Project
Explorer (Project view) and the List view.
You can now run an evaluation on the item (see page 9-103 for
instructions). An Item Report would summarize total costs and
man-hours, as well as list each assembly item’s costs and
man-hours.
Working with Cost Libraries
Equipment model and unit cost libraries share the functions
described in this section.
Copying a Library When adding a library item similar to one that already exists, it is
Item easier to copy the existing library item and modify the necessary
specifications.
To copy a library item:
1. Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click
Copy.
2. Enter a Reference ID for the new item.
Click OK. Analyzer adds the new item with all the same data
as the original — only the Reference ID has changed.
Deleting a Library When a library item is no longer useful, it can be removed from the
Item library file.
To delete a library item:
1. Highlight a library item in the Library dialog box and click
Delete.
A dialog box appears to confirm the delete.
2. Click Yes to delete the selected library item.
Or click No to retain the library item in the library file.
Escalating Library Library items contain costs which change over time due to
Costs inflation. Escalating library costs bring the library costs up to date.
To escalate library costs:
1. Click Escalate on the Library dialog box.
The Escalate Costs dialog box appears.
2. Enter the escalation specifications.
New Base Date: The date of escalation or the date at which the
prices are current.
Material Escalation: Amount by which to escalate material
costs.
Labor Escalation: Amount by which to escalate labor costs.
Since equipment model libraries only include man-hours, not
labor costs, this field only appears when escalating unit cost
libraries.
3. Click OK to escalate all of the library items in the library file.
Importing a Cost You can import UCL files, which have the extension “.LIB”, and
Library EML files, which have the extension “.EML”, from elsewhere on
your computer or network.
To import a cost library:
1. In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the appropriate
Units of Measure basis (Inch-Pound or Metric), and then click
Import on the pop-up menu.
2. In the Select a File for Import window, locate the file and then
click Open.
The file is now included in the Palette and its items can be
added as Analyzer project components.
Duplicating a Cost To duplicate a cost library:

Library 1. In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library you
wish to duplicate, and then click Duplicate on the pop-up
menu.
2. Enter a file name and description (optional) for the new library.
Analyzer displays the Library dialog box for the new Library,
which contains the same items as the original. You can add,
modify, or delete the items without affecting the original.
Deleting a Cost To delete a cost library:
Library In the Palette (Libraries view), right-click on the library to be
deleted, and then click Delete on the pop-up menu.
Changing Plant Capacity and
Location
Analyzer allows you to evaluate alternate plant capacities and

locations.
When you change plant capacity, Analyzer re-sizes each project
component to a desired plant capacity. Unique expert system rules,
based on engineering principles, provide the basis for revising the
size of every project component in the process facility that is
implicated in stream flows, as well as the size of other plant
facility components in the plant layout, including process and
utility components inside battery limits (ISBL) and outside battery
limits (OSBL), associated installation bulks, piping, cable runs,
buildings, structures, pipe racks, and site improvements.
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Changing Plant Capacity and Location • 8-1
Changing Plant Capacity
Changing the production capacity affects not only every stream
flow, but the size, and in some cases, the number of project
components. Decision Analyzer’s Analyzer Scale-up Module
(ASM) automatically examines each element of a project, applies a
set of scale-up rules unique to that element and recreates the entire
plant description according to the new production capacity.
ASM contains hundreds of rules for each of the hundreds of Aspen
Icarus project components. Rules are based on engineering
principles for elements that are directly linked to production
capacity. For other elements that are footprint oriented such as
building and structures, rules based on heuristics are applied.
When the scaled project is evaluated, design quantities that are
developed for the newly sized components are designed to meet
the needs of a project. Further, revisions to P&IDs and similar user
adjustments contained in the baseline project are also treated in the
same way. The idea is to design a scaled project as it is intended to
be built. This methodology eliminates the need for applying a
factor to the baseline plant cost to scale it up or down. Given a new
capacity, ASM recreates the entire plant.
The ASM process is automatic and rapid. ASM revises sizes of
components to meet a revised capacity and the project evaluation
engines do the difficult, time-consuming evaluation work. Users
find ASM performs its re-sizing operation results to be similar to
engineering design methods with the added benefit of much
reduced time and resources. Further, equal confidence can be
applied to evaluation results before and after using ASM as rules
are discipline-based and the before and after evaluation processes
are identical.
To change plant capacity:
1. Open your baseline project and save it under a new scenario
name that reflects the new capacity. This will ensure that your
baseline project remains intact, separate and apart from your
about-to-be scaled project.
2. On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A”
button on the toolbar.
The Decision Analyzer dialog box appears.
8-2 • Changing Plant Capacity and Location Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide
3. Mark the Change Plant Capacity by (5-600%) check box.
4. Enter the desired percentage adjustment or select it using the
Up/Down arrow buttons. For example, if you need to revise the
capacity by a value beyond 600% to 700%, scale your project
twice. For this, the Evaluate Project check box should be
cleared. Then you can split the desired 700% into two parts:
first use 350%, and on completion, scale it again at 350%.
5. Click OK to initiate the Analyzer Scale-up Module.
6. Upon completion, save the scaled project.
Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM)

How ASM Works Scale-up of a project to a new production capacity is a two-step
process.
1. The Aspen Scale-up Module is invoked. The ASM processor
(a) analyzes each specification in your project
(b) applies the appropriate scale-up rule
(c) revises the specification to a new value
(d) moves on to the next specification
You can follow the progress of this phase by noting the item
names in the display at the bottom of your screen.
2. The project is evaluated. This phase performs the designs,
develops quantities, hours, costs, etc., and prepares the basic
set of reports for your project at the new capacity. On
completion of this step, you can proceed to prepare special
reports and perform other analyses on your newly scaled
project.
Save the project after the scale-up operation.
Scale-Up Rule Set Analyzer contains rules for hundreds of components and cost
elements that are based on (a) engineering design principles for
scale-up of all process equipment, stream flows, etc and (b)
heuristics for plant items that are based on footprint and plot plan.
The current rule set in some instances modifies the number of
items rather than change sizes, as in the simple example of trees
along a fence line, where the number of trees would be revised
rather than the size of each tree. In the current rule set, there is no
automatic provision for increasing the number of project
components.
Limiting Conditions It is possible that on extreme capacity scale-ups, sizes of certain
equipment or bulk items may surpass a system limiting value. In
this case, an error condition would be issued. The user would then
examine the scaled model for the particular item(s) and revise the
size and number of out-of-range items accordingly, as an item in
an error condition would be excluded from the estimate.
Scale-up Candidates ASM rules apply to the following types of project information:
• Area specs: distances, dimensions, cost per unit weight
• Project Component specs: specific rules based on item
type and specification, typically size dimension, capacity,
power and occasionally number of items
Note: Several “sanitary” process equipment items associated with

batch food processing will not be scaled.
• Installation specs: quoted costs, hours and numeric specs

for piping, duct, civil, steel, electrical, insulation, paint.
Text-based sizes such as pipe schedule, wire size, etc. are
symbolic and are not scaled.
• Project Component Quoted Cost: While ASM has rules
for quoted cost, the ASM rule may not be the best for your
type of item. Here, it’s better to apply a % Adjustment to
the system’s estimated cost in an amount that will bring
the estimated cost up to your quoted value. Then, on
scaling, the new reported cost will be calculated by
applying your % Adjustment to the estimated cost. Based
on the scaled sizes.
• Quoted hours: based on item type
• Quoted weight: based on item type
• Stream flow rate: scaled to the new capacity
Scale-Up for Often, sections of a proposed facility may be required to consist of
Configuration parallel trains, joining up to meet downstream units. Situations
Analysis such as these are best handled by creating models of these sections
at a standard capacity and then scaling desired sections to say 50%
capacity. You would then import the various sections into an
overall model, with multiple trains being imported as many times
as required. The resulting model would then be evaluated for
capital investment and process economics.
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM)

The Analyzer Relocation Module enables you to evaluate the
impact of worldwide location on capital cost and a variety of other
econometrics. Specifically, you can “relocate” a project from one
basis to any one of 89 worldwide locations. You can choose to
retain the location of your engineering workforce or choose any
one of 89 worldwide locations.
When you need to evaluate a project that you might engineer
and/or construct in a different city or country location, ARM will
quickly and automatically revise your project parameters with
those contained in its location knowledge base. The ARM
knowledge base includes key location-dependent data and rules to
properly convert your project from its starting basis to your
selected location(s) using location dependent values for design
parameters, engineering and construction work forces, cost of
materials, and engineering, material and construction indirects.
You can use ARM in combination with the Analyzer Scale-up
Module (ASM) and Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) all in the
same run or separately from the other modules.
Relocation • Baseline project: initial case, before executing ARM.
Terminology • Relocated project: after ARM processing of the baseline
project.
• Relocation: a process of evaluating an initially formulated
project (baseline project) to a new location (relocated
project).
• Locations: a general location, characterized by a city and
country name, which is used to represent a particular EPC
function. The function may or may not be physically sited
in that city.
• Engineering location: city and country name used to
characterize the engineering workforce assigned to the
project.
• Plant location: city and country name used to characterize
the plant site.
Workflow The figure below shows the general work process. ARM specs,
contained in the ARM rule set are applied to the user’s model. A
description of the elements in the table is provided in the section
following the Workflow.
How the Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM) Works
Baseline Reports Relocation Reports

For Base For New
Engineering and Engineering and
Plant Location Plant Location
Analyzer
Project
Baseline Relocation Relocated
Project Module Project
(ARM)
ARM Specs
Project
Specs
Construction Construction Material Engineering Engineering

Hours Rates Quantities Hours Rates
Construction Materials Engineering

Indirects Indirects Indirects
Construction Materials Engineering

Contingency Contingency Contingency
Construction Engineering
Fee Cost
Construction Material
Cost Cost
Project
Contingency
1 Since ARM processing is automatic it is wise to first save your
base project under a new scenario name in advance of running
ARM. Use a scenario name that refers to the planned new
capacity. This will ensure that your baseline project remains
intact for further evaluations.
2 On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer or click the “A”
button on the button bar:
Figure 1. Button Bar
This will display the Decision Analyzer dialog box, Figure 2.
Note: ARM shares space with ASM and AEM and Evaluate
Project on the four-part Decision Analyzer dialog box.
3 Mark the checkbox Change Plant Location to.

4 Select the Plant Location from its pull-down list.
5 Select the Engineering Location from its pull-down list.
6 Use the remaining check boxes to select options to
• Enable escalation for Aspen Kbase projects.
• Retain your defined construction start date and duration. If
unchecked, a new date will be developed on relocation.
Note that the last line on the Decision Analyzer dialog box
displays three pieces of information:
• plant location
• currency name
• currency symbol, in parentheses
This information is a reminder to users of the Analyzer Economics
Module (AEM) who are interested in reporting costs in currency
different from the plant location currency. For this, two entry slots
are provided for an exchange rate and symbol. If AEM is not
invoked, values so entered will not affect the reporting aspects of
relocation aspects. In Figure 2, the user elected to run AEM. This
would take place immediately after ARM completed the relocation
process, described as follows.
Figure 2. Decision Analyzer Dialog Box – Illustration for a plant
to be engineered in Rotterdam and constructed in Singapore. The
currency of the plant location is displayed in the last wire-frame.
Relocating the 7. Once having completed the choices, click OK to run the
Project project. If you choose CANCEL, all choices will be ignored
and control will return to the explorer view.
With your OK, Decision Analyzer’s relocation module will
automatically convert your base location project to the selected
engineering and plant location. Your project will then contain the
results of the relocation, which you can review and modify. To do
this, select the Project Basis view and click on the desired basis
category. Open the associated form, review the data and modify, as
you desire. When pleased with the results, SAVE the project,
making sure that it is saved under a scenario name that describes
the relocation and most important, that your baseline project is not
disturbed by the SAVE. You can then evaluate the project and
review the results. A final SAVE will save the results.
ARM Knowledge The ARM knowledge base consists of approximately ten thousand
Base location-specific data values plus rules that govern the way the
location data will be applied to your baseline project. The ARM
knowledge base is derived from a variety of qualified sources
including:
• Aspen Richardson international construction data: raw data
from this source (also used to prepare the Aspen
Richardson International Cost Factor Manual) were
analyzed and mapped into Icarus technology formats for
use in ARM
• Proprietary sources
• Practicing professionals, EPC and owner customers and
associates
• Surveys
• Technical publications that specialize in international
construction costs
• Government sources: seismic, climate data and other
location data
• Financial sources: exchange rates, etc.
• Aspen Icarus models: to blend and fill in sparse data areas
Five Bodies of Data The ARM knowledge base consists of five bodies of data:
• Location specs
• Project specs
• Engineering specs
• Construction specs
• Material Cost specs
Highlights of each component follow.
Location Specs
ARM is formulated for 89 locations in 33 currencies. Locations
listed below include the four Icarus country base locations. The
locations are similar to those in the Aspen Richardson International
Cost Factor Manual list.
Locations are organized and sorted by continental region, country
and city. For Canadian and US locations, names include state,
province or territory. Conventional short forms of country and city
names are used for simplicity.
• Regions - The number of locations for each region is listed
in Table 1.
• City Locations outside the US are listed in Table 2
• US locations are listed in Table 3.
TABLE 1. List of Locations in Each Region
Africa 3
Asia 15
Australia 3
Canada 6
Central America 2
Europe 12
Middle East 6
South America 5
United States 37
All Locations 89
Non-US Locations 52
TABLE 2. List of Non-US Locations
Region City, Country

Africa El Hassania, Morocco
Ibadan, Nigeria
Johannesburg, South Africa
Asia Beijing, China
Guangzhou, China
Shanghai, China
Bhopal, India
Mumbai (Bombay), India
Jakarta, Indonesia
Kobe, Japan
Tokyo, Japan
Kuantan, Malaysia
Manila, Philippines
Singapore, Singapore
Seoul, South Korea
Taipei, Taiwan
Samutprakam, Thailand
Binh Duong, Vietnam
Australia Melbourne, Australia
Perth, Australia
Sydney, Australia
Central America Guatemala City, Guatemala
Mexico City, Mexico
Canada Calgary, Canada
Montreal, Canada
Toronto, Canada
Vancouver, Canada
Windsor, Canada
Winnipeg, Canada
Europe Brussels, Belgium
Paris, France
Frankfurt, Germany
Dublin, Ireland
Milan, Italy
Amsterdam, Netherlands
Rotterdam, Netherlands
Warsaw, Poland
Moscow, Russia
Barcelona, Spain
London, United Kingdom
Manchester, United Kingdom
Middle East Cairo, Egypt
Kuwait City, Kuwait
Dammam, Saudi Arabia
Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Gebze, Turkey
Abu Dhabi, UAE
South America Buenos Aires, Argentina
Rio de Janeiro, Brazil
Medellin, Colombia
Lima, Peru
Caracas, Venezuela
TABLE 3. List of US City Locations
Anchorage, AK
Atlanta, GA
Baltimore, MD
Boston, MA
Cape Girardeau, MO
Cayey, PR
Charlotte, NC
Chicago, IL
Cincinnati, OH
Dallas, TX
Denver, CO
Fairbanks, AK
Green Bay, WI
Houston, TX
Huntsville, AL
Indianapolis, IN
Kansas City, MO
Knoxville, TN
Las Vegas, NV
Los Angeles, CA
Louisville, KY
New Orleans, LA
New York, NY
Newark, NJ
Oakland, CA
Philadelphia, PA
Phoenix, AZ
Portland, ME
Portland, OR
Sacramento, CA
San Francisco, CA
Seattle, WA
Sherman, TX
Spartanburg, SC
St Louis, MO
Syracuse, NY
Wilkes-Barre, PA
Project Data
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of values
for project level data. These should be considered as a starting
point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users should
replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated project
with more representative values obtained from company surveys of
the intended site.
• Currency: Exchange rate (FEX), as of the first day of the
basis year, with exchange rate and currency units scaled to
meet Icarus currency formats. Scaled currency units are
provided at three levels: 3-character symbol, 8-character
name and 24-character description. Values are listed in
Table 4.
Currency: 33 currencies are defined; some ARM

locations share the same currency
Exchange rate, for each location. The ARM knowledge
base works with exchange rates relative to the currency
of each of the four country bases (US, UK, JP, EU).
The currency table contains the rates as of the listed
date.
Exchange rates are scaled in size to conform with
Icarus exchange rate formats (0.01 to 99.9 in value)
Scaled currency symbols, names and descriptions are
defined to conform to Icarus format; these contain
symbols such as K to represent thousands and M to
represent millions of scaled currency units, as indicated
in Table 4.
TABLE 4. List of Currencies

Exchange
Rate Currency
Country Currency Name Currency Description
Per USD Symbol
(1 Jan 2004)
Argentina 2.9504 P Peso-A Argentine Peso
Australia 1.3301 A$ Dollar-A Australian Dollar
Brazil 2.903 R Real Brazilian Real
Canada 1.297 C$ Dollar-C Canadian Dollar
China 8.2867 R Renmimbi Chinese Yuan Renmimbi
Colombia 2.8039 K-P K Peso K Colombian Peso
Egypt 6.2289 PDE Pound-E Egyptian Pound
European Union 0.7952 EUR Euro Euro
Guatemala 8.228 Q Quetzal Guatemalan Quetzal
India 45.69 R Rupee Indian Rupee
Indonesia 8.4477 K-R K Rupiah K Indonesian Rupiah
Japan 0.1074 K-Y K Yen K Japanese Yen
Kuwait 0.2949 DK Dinar Kuwaiti Dinar
Malaysia 3.8172 R Ringgit Malaysian Ringgit
Mexico 11.227 P Peso-MX Mexican Peso
Morocco 8.841 D Dirham-M Moroccan Dirham
Nigeria 0.13701 K-N K Naira K Nigerian Naira
Peru 3.5578 NS NuevoSol Peruvian Nuevo Sol
Philippines 55.74 P Peso-P Philippine Peso
Poland 3.7296 Z Zloty Polish Zloty
Russia 29.25 RBL Rouble Russian Rouble
Saudi Arabia 3.7504 R Riyal Saudi Riyal
Singapore 1.7019 S$ Dollar-S Singapore Dollar
South Africa 6.7161 ZAR Rand South African Rand
South Korea 1.1939 K-W K Won K South-Korean Won
Taiwan 34.02 T$ Dollar-T Taiwan Dollar
Thailand 39.709 B Baht Thai Baht
Turkey 1.427436 M-L M Lira M Turkish Lira
United Arab Emirate 3.6732 D Dirham-U Utd. Arab Emir. Dirham
United Kingdom 0.5601 PDS Pound-UK British Pound
United States 1 USD DollarUS US Dollar
Venezuela 1.5995 K-B K Boliv K Venezuelan Bolivar
Vietnam 16.156 K-D K Dong K Vietnamese Dong
• Equipment: design code (ASME, BS5500, DIN, JIS

depending upon the plant location)
• Civil and Steel: seismic acceleration, soil, footing
depth, low/high ambient temperatures, wind velocity,
hand excavation
• Electrical: power supply frequency
• Equipment Rental: a “Construction Technology Level”
(CTL) parameter (L, M, and H) is assigned to each
location. Locations assigned as H-level draw from the
entire system slate of equipment rental items. S-level
locations select from a smaller slate than M-level
locations.
• Use of gin poles vs. heavy cranes: each location is
assigned a value for the heavy lift option
Engineering Work Force
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of
engineering workforce values, which should be considered as a
starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users
should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated
project with more representative values obtained from company
surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each engineering work
force location:
• Hourly rates for each of 77 disciplines in the engineering
workforce slate. Hourly rates are provided in the currency
of the engineering location. During the processing of a
project, these rates are converted, for consistent cost
reporting, to the currency of the plant location using the
exchange rate ratio:
Discipline Rate in Plant Location Currency =
Discipline Rate in the Engineering Location
Currency x Plant Location Exchange Rate /
Engineering Location Exchange Rate
• Engineering workforce productivity – one value is provided
for each engineering location, relative to the engineering
productivity at the country base location
• Engineering Indirect Costs – values are provided for each
location for each of the eight phases of engineering:
• Expense rates
• Payroll burdens
• Office indirects
The eight phases of engineering are:

• Basic Engineering
• Detail Engineering
• Procurement
• Engineering Management
• Home Office Construction Services
• Field Office Supervision
• Construction Management
• Start-up, Commissioning
• Engineering confidence level, associated with the sources
of the ARM knowledge base data, used to compute a value
of engineering contingency. Engineering contingency is
computed as the root-mean square value of the user
engineering contingency and engineering confidence level.
For example, if the user contingency before relocation UC
=18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%,
then the computed contingency after relocation is
= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%
Construction
The ARM knowledge base contains a comprehensive set of
construction workforce values, which should be considered as a
starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned users
should replace the ARM knowledge base values in their relocated
project with more representative values obtained from company
surveys of the intended site.
The following are provided by ARM for each construction work
force location:
• Field Craft rates – hourly rates (“nearly all-in”) for each of
28 field crafts in the construction work force slate and a
foreman differential for each location. By “nearly all-in”,
we mean that each craft rate is a unique composite of the
following rate contributions:
• Craft Worker Base Hourly Wage Rate
• Health, Welfare, Pension
• Fringe Benefits
• Hourly Indirect Rate for:
• Temporary Construction
• Consumables and Small Tools
• FICA Unemployment Workers Compensation
Insurance
• Multi-level construction
Craft rates in the ARM knowledge base do not include
indirect construction costs for the following categories as
these would be determined during project evaluation:
Construction Equipment Rental, including Fuel, Oil,
Lubrication, Maintenance (FOLM)
Field Supervision
Contractor Home Office Costs
• Construction workforce productivity – one value is
provided for each plant location, relative to the construction
productivity at the country base location
• Field indirect costs, including construction equipment
rental (see Project Data, below), field supervision, home
office costs
• Work week: hours, number of shifts, overtime
• Construction equipment rental: slate of items (see Project
Data, below)
• Extent of hand excavation vs. machine excavation
• Construction confidence level, associated with the sources
of construction contingency. Contingency is computed as
the root-mean square value of the user construction
contingency and construction confidence level. For
example, if the user contingency before relocation UC
=18% and the ARM location confidence value LC = 10%,
then the computed contingency after relocation is
= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%
Material Costs
• Location Indexing
The ARM knowledge base contains a set of location
indexes which will adjust country base material costs to the
plant location. Two sets are provided. The first deals with
equipment costs. The second applies to bulk materials.
Use of the supplied location indexes should be considered
as a starting point in the evaluation of a project. Concerned
users should replace the ARM knowledge base values in
their relocated project with more representative values
obtained from company surveys of the intended site.
The location indexes make use of Aspen Richardson values
for the average split of local vs. imported materials. Costs
of local and imported materials are figured by applying
location values for freight, taxes, VAT, and other expenses.
Location indexes are stored for each of the four country
bases and are used to characterize material costs by account
code (100 to 299 for equipment, 300 to 999 for bulk
materials.)
• Unit cost of rebar, ready-mix concrete, in the currency of
the plant location
• Material cost confidence level, associated with the sources
of material cost contingency. Contingency is computed as
the root-mean square value of the user material contingency
and material cost confidence level. For example, if the user
contingency before relocation UC =18% and the ARM
location confidence value LC = 10%, then the computed
contingency after relocation is
= √ (UC2 + LC2) = √ (182+102 ) = 20.6%
Evaluating the Project
Running a Project Evaluation

After all process simulator data has been properly mapped and
defined, you are ready to run a project evaluation. The project
evaluation produces capital costs, operating costs and investment
analysis reports. If any Project Basis or component specifications
are modified, the evaluation process must be re-run.
To run a project evaluation:
1. Click on the toolbar.

– or –
On the Run menu, click Evaluate Project.
2. The dialog box shows the default Capital Costs report file
name, Cap_Rep.ccp. This is the report reviewed in Icarus
Editor. If you wish for it to have a different name, enter the file
name in the Report File field.
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Evaluating the Project • 9-19

Click OK.
9-20 • Evaluating the Project Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

If you are using the default Preferences, Analyzer scans the project
specifications for errors and/or inconsistencies and any found are
You can select in listed in the Scan Messages window.
Preferences to skip
the scan for errors
(see page 2-30).
There are four types of messages:

Scan Message Description/Importance Level
INFOrmational For your information.
WARNing Design can be produced, but you are alerted to
problems.
ERROR A design or cost cannot be produced for an item.
The entire item that is in ERROR will be
excluded from the estimate.
FATAL Rare instance for extreme problems. The
estimate will not be developed
You have the option to continue or stop the evaluation process
(except in the case of FATAL errors, which stop the evaluation
process). When the project evaluation is done, Analyzer lists all
errors found in the capital cost evaluation for your reference.
You can select in If you are using the default Preferences, Analyzer automatically
Preferences not to have
Analyzer automatically displays the Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
display the Investment Window when the evaluation is complete. See “Reviewing
Analysis (see page 2-30).
Investment Analysis” on page 9-77 for a description of these
spreadsheets.

Reviewing and Revising Process
Economics in the Analyzer
Economics Module
The Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) includes an interactive

economic evaluation workbook, that allows you to review
economic, scheduling, and manufacturing premises and see the
impact of revisions to those premises. It displays in Excel key
economic information over the project timeline to help you
evaluate projected operations and the return on investment.
Loading the Analyzer To initiate an economic scenario, first load the AEM.
Economics Module
(AEM)
To load AEM:
1. On the Run menu, click Decision Analyzer.
2. On the Decision Analyzer dialog box, mark the Develop
Detailed Process Economics Reports check box.
3. Enter the desired reporting currency symbol to use for the
reporting of all costs.
4. If the plant location currency is different from the currency
used on the reports, enter the exchange rate as the ratio of
Report Currency/Plant Location Currency.
5. Click OK.

In Excel, two workbook files open: SPECS and RESULTS.
Overview of In addition to showing you the economic analysis of the current

Workbooks project basis, the workbooks allow you to instantly see the impact
that revisions to the basis will have on economic measurements.
For example, you can revise the required working capital
percentage on the Project Input worksheet in SPECS and, as a
result, the Cash Flow bar chart on the Figures worksheet in
RESULTS will change to reflect this revision. This is explained in
detail in the “Revising Premises” section, page 9-33.
SPECS Workbook The SPECS workbook consists of the following worksheets, which
you can navigate by clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the
workbook window:
Guide
The Guide provides you with an online reminder of helpful
information, which you may refer to during an interactive scenario
session:
• Purpose of Aspen Decision Analyzer's Economics Module

(AEM) and what AEM does.
• The three classes of information from which AEM works.
• The two workbooks for new scenario premises.
• Details on the worksheets containing input.
• Details on the worksheets containing results.
• Strategy - how to use this module effectively for evaluating
business and economic options.
Control Panel
The Control Panel allows you to revise high-level stream premises.
It features spinner controls and reset buttons, enabling you to
change unit prices and instantaneously see the resulting economic
metrics and graphed results.

Key economic metrics displayed include: graphs of net present
value (NPV) and annual production revenue, payout date, Internal
Rate of Return (IRR), NPV over project lifetime, gross, operating
and net revenue margins.
Decision Center
The Decision Center is AEM's navigator. It enables you to move
quickly across all of AEM's user-interactive worksheets, all of
which are included in horizontal format. To view all the
worksheets in a vertical format, use the DC_V worksheet.
Both the horizontal and vertical formats enable you to quickly
locate high level and lower level categories and the ultimate
worksheet locations. Important error messages are displayed on the
Decision Center header.
An NPV graph displays the current state of the scenario including
high-level error messages with pointers to error locations.
DC_V
This worksheet contains the same content as the Decision Center
worksheet in a vertical format.

Input Worksheets
The two input worksheets are for user-interactive revisions to
premises. They define your economic scenario. Revisions are
immediately reflected in the Status, Statements, EPC, and Figures
worksheets. See page 9-33 for information on revising economic
premises.
Project Input
In the Project Input worksheet, you can revise the schedule, time
periods, capital investment, cost of capital investment, phase
durations, capital cost parameters, manufacturing cost parameters,
operating labor and maintenance cost parameters, general
investment parameters, and escalation.
The following is an excerpt:
Stream Input
In the Stream Input worksheet, you can revise the stream factor to
determine the impact of turndown, turnarounds or a proposed
expansion; split production into a domestic and export stream with
their associated unit prices; revise prices of by-products, raw
materials, and utilities. An important aspect of the Stream Input
worksheet is the use of periodically changing values of stream
factor, unit costs and percent to export. This feature will enable
you to study the impact of market cycles and identify economic
threats and opportunities related to production over the life of the
project.

Status Worksheet
View the Status worksheet for a quick summary of which values
on the input worksheets have been revised, need correction, or are
incomplete.

The Status worksheet also displays a
panel board graph of Net Present
Value (NPV) and summary status
report of project and stream input
conditions and major economic
indicators to help guide the analyst.
Capture Worksheet
The Capture worksheet and its
initiating buttons enables you to
review and capture highlights of up to
50 economic scenarios. A set of buttons is provided to initiate the
capture of current scenario highlights in advance of working on the
next scenario.
RESULTS Workbook The RESULTS workbook consists of six worksheets, which you
can navigate by clicking the sheet tabs at the bottom of the
workbook window.
The following is an overview of the worksheets.
EPC Worksheet
The EPC worksheet provides before and after information
regarding the engineering, procurement and construction aspects of
your project. The term “before” refers to the state of your project

based on your initial premises, prior to interactively changing from
one scenario to another in Analyzer’s Economic Module. The EPC
workbook provides costs in both the currency of the plant location
and a user-defined “reporting currency. For example, if your
project were modeled using the European Union country base (EU,
currency in Euro) and you wished to see costs reported in Euro for
a project relocated to Mexico (reporting currency in k-Peso), you
could define the reporting currency to be Euro and enter the
desired exchange rate between the Euro and k-Peso. You would
define the reporting currency and exchange rate along with the
relocation country, at Run time. The EPC worksheet would report
plant location costs in both Euro and k-Peso. This worksheet
currently provides the only connection between costs in the
country base currency and plant location currency.
The EPC worksheet provides the following information:
• EPC results based on the initial premises (before the scenario)
o Status of stream data
o Exchange rate used to compute plant location costs in the
country base currency
o Summary costs, man-hours in both plant location and
country base currencies
o EPC start and end dates
o Breakouts of costs and man-hour for direct materials,
engineering and construction and project indirects.

• EPC scenario results and key economic measures
o Economic measures: NPV, IRR, payout time, average
annual production over the life of the project
o Summary and detailed cost and man-hour information
resulting from changes during the interactive session.

Project Basis
The Project Basis worksheet provides project name, project
description, simulator type, capital cost evaluation and parameters,
time periods, construction schedule, manufacturing cost
parameters, operating labor and maintenance cost parameters,
general investment parameters, escalation, cost summary, and EPC
details based on your initial economic premises.

Design Basis
The Design Basis worksheet provides summary-level presentations
of income, product revenue, manufacturing costs, margins, raw
material costs, utility costs, and earnings based on your initial
economic premises.
Statements Worksheet
The Statements worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Figures
worksheets, shows results of changes made in the Input
worksheets.
• Timeline of events (dates, periods).
• Payout time, IRR, NPV.
• Present values for individually selected production periods.
• Period-to-period statements with a display of results for a
selectable production period: income-expense statement,
summary cash flow statement, capital expenditures
statement, margins, and NPV graph.

Figures Worksheet
The Figures worksheet, like the EPC, Status and Statements
worksheets, shows results of changes made in the Input
worksheets.
• Flows, by Calendar Period: Net and Cumulative Cash Flow,
Margins, Gross and Operating and Net Income as a % of
Revenue, Product Revenues: Domestic and Export.
• Production: Domestic and Export.
• Distributions, for a selected Production Period: Product
Revenues, Manufacturing Costs, Operating Costs, Fixed
Charges.

The following is an example of one of the distribution graphs on
the Figures worksheet:
Revising Premises The premises on which an economic scenario is based can be

modified on the Project Input and Stream Input worksheets. The
results of modifications are immediately reflected on the Status,
Note: Revisions made in
the workbook have no Statements, and Figures worksheets.
impact on the actual
project basis
To revise premises:
1. Select either the Project Input or Stream Input worksheet.
2. Go to the Select field of the item you wish to change. Pressing
TAB moves the cursor to the next field, while pressing
CLEAR+TAB moves the cursor to the previous field. You can
also use the mouse and arrow keys.
The Select field can contain one of the following symbols (not
case-sensitive):
Enter To denote
B Use of base value.

R Use of revised value.
P Use of period-to-period values on the Stream Input
worksheet.
For example, changing the symbol from “B” to “R” acts as a
toggle between the base and revised value.
In the event a symbol is not entered, the base value will be
used.
As this is an exercise in revising premises, enter “R” (or “r”) in
the Select field.
3. Go to the input field and enter the new value. For percentage
values, simply enter the percentage value. If 0.2% is to be
entered, enter 0.2. If 50% is required, enter 50. If a negative
value is required, for example to indicate construction is to
begin 0.5 periods early, enter a negatively signed value, –0.5.
As you make revisions, notes and other messages are provided to
assure data integrity. Each line item of data entry has at least one
status “flag.” Informational and other messages are provided to
guide you in preparing a consistent set of premises.
Revised value of 10.00% will

be used.
Flag field displays “?” and

Status of Revision field displays
“FIX!” because “r” has been
entered without a revised value
Base value will be used
As soon as you move from the revised field, the revision is

reflected in the Status, EPC, Statements, and Figures worksheets.
Note: Viewing the workbooks in a split screen arrangement
allows you to instantly see the results of modifications. To
do so, click Arrange on the Window menu, select
Horizontal, and click OK. You will likely need to adjust the
zoom to about 50%. Keep ECOSYS.xls minimized.
For example, if you revise the required working capital percentage
on the Project Input worksheet (shown in window at the top of the
split screen pictured below), the Cash Flow bar chart on the
Figures worksheet (shown in the lower window) will change.

Color Coding
• Base Values: green

background, black
text.
• Revised Values: blue
background, black
text.
• Status Values:
yellow background,
red text.
• Text Notes: blue text.
• Error Messages:
yellow background,
red text and flag
symbols.
• Dates of key events:
blue background, red
text.
Saving AEM To save changes to AEM worksheets, it is recommended that you

Workbook save all workbooks by closing Excel and answering Yes when
prompted to save. Saving the worksheets individually has been
found to result in an error when re-launching AEM.
Discussion of The AEM workbooks organize economic premises into two main
Economic Premises categories: project and stream input. This section describes the
concepts behind the various parameters.
Project Input As described previously, base values are listed to the right of the
item category. The Select field and Enter Revised Base Value field
enable alternate studies. First, enter either an “R” (not
case-sensitive) in the Select field to revise the base value. Then
enter a revised value in the Enter Revised Base Value field. You
can then enter a “B” (not case-sensitive) in the Select field to
switch between revised and base value. The Value Used field
shows the current status of your selection.
The following provides additional information about the individual
parameters.
Scenario Reporting
• Title and date data: will be displayed in the headers of the
various worksheets and in the footer of the Status worksheet.

• Currency for Scenario Reporting: every cost value in the
Economic Analysis workbook will be in the Reporting
Currency and converted from the plant location currency by the
designated exchange rate.
• Plant Location Currency: costs in country base location
currency are developed by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE)
and are revised by Analyzer’s Relocation Module (ARM).
Costs in the plant location currency are reported only in the
EPC worksheet if the user elects a reporting currency.
• Reporting Currency: this currency is defined upon entering the
Analyzer’s interactive Economics Module along with an
exchange rate relative to the plant location currency. The
exchange rate may be changed, within limits, in the Project
Input worksheet. This will enable a user to trend a project over
a period of time, should exchange rates vary from the initial
premise. Costs in the reporting currency are reported in all
worksheets.
• Exchange rate: number of currency units of Reporting
Currency per unit of Plant Location Currency. The exchange
rate may be modified in the Project Input worksheet to reflect a
more current or anticipated future value.
• Reporting of Cash flows: in millions of reporting currency
units.
Schedule
A timeline is established with a calendar start date to enable the
study of economic cycles and report the timing of events. A base
calendar start date is automatically generated to accommodate the
base start date of engineering. However, as new premises are
added, the lead-time between start of calendar and start of
engineering may be too short to accommodate other efforts such as
studies and changes to the fixed capital investment. Or, you may
wish to base your reporting calendar on a calendar year basis or
your company’s fiscal year. Once you select the start date of the
reporting calendar, you might wish to review your initial premise
for the start date of engineering.
The engineering start date may be modified as well as the calendar
start date. Messages are provided in this section for lead-time,
pre-planning time and float to help you to establish timing of other
events (see next section on Capital Investment).
• Start Date of the Reporting Calendar: defines (a) the project
timeline, (b) enables the escalation to the start date of the
calendar of costs entering the workbook from Analyzer that are

founded on the “System Cost Base Date”, and (c) enables the
dating of tasks and events, including:
o Strategic planning and decision engineering
o Contractor’s engineering and procurement
o Construction delay/early start of construction
o Plant Start-up
o Start of Production
o Payout
o End of production, salvage of fixed capital
investment (FCI), return of working capital, salvage
of catalyst and chemicals, etc.
• Start Date of Engineering.
• Status of the calendar: lead time, planning time, float time and
other helpful status messages.
Time Period
• Period: the designated period is a year. Only yearly periods can
be accommodated with this release.
• Hours per period: determines stream factor, stream flows per
period. Your initial premise may be revised in the Stream Input
worksheet.
Capital Investment
• Decision Engineering Studies: duration is developed from the
cost entry and placed on the timeline.
• Owner’s Engineering: duration is developed from the cost
entry and placed on the timeline.
• Increment/Decrement to FCI (fixed capital investment, also
known as total installed cost, total project cost) at the System
Base Date: enables studies of FCI such as the trade-off between
inside and outside battery limits (ISBL/OSBL), plant capacity
(with associated change in stream factor – see Stream Input),
and impact of FCI changes during engineering on process
economics, etc. Consider two uses of this feature (1) to
determine the impact on IRR and NPV of a 10% increase in
capital cost and (2) making a utility stream by adding more
capital and setting the utility stream cost to zero. A change here
will impact the phase duration of engineering, procurement and
construction as well as their expenditures along the timeline. In

the AEM workbooks, FCI undergoes a number of adjustments
from the time it is evaluated by the Icarus Evaluation Engine
(IEE), as follows and as reported in the EPC worksheet:
o Initial evaluation in Analyzer performed by
applying design and cost specifications to the list of
project components for the specified production
capacity of the process facility and plant location.
o In the AEM workbooks:
Currency revision of FCI from the Plant
Location Currency to the Reporting
Currency, using exchange rate first
established during Plant Relocation and then
under Scenario Reporting in AEM.
Escalation from “System Base Date” to the
Start Date of the Calendar.
Percentage Increment/Decrement adjustment
(this section).
Escalation of engineering, materials,
construction to the period of expenditure as
determined by the duration of each phase,
progress of each phase duration, and
position along the timeline.
• Start-up costs: included as a capital expense, range of typical
values: 8% to 10% of FCI.
Phase Durations
• Duration of EPC Phase: base value, from Analyzer (CPM-
based planning schedule).
• Delay or Early Start of Construction: enables study of impact
of delay prior to start of construction or early start. The
planning schedule includes early start. Analyzer splits
construction from EPC duration to enable delays to be studied.
A negative delay value results in an early start. As phase
durations are revised, so too are dates of key events along the
timeline. As stream flows and expenditures are moved along
the entire time line by changes in phase durations (or other
revisions), they will be evaluated for escalation or unit
costs/prices that are assigned to each period.

Capital Cost Parameters
• Working Capital, as a percentage of fixed capital investment
(FCI). The range of typical values is 10% to 25% of FCI (10%
to 20% of the total investment, i.e. the sum of FCI and working
capital), but you can enter any percentage. A range of typical
values is provided for guidance.
• Catalyst and Chemicals: for the initial charge, as a percentage
of FCI and salvage value at the end of production.
• Patents and Royalties, as an initial fee and/or fee, escalated for
each period of production and figured on the production for
each period.
• Land: range of typical values: 1% to 2% of FCI.
Manufacturing Cost Parameters

• Operating Charges: if no base value is provided, Analyzer will
estimate and report a cost value based on Plant Operating
Labor. It will split operating charges into costs for Operating
Supplies and Laboratory Charges, which values may be revised
individually as a percentage of Operating Labor.
• Range of typical values
Note: typical ranges
do not define limits on o Operating Supplies: 10% to 20% of Maintenance
user entry.
o Laboratory Charges: 10% to 20% of Operating
Labor
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs

• Number of Shifts: base value determined by project
components, type of facility, etc. might be revised, especially if
Increment/Decrement is made to FCI.
• Operator: number of operators and hourly rate may be revised
from the base value; Total Operating Labor Cost is displayed.
• Supervision: Number of Supervisors and hourly rate may be
revised; Total Supervision Cost is displayed.
• Maintenance: Cost/period is displayed and is reported as a
percentage of FCI, which % may be revised; range of typical
values: 2% to 10% of FCI.

General Investment Parameters
Base values for the following items come from your system input
and may be revised in AEM:
• Tax Rate.
• Interest Rate: used in calculating net present values and payout
time.
• Economic Life of Project: defines the time for depreciation and
should be the same as production life.
• Salvage Value, as a fraction of the initial capital cost. This
value is recovered at the end of the project life.
• Depreciation Method: select from Straight Lines, sum of the
Digits, Double Declining (Balance).
Escalation
Base values of the following items come from your system input
and may be revised.
• Project Capital Evaluation, a single value is expanded in AEM
for individual treatment of expenditures along the calendar
timeline for:
o Engineering
o Materials
o Construction
• Product Escalation: individually for domestic and export
product; period-to-period price/cost values take priority over
escalation.
• By-products: period-to-period price/cost values for an
individual by-product take priority over escalation for that by-
product.
• Raw Materials: period-to-period price/cost values for an
individual raw material take priority over escalation for that
raw material.
• Utilities: period-to-period price/cost values for an individual
utility take priority over escalation for that utility.
• General: for remaining categories.

Stream Input This worksheet allows you to revise base values (assigned or
default) for product, by-product, raw material and utility streams.
Either a single value, applicable to every period (subject to
escalation if a cost), or a period-to-period value (not subject to
escalation) may be assigned. Indicate use of base (“B”), revised
(“R”) for a single value for all periods, or individual period-to-
period values (“P”). Symbols are not case-sensitive.
Phases Along the Project Timeline

The following resulting values guide other input specifications.
• Phase.
• Phase duration.
• Start date.
• Fraction of a period devoted to each phase along the calendar
timeline, which includes the following:
o Start date of each period.
o Year: displayed with each section to maintain
integrity of period-to-period input data.
o Calendar Periods: Period (year) from the start of
basic engineering.
o Periods of Operation – year from start-up.
• Start-up, Payout, Shutdown dates.
Production Operations
Stream Factor, to study the impact of turndown and expansion.
Production
Price of domestic and export product and percentage of production
devoted to export product. The production capacity is reported for
reference.
By-Products
Price of each by-product. By-product rates are reported for the
designated production capacity. The current version is limited to
reporting 25 by-products.

Raw Materials
Price of each raw material. Consumption of each raw material is
reported for designated production capacity. The current version is
limited to reporting 25 raw materials.
Utilities
Price of each utility; for ISBL/OSBL studies, consider revising an
ISBL utility stream cost in lieu of its production by an OSBL unit
and revision of the FCI (Project Input>Capital
Investment>Increment/Decrement to FCI) to account for the OSBL
unit’s FCI – Consumption of each utility is reported for designated
production capacity.

Reviewing Results in Aspen Icarus
Reporter
Accessing Aspen To access Aspen Icarus Reporter:

Reporter
– or –
Click Capital Costs View on the View menu.
The Select Report Type To View dialog box appears.
2. Keep Interactive Reports marked and click OK.

The Reporter imports and loads the reports from Analyzer.

After the reports are loaded, the Aspen Icarus Reporter window
appears.

Aspen Icarus Reporter Menu Bar
File Menu
Import Data – Import project reports. See page 9-67 for instructions.
Run Report – Run selected report. See pages 9-46 (Standard reports),
9-60 (Excel reports), and 9-54 (HTML reports) for instructions.
Open Workbook – Open the last Excel workbook created. See page 9-
63 for instructions.
Create User Database – Export SQL database. See page 9-68 for
instructions.
Exit – Close Aspen Icarus Reporter.
Trend Menu
Add Trend Data to Database – Add the trend data from the project
reports currently loaded in Aspen Icarus Reporter to the trending
database. See page 9-64 for instructions.
Create New Trend in Excel – Export trending database to Excel. See
page 9-65 for instructions.
View Existing Trend Data – Open the trending data workbook in Excel.
See “Data Trending,” pages 9-64 through 9-66, for instructions
Clear All Saved Trends – Clear the trending database. See page 9-64
for instructions.
Which Report Mode? There are four report modes: Standard reports, HTML reports,
Management reports, and Excel reports. All but Management
reports present Capital Costs and Design and Basis reports.
Management reports contains snapshots of project data frequently
requested by project management.
Standard, HTML, and Excel reports do not just present the same
data in different applications. Because of the differing capabilities
of the applications, data is presented differently in each. The
choice of mode may depend upon what you wish to do with the
data at a particular time.

Standard Reports With Standard reports selected in the Report Mode section, the
Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of standard
reports.
Report Descriptions Open the necessary category and sub-category folders and click on
a report to display a brief description of that report in the
Description section.
Aspen Icarus Reporter

displays a description
of the selected report.
See page 9-50 for descriptions of all Standard reports.
Opening a Report Not all of the reports contain each of the features described in this
guide. For example, the Contents view only appears on reports
with multiple sections. In order to see all the features described,
select the Contractor – COA Summary report located in the
following folder:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\COA Summaries

To open the selected report:
Click the Run Report button.
– or –
On the File menu, click Run Report.
– or –
Double-click on the report.
The report window appears.
Navigating If there are multiple sections, a tree-structure Contents view

appears on the left side of the window, allowing you to jump to a
section simply by clicking the section in the Contents.
The arrow buttons on the toolbar allow you to page through the
report:
Next Page Previous Page
Last Page First Page

Since the last page of a report usually contains the totals, clicking
the Last Page button is a convenient way to access them.

Magnification To change the magnification level, click in
the Magnification box and select the desired
level from the menu.
You can also click directly in the
Magnification box (without clicking ) and
then zoom in and out using the up and down
arrow keys on your keyboard.
When viewing the report at large
magnification, you may wish to hide the Contents view by clicking
Toggle Group Tree the Toggle Group Tree button. This makes more room for the
button
report.
Segregating a Cost If the cursor changes into a magnifying glass icon when placed
Section over a cost section’s title or totals, you can double-click to open a
separate tab window containing only that cost section.
For example, under Civil in the Contractor – COA Summaries
report, the cursor changes into a magnifying glass when placed
over the Concrete cost section’s title or totals.
Under Civil in
the Contractor –
COA Summaries
report, the cursor
changes into a
magnifying glass
when placed over
the Equipment cost
section’s title.
Double-clicking on this cost section’s titles or totals opens a

separate tab window.

Here, the
Equipment cost
section is
displayed in a
separate tab
window, where it
can be viewed
and printed apart
from the rest of
the report.
Searching To search the report:

2. Enter the text string for which you want to search and click
Find Next.
The next instance of the text string is framed in red.
Printing To print the report:

The Print dialog box appears.
2. Make any desired changes to the default settings and click

OK.

List of Standard Reports
Capital Cost Reports
Project Summaries
Key Quantity Basis

Project summary (direct and indirect costs). Direct costs presented with key quantities at a
sub-account level. Indirect costs presented at a summary level.
Account Basis
Project summary (direct and indirect costs). Direct costs presented at an account level.
Indirect costs presented at a summary level.
Direct Costs
Cost/Quantity Roll-ups
Overall
Total direct cost (TDC) summary. Direct costs presented with key quantities at a sub-
account level.
Overall – COA Group

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by Code of Account group. Direct costs presented with
key quantities at a sub-account level.
Component (Maxiblock)
Total direct cost (TDC) summary by component / source. Direct costs presented with
key quantities at a sub-account level.
Costs by Class
Total direct cost (TDC) summary by classification. Direct costs presented at an account
level.
COA Summaries
Overall – COA Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by Code of Account. Direct costs presented with key
quantities at a sub-account level.
Contractor – COA Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by Code of Account by contractor. Direct costs
presented with key quantities at a sub-account level.
Report Group – COA Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by Code of Account by report group. Direct costs
presented with key quantities at a sub-account level.
Area – COA Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by Code of Account by area. Direct costs presented
with key quantities at a sub-account level.
- continued -

List of Standard Reports (continued)
Item Summaries
Overall – Item Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary. Direct costs presented with key quantities at an
item/commodity level.
Contractor – Item Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by contractor. Direct costs presented with key
quantities at an item/commodity level.
Report Group – Item Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by report group. Direct costs presented with key
Area – Item Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by area. Direct costs presented with key quantities at
an item/commodity level.
Component – Item Summary

Total direct cost (TDC) summary by component. Direct costs presented with key
Installation Details
Overall – Installation Details

Total direct cost (TDC) details. Direct costs presented with key quantities per
component and function/location.
Contractor – Installation Details

Total direct cost (TDC) details by contractor. Direct costs presented with key quantities
per component and function/location.
Report Group – Installation Details

Total direct cost (TDC) details by report group. Direct costs presented with key
quantities per component and function/location.
Area – Installation Details

Total direct cost (TDC) details by area. Direct costs presented with key quantities per
component and function/location.
Indirect Costs
Project Indirect Summary

Project indirect costs. Indirect costs presented at an intermediate Code of Account level.
Contractor Indirect Summary

Project indirect costs by contractor. Indirect costs presented at an intermediate Code of
Account level.
- continued -

Design and Basis Reports
Project
Design and Cost Basis

Project design and cost basis (Icarus project level specifications)
Area
Design and Cost Basis

Area design and cost basis (Icarus area level specifications)
Component
General Design Data
Sorted by Name
General design data for Icarus designed equipment and other components - sorted by
name.
Sorted by Tag No.

General design data for Icarus designed equipment and other components - sorted by
tag.
Design Data Sheets
Sorted by Name
Design data sheets for Icarus designed equipment and other components - sorted by
name.
Sorted by Tag No.

Design data sheets for Icarus designed equipment and other components - sorted by
tag.
Discipline
Electrical
Motor/Driver List
Listing of equipment motors and other drivers with individual and summarized HP
(KW) requirements.
Other Reports
Project
Component Listings
Summary Key Quantities

Project key quantity listing at a sub-account level. Costs and/or man-hours not
presented.
Key Quantities
Project key quantity listing at a Code of Account level separated by material. Costs
and/or man-hours not presented.
Sorted by Installed Cost (Descending)

This report presents a listing of all project components (or source) and related
information sorted in descending order of direct installed costs.
- continued -

Other Reports (continued)

Project (continued)
Equipment Listings
Sorted by Installed Cost (Descending)

This report presents a listing of all project equipment and related information sorted in
descending order of direct installed costs.
Sorted by Name
This report presents a listing of all project equipment and related information sorted by
name.
Sorted by Classification
equipment classification.
Sorted by Tag No.

tag number.
Component
Summary Key Quantities

Component key quantity listing at a Code of Account level separated by material. Costs
and/or man-hours not presented.
Key Quantities
Component key quantity listing at a Code of Account level separated by material. Details are
further separated by location/function. Costs and/or man-hours not presented.
Discipline
Piping
Line List
A line list report that provides quantity and design information by piping line.
Equipment
Material of Construction Unit Cost

This report presents a listing of all project equipment unit costs per weight unit sorted
in descending order.
Graphical Reports
Project Direct Costs

Graphical presentation of project direct cost totals.
Report Group and Contractor

Graphical presentation of report group and contractor direct costs.
Equipment Account
Graphical presentation of relationships in the equipment account.

HTML Reports With HTML reports selected in the Report Mode section, the
Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of HTML
reports.
Opening an HTML Report

To open the selected report:
1. Do one of the following:
– or –
– or –

A status window tells you when the export is complete and
asks if you would like to view the report now.
2. Click Yes.
Your browser displays the report.
Generating the
report as an .htm file
allows the report to
be sent via e-mail.
Management Reports With Management Reports selected in the Report Mode section,
the Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of
Management reports. These reports are intended to serve as
snapshots of the project scenario.
Opening a Management To open a Management report:

Report
Select the report and do one of the following:
– or –
– or –

The Management Reports Viewer displays the report. Pictured
below is the Detailed Weight Information report, one of the Piping
reports in the Discipline folder.
Other reports, like the Equipment Cost (Total Cost) report shown
below, show simply a bottom-line total.
Exporting Management You can export Management reports to Excel. This is particularly
Reports to Excel useful for when you want to be able to e-mail the report.
To export a Management report to Excel:
1. Click Export to Excel on the Viewer’s File menu.
2. Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you
exported a report.
y If no existing workbook is found, Reporter asks you to
specify a worksheet name (see step 3) and creates a
workbook – either DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter output
folder (if this is your first export to Excel since last re-
booting) or a workbook with the file and path name of the

last workbook to which you exported since starting your
computer.
y If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel
Workbook dialog box appears, asking if you want to
overwrite the existing workbook, append the report to the
existing workbook, or create a new workbook.
Select To do this
Overwrite Reset the existing workbook with the
existing selected report as the only worksheet;
workbook any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to Add the report as another worksheet
existing in the existing workbook; previously
workbook created worksheets will be retained.
Create new Specify a new workbook in which the
workbook selected report will appear as a
worksheet.
Marking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to
let you select a folder and enter a file name.

Note: Do not enter
a file extension or
period when
entering a new
workbook name.
Make your selection and click OK.

3. Enter a name for the worksheet.
Click OK.
The Export Status dialog box informs you when the export is
done and asks if you would like to open the workbook now.
4. Click Yes to open the workbook.

Excel displays the report.

Excel Reports With Excel reports selected in the Report Mode section, the
Reports section displays a tree-structure grouping of Excel reports.
Aspen Icarus
Reporter displays a
description of the
selected Excel
report.
Opening an Excel Report To open a report:

1. Mark the checkbox next to the desired report.
You can mark multiple report checkboxes to open multiple

reports.
Marking a folder’s checkbox will open all of the reports in the
folder.
2. Click the Run Report button or click Run Report from the File
menu.

3. Reporter searches for the last Excel workbook to which you
exported a report.
y If no existing workbook is found and this is your first
export to Excel during this session, Reporter creates
DefaultWB.xls in the Reporter output folder:
...Aspen Icarus 12.2 2003\ic_cache\Reporter\Output
y If no existing workbook is found, but you have exported
from Reporter to Excel since you last started you computer
(to a file that’s since been moved or deleted), Reporter
creates a workbook with the file and path name of the last
workbook to which you exported.
y If an existing workbook is found, the Export to Excel
Workbook dialog box appears, asking if you want to
overwrite the existing workbook, append the report to the
existing DefaultWB.xls workbook, or create a new
workbook.
Select To do this
Overwrite Reset the existing workbook with the
existing selected report as the only worksheet;
workbook any previously created worksheets
will be cleared.
Append to Add the report as another worksheet
existing in the existing workbook; previously
workbook created worksheets will be retained.
Create new Specify a new workbook in which the
workbook selected report will appear as a
worksheet.
Marking Create new workbook expands the dialog box to
let you enter a workbook path and name.

Note: Do not enter
a file extension or
period when
entering a new
workbook name.
After you make your selection and click OK, Excel opens a
workbook displaying the report.
Exporting the report

to an .xls file allows it
to be sent in an
e-mail.

AutoFilter Several of the larger Excel reports generated by Analyzer take
advantage of the AutoFilter feature in Excel. In order to view a
report that includes AutoFilter, open the following report:
Capital Cost Reports\Direct Costs\Item Summaries\Combined
When AutoFilter is available, clicking
next to a column displays a list of
all the different entries made in the
column. Selecting an entry displays
only rows that contain that entry in
the column.
For example, selecting “105 – Misc.
Item Allowance” in the COA
Description column of the Item
Summary Combined report would
display only accounts with Code of
Account (COA) 105.
Selecting Top Ten displays only
items that contain one of the top ten
most frequent entries.
Selecting Blanks (from the bottom of the list) displays only rows
that contain a blank cell in the column, while selecting NonBlanks
displays only rows that contain a value in the column.
Opening Workbook To view the last workbook created without running a new report,
Without Running Report click Open Workbook on the File menu.

Data Trending Data Trending facilitates comparison of scenarios by allowing you
to review capital cost summaries of different scenarios in a single
Excel workbook. If, for example, you created three different
scenarios for a project, you could use the Data Trending feature to
display the direct costs of each on one spreadsheet, with a separate
row for each scenario.
Clearing Trending Since you only wish to compare certain scenarios, the first step is
Database usually to clear the database used to populate the Excel trending
workbook.
To clear the trending database:
1. Click Clear All Saved Trends on the Trend menu.
2. Click Yes to confirm clearing of the data.

The Trending Data Update dialog box tells when this is done.
3. Click OK.
Adding Trend Data to The next step is to add trend data to the database.
Database
To add the current project reports’ trend data to the database:
1. Click Add Trend Data to Database on the Trend menu.
The Trending Data Update dialog box tells you when Reporter
has finished adding the trend data.
2. Click OK.

You will need to add the trend data from the project reports of the
other scenarios you are comparing. For each of the other scenarios,
open the reports in Reporter and complete the Adding Trend Data
to Database instructions above.
Using Reporter’s import function, you can open the other
scenarios’ reports in Reporter without opening the scenarios in
Analyzer. See page 9-67 for instructions.
Creating a New Trend in After you have added the trend data from the Capital Cost reports
Excel of the scenarios you are comparing, you are ready to create a new
trend in Excel.
To create a new trend in Excel:
1. On the Trend menu, click Create New Trend in Excel.
The Export to Excel Trending Workbook dialog box gives you
the choice of either appending the trend data to the existing file
or creating a new file.
2. Make you selection and click OK.

The Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box appears. By
default, all six capital cost categories are marked.

3. Unmark any categories you wish to exclude from the
workbook and click OK.
The Export Status window tells you when the export is
complete and asks if you would like to open the trending
workbook now.
4. Click Yes.
Excel displays the trending workbook containing a spreadsheet for
each of the capital cost categories. Each set of trend data entered
into the trending database is displayed on a separate row. (The
workbooks for any categories excluded at the Export Trend Data
into Excel dialog box are blank).
After having created the trending workbook, you can access it

from Reporter by clicking View Existing Trend Data on the View
menu.

Importing Data into When you have a project scenario open in Analyzer and select
Aspen Icarus Capital Costs (Interactive) from Analyzer, Reporter automatically
Reporter imports that project scenario’s Capital Cost reports as it opens.
However, once you’re at the Aspen Icarus Reporter window, you
can import a project scenario’s Capital Cost reports without having
the project scenario open in Analyzer.
To import a Capital Cost report:
1. Click Import Data from the File menu.
The Import Selection dialog box appears.
2. Use the browse tree to locate the project scenario folder,

which should be at:
…Archives_Analyzer\[Project]\[Project Scenario]
After clicking the project scenario folder, PROJID should
appear in the File set to import section.
3. Select PROJID and click Import.
Reporter imports the data. When complete, the selected scenario’s
reports can be run from Reporter.

Creating a User You can export the Icarus SQL Database, listing the Relation
Database attributes used by the Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), to a
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb) file.
Icarus Reference, To create a user database:
Chapter 35, “Database
Relations”, defines the
Icarus Database
1. Click Create User Database on the File menu.
Relations and the
different attributes Reporter searches for the last .mdb file it created.
under each.
If the file is not found or if this is your first database creation,
the Create User Database dialog box appears with only one
Export Option: Create New Workbook. The lower part of the
dialog box provides fields for selecting a path and filename.
However, if the last created file is found, the Export Options
also include Overwrite Existing Workbook. This option is
marked by default, so the lower part of the dialog box is not
visible until you mark the Create New Workbook checkbox.
2. Select a folder, enter a database name, and then click OK.

Reporter creates the .mdb file.
To review and work with the database, start Microsoft Access and
open the .mdb file.

Reviewing Results in Icarus Editor
Icarus Editor is a fully OLE-compliant, Multiple Document
Interface (MDI) text editor program. It displays Analyzer’s
evaluation reports file (.ccp), which provides estimates of capital
costs across the Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period.
Accessing To display results in Icarus Editor:

You can also run the
evaluation reports from the – or –
Decision Analyzer dialog
box, accessed by clicking On the View menu, click Capital Costs View.
Decision Analyzer on the
Run menu. There, mark the 2. On the Select Report Type To View dialog box, mark the
Develop EPC Reports in File Evaluation Reports checkbox and click OK.
check box and specify a file
name. Using the Decision
Analyzer dialog box, you can
select to have Detailed
Process Economic Reports
run at the same time.
Icarus Editor opens displaying the reports.
Click on the toolbar

to turn the Contents view
on and off (or click
Contents on the View
menu).

The right-hand pane contains the report and the left-hand pane
contains a tree-structure Contents view that lets you jump to
sections of the report.
Printing a Single The Contents view also allows you

Section to print a single section, rather than
the entire report. To do so,
right-click on a section and click the
Print button that appears.
Icarus Editor Toolbar New – open a new document in the Document View
Open – open an existing document
Save – save current document to disk
File Properties – view selected properties of current

document
Print – print the current document
Print Preview – print preview the current document
Page Setup – specify how the current document will be

printed
Cut – cut selected text to windows clipboard
Copy – copy selected text to windows clipboard
Paste – paste contents of windows clipboard into insertion

location
Bold – bold selected text
Italic – italicize selected text
Underline – underline selected text
Select Font – specify font for selected text
Find (Ctrl+F) – find any text string within the current

document
Preferences – set and save your preferences
Toggle Contents – turn OFF/ON the Contents View

Cascade – display multiple documents cascaded
Tile Horizontal – display multiple documents tiled

horizontally
Tile Vertical – display multiple documents tiled vertically
Help Contents – display on-line help

Report Sections
Title Page The Title Page shows the following:
• Estimate Base: financial quarter from which the cost basis is
derived and date Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) was
produced
• Run Date: date and time the project evaluation was run
• Currency symbol used throughout the report
• Telephone numbers to call for technical support
Aspen Analyzer Version: 3.0

Estimate Base: 1st Quarter 2000 (IEE: 29.0)
May 25, 2001
Run Date: 10JUL01-17:52:02
Aspen Analyzer
is a Product of: * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
Aspen Technology/ICARUS Office * Throughout this report *
600 Jefferson Plaza * the Symbol "USD" *
5th Floor * represents U.S. DOLLARS *
Rockville, MD 20852-1150 * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
U.S.A.
Telephone: 301-795-6800
Fax: 301-795-6801
In the United Kingdom: In Japan:

AspenTech Limited AspenTech Japan Co., Ltd.
Birkdale House, The Links Atlas Building
Birchwood 5 Ichibancho
Warrington WA3 7RB Chiyoda-Ku, Tokyo 102
United Kingdom Japan
Telephone: +44-192-584-4400 Telephone: +81-3-3262-1710
Fax: +44-192-584-4444 Fax: +81-3-3264-5425
Web: http://www.aspentech.com
Support: support@aspentech.com
_
Contract Structure The Contract Structure section provides names of contractors and
reporting arrangement.
Table of Contents The Table of Contents lists section names and the page number on
which each starts. The number of sections may vary depending on
the number of Report Groups. If the project contains only one, then
there will be only a single summary. If more than one, there will be
a separate summary for each, plus a summary for the total project.

Project Summary The Project Summary provides an overview of project costs.
Project Data Sheet The Project Data Sheet lists items with separate columns showing
user-entered values and system default values.

Total Manpower The Total Manpower Schedule shows construction manpower
Schedule loading based on the CPM Construction Schedule.
Ways to influence this schedule include:

y Adjusting productivities, shifts per day, length of the
workweek using the General Rates specifications form and
the Craft Rates specifications form. These forms are
accessed in Project Basis view under Project Basis\Basis for
Capital Costs\Construction Workforce.
y Indexing man-hours either at the Project level (Project
Basis\Basis for Capital Costs\Indexing) or at the Area level.
The number of MEN PER DAY for each vertical bar is generated by
summing the labor assigned to all the work items that fall within
the period represented by that bar in the bar chart.

Cash Flow Summary The Cash Flow Summary shows total capital cost spent.
This bar chart schedule assumes that the DESIGN ENG’G AND
PROCUREMENT monies are already spent at the start of construction -
the curve is not truly tied to the CPM schedule. During
construction, capital is then spent for material, direct field labor,
equipment rental and subcontract work, Home and Field Office,
Start-up, etc., as the cost is incurred. By the end of construction,
the TOTAL,AMOUNT given in the Project Summary is indicated here.
Operating costs, such as start-up utilities, raw materials, initial
catalyst charges, etc., are not included.

Project Schedule Data The Project Schedule Data Sheet lists the fabrication and ship
Sheet times for equipment items by class and provides bar charts of the
following:
y General Schedule: Balanced display of Basic and Detail
Engineering, Procurement and Construction (EPC).
y Engineering Schedule: Details for Basic and Detail
Engineering and Procurement; summary for Construction.
y Construction Schedule: Details for Construction- others
summarized.
y Contracts Schedule: Schedule for contractor(s). When a
single contractor is performing all work, this schedule
shows no new information.
Contract Summary The Contract Summary breaks costs down by contractor.

Summaries By Report Summaries By Report Group provides the direct material and labor
Group costs and man-hours by report group for all areas reporting to that
group.
List of Equipment and For each Area, the Equipment and Bulk Material List is divided
Bulk Material By Area into three sections. First there is the Component List, followed by
the Area Bulk Report, and finally the Area Data Sheet. Following
the last Area of each Report Group, there are two more reports -
the Report Group Summary and the Report Group Equipment
Summary.
Appendix A- Design Data Appendix A contains the Design Data Sheets for those items which
Sheets are heavily designed by the system- fewer items will have Design
Data Sheets than are listed in the Component List, above, which
lists all user-added components. Since the Design Data Sheet
details the design on which the cost and installation labor is based,
it is especially useful during calibration of the system’s material

costs and man-hours. It helps you compare your benchmark item to
Icarus’ on an “apples-to-apples” basis.
Appendix B- Detailed Appendix B lists the design and cost details for every component,
Bulk Material and Field whether system-generated or user-added. The results are reported
Manpower Listing in the sequence that the items appear in the Area tree diagram.
Appendix C- Bulk Appendix C consists of one summary of the material and
Material and Field manpower man-hours and cost for all direct costs in the project.
Manpower Summary- by There is one report per Report Group; if there is only one Report
Report Group Group, then this report is eliminated. It is replaced by the project
bill of material (see Appendix D description below).
Appendix D –Bulk Appendix D is a project bill of material (BOM). The format
Material and Field summaries total direct costs for all accounts. Due to the fact that
Manpower Summary - the numbers are large, this is the best source of material costs and
Total Project man-hours for calibration.
Appendix E – Direct Appendix E lists the Icarus default units of measure as well as any
Material and Manpower user modifications.
Summary by Major
Account - Total Project

Reviewing Investment Analysis
If you are using the default Preferences, Analyzer automatically
displays the four Investment Analysis spreadsheets in the Main
Window after you run a project evaluation. You can set
Preferences so that Analyzer does not automatically display the
spreadsheets, in which case you would have to select to view them
as described below.
Viewing Investment To view the Investment Analysis:

Analysis
– or –
Click Investment Analysis View on the View menu.
Use the tabs at the bottom of the window to move among the four
spreadsheets.
Equipment Summary The Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) contains a list of project

components used in the analysis.
For each component, the summary contains the following

information:
y Area Name: The name of the operational unit area.
y Component Name: The name of the project component.

y Component Type: The type symbol for the component.
y Total Direct Cost: The total direct material and labor costs
associated with the project component (including
installation bulks), in the project currency.
Project Summary Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) contains a project summary for
the capital costs (equipment plus bulks) and schedule. This
worksheet also includes operating unit costs (labor wage rates and
utility unit costs), utility flow/use rates (steam/water flow rates,
etc.) and operating and maintenance costs.
Project Summary Input The following information on the Project Summary spreadsheet is
Data user-entered, except where noted:
Project Information
Project Name Analyzer project name
Project Brief description of Analyzer project, from

Description Project Properties
Analysis Date The date and time this analysis was performed
and Time
Simulator The name of the process simulator from which

Type process data was imported
Simulator The version of the process simulator

Version

Simulator The name of the process simulator report file
Report File
Simulator Date and time of the process simulator report

Report Date file
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for the

Analysis Type evaluation
Analyzer Version number for Analyzer system

Version
Project Directory path for the current Analyzer project

Directory
Scenario Name Name of the current scenario (if applicable)
Scenario Description of the current scenario, from

Description Project Title in General Project Data
Capital Cost Evaluation Basis
Date Date of capital costs/schedule analysis
Country Country basis for the capital costs/schedule

analysis
Units of Units of Measure for analysis

Measure
Currency (Cost) System currency symbol which depends on

Symbol the selected country basis
Currency Conversion factor between user-selected

Conversion currency to the currency used by the system
Rate internally for the selected Country basis. For
example, if the US country basis is selected,
the internal system currency is US Dollars.
Therefore, all numbers will be reported in US
Dollars. However, if a currency conversion
rate of 1.5 is specified, all internal values will
be multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
System Cost The capital costs basis date of the system.

Base Date The Adjusted Total Project Cost represents
the calculated capital cost of the project
(calculated at this base date) escalated to the
Start Date of Engineering.

Project Type Project type identified in the standard basis
specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process

evaluator
Plant Location Location of the plant
Time Difference Number of days between the date of the

Between System system’s Cost Base data (e.g., first quarter,
Cost Base Date 2000) and the project’s start date for basic
and Start Date engineering.
for Engineering
User Currency User assigned name for the currency

Name
User Currency User assigned description of the currency

Description
User Currency User assigned symbol of the currency. This is

Symbol the symbol used for reporting the cost results
in the reports.
Descriptions for the following parameters are provided in more

detail under Investment Parameter specifications (page 3-54).
Time Period
Period Duration of time

Description
Operating Hours Number of hours in specified period

per Period
Number of Number of weeks in specified period

Weeks per
Period
Number of Set to 20 periods for investment analysis

Periods for
Analysis

Schedule
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,

Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks

Phase
Length of Start- Number of weeks scheduled for start-up

up Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
Duration of The calculated construction duration in

Construction weeks
Phase
Completion Date The calendar date for the end of EPC

for Construction
Capital Costs Parameter
Working Capital Percentage of total capital expense per

Percentage period required to operate the facility until
the revenue from product sales is sufficient
to cover costs.
Operating Costs Parameters
Operating Indicates the lump-sum cost of operating

Supplies supplies.
Laboratory Indicates the lump-sum cost of laboratory

Charges charges.
User Entered Indicates the user-entered value for total

Operating operating charges.
Charges (as
percentage)

Operating Includes operating supplies and laboratory
Charges (Percent charges. If the user enters a lump-sum value
of Operating for either “Operating Supplies” or
Labor Costs) “Laboratory Charges”, the addition of the
two values will override the “User Entered
Operating Charges”
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for

(Percent of services, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.
Operating Labor
and Maintenance
Costs)
G and A General and administrative costs incurred

Expenses during production such as administrative
(Percent of salaries/ expenses, R&D, product
Subtotal distribution and sales costs.
Operating Costs)
General Investment Parameters
Tax Rate The percent per period of earnings that must

be paid to the government.
Desired Rate of Indicates the desired (i.e., user- entered)

Return return rate, in percent per period, for the
investment.
Economic Life of Indicates the length of time in terms of

Project periods over which capital costs will be
depreciated.
Salvage Value The expected value of an asset at the end of

(Fraction of its usable life for the company. The
Initial Capital difference between an asset’s cost and its
Cost) salvage value is the amount to be
depreciated over the asset’s usable life.
Depreciation There are four depreciation methods allowed

Method in Analyzer: Straight Line, Sum of the
Digits, Double Declining (Balance),
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS).
See “Investment Parameters” in Chapter 3
for a detailed definition of each depreciation
method.

Escalation
Project Capital Rate at which project capital expenses may

Escalation increase expressed in percent per period. If
the addition of Engineer-Procure-Construct
(EPC) period and start-up period is greater
than one whole period, Project Capital
Escalation is used to escalate the capital
expenses for periods beyond the first period.
Products Rate at which the sales revenue from

Escalation products of the facility are to be escalated
(increased) in terms of percent per period.
Raw Material Rate at which the raw material costs of the

Escalation facility are to be escalated (increased) in
terms of percent per period.
Operating and Rate at which the operating and maintenance

Maintenance costs of the facility are to be escalated
Labor (increased) in terms of Escalation percent
per period. The operating labor costs include
operators per shift and supervisory costs.
Utilities User-entered percentages reflecting the

Escalation anticipated utility price increase each period.
Project Summary Output The following OUTPUT data is generated by Analyzer :

Data
Project Results Summary
Total Project The total capital cost investment needed for

Capital Cost the project. If the calculated EPC period is
more than a year, the capital costs
expenditure will be spread out over the
length of the EPC period.
Total Raw The total raw material cost of the facility ex

Materials Cost pressed in terms of cost per period.
Total Products The total product sales of the facility

Sales expressed in terms of cost per period.

Total Operating The operating labor (including
and Maintenance operators/shift and supervisors/shift) and
Labor Cost maintenance labor costs in terms of cost per
period. The maintenance cost includes
maintenance labor and supplies.
Total Utilities The total utilities usage cost expressed in

Cost cost per period.
Total Operating The total of raw material, operating labor,

Cost maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses.
Operating Labor Includes operators per shift and supervisors

Cost per shift costs.
Maintenance Maintenance cost of the equipment

Cost including labor and materials.
Operating Includes operating supplies and laboratory

Charges charges.
Plant Overhead Consists of charges during production for

services, facilities, payroll overhead, etc.
Subtotal Subtotal cost of raw materials, operating

Operating Cost labor, utilities, maintenance, operating
charges, and plant overhead.
G and A Cost General and administrative costs incurred

during production. This is calculated as a
percentage of the Subtotal Operating Costs.
The costs listed under Project Results Summary are broken down
into individual elements under Project Capital Summary:
Project Capital Summary
Purchased The total material cost of process equipment

Equipment and quoted equipment cost items. Material
cost is accounted for in the codes of account
100 - 299.
Equipment The total construction labor cost for setting

Setting equipment in place.

Piping The cost reported for each of these items
Civil indicates the total material and construction
labor cost calculated for the category. The
Steel above cost items may have originated from
Instrumentation two sources:
Electrical 1. Installation Bulks (please refer to Icarus
Insulation Reference).
Paint 2. User: The user can add project
components that create cost items in
these categories. The project
components may be in the following
categories: Plant bulks, Site
development and Buildings.
Other This item is the total of the following costs:
design, engineering, and procurement costs;
material charges (freight and taxes); and
construction field indirect costs (fringe
benefits, burdens, consumables/small tools,
insurance, equipment rental, field services,
field office construction supervision, and
plant start-up).
Subcontracts The total cost of subcontracted work. This

cost item is normally zero in Analyzer.
G and A General and administrative costs associated

Overheads with engineering, materials, and
construction work.
Contract Fee The total cost of contract fees for

engineering, material, construction, any
subcontracted work.
Escalation The total capital costs escalation amount.

This cost item is normally zero in Analyzer.
Contingencies The additional costs required to bring this

project to completion. In Analyzer, this cost
item is automatically calculated based on the
project type and process complexity.
Total Project The total project capital cost of the plant

Cost calculated by the Icarus Capital Costs
Engine as of the “System Cost Base Date”.

Adjusted Total Indicates the Total Project Cost (described
Capital Cost above) adjusted to the Start of Basic
Engineering. The Total Project Cost is
escalated (using the Project Capital
Escalation Parameter) from the system Cost
Base date to the start date of basic
engineering.
Raw Material Costs and Product Sales
Raw Materials Total raw material usage cost per hour

Cost per Hour specified in the Raw Material Specifications
file.
Total Raw Total cost of raw materials per period. This

Materials Cost number is generated by multiplying Raw
Products Sales Total produced product sales expressed in

per Hour cost per hour.
Total Products Total product sales per period. This number

Sales is generated by multiplying Products Sales
per Hour by Operating Hours per Period.
Main Product The main product of the plant is considered

Name to be the product which produces the largest
sales figure per period. This field contains
the description of the main product
(assigned by the user).
Main Product The production rate of the main product.

Rate
Main Product The unit cost rate of the main product.

Unit Cost
Main Product The production basis (or unit of measure) of

Production Basis the main product (LB,
GALLONS, etc.).
Main Product The production rate of the main product per

Rate per Period period .
Main Product The total sales figure of the main product

Sales per period.

By-product Sales The total sales figure per period of the by-
products (i.e., products other than the main
product of the plant).
Operating Labor and Maintenance Costs
Operating Labor
y Operators The number of operators per shift per hour

per Shift necessary to operate the plant.
y Unit Cost The wage rate for each operator expressed

in cost per operator per shift.
y Total Total operating labor cost obtained by

Operating multiplying number of operators per shift by
Labor Cost the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.
Maintenance
Cost/8000 The cost of maintaining the facility

Hours equipment for 8000 hours of operation of
the facility.
Total The total maintenance cost of the facility

Maintenanc per period.
e Cost
Supervision
Supervisors The number of supervisors per shift per

per Shift hour necessary to oversee personnel who
operate the facility.
Unit Cost The wage rate for each supervisor expressed

in cost per supervisors per shift.
Total Total supervising labor cost obtained by

Supervision multiplying number of supervisors per shift
Cost by the unit cost and by Operating Hours per
Period.

Utilities Costs
The utility cost breakdown is given below for electricity, potable

water, fuel and instrument air as well as user defined process
utilities such as steam. The description of each utility includes:
Rate The rate of use of the utility in terms of

amount per hour.
Unit Cost The unit cost of the utility in cost per

amount.
Total Cost The total cost of the utility in cost per

period.
Cashflow Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) calculates the Net Present Value

(NPV), Internal Rate of Return (IRR), Profitability Index (PI),
payback period, etc.
The spreadsheet displays the cashflow information shown by

period. The beginning part of the spreadsheet contains data/results
carried over from the Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
spreadsheet.

Item Description
TW Number of Weeks per Period
T Number of Periods for Analysis
DTEPC Duration of EPC Phase
DT Duration of EPC Phase and Startup
WORKP Working Capital Percentage
OPCHG Operating Charges
PLANTOVH Plant Overhead
CAPT Total Project Cost
RAWT Total Raw Material Cost
PRODT Total Product Sales
OPMT Total Operating Labor and Maintenance Cost
UTILT Total Utilities Cost
ROR Desired Rate of Return/Interest Rate
AF ROR Annuity Factor
TAXR Tax Rate
IF ROR Interest Factor
ECONLIFE Economic Life of Project
SALVAL Salvage Value (Percent of Initial Capital Cost)
DEPMETH Depreciation Method
DEPMETHN Depreciation Method Id
ESCAP Project Capital Escalation
ESPROD Products Escalation
ESRAW Raw Material Escalation
ESLAB Operating and Maintenance Labor Escalation
ESUT Utilities Escalation
START Start Period for Plant Startup
PODE Desired Payout Period (excluding EPC and Startup
Phases). Reserved for future use.
POD Desired Payout Period: Reserved for future use.
DESRET Desired Return on Project for Sales Forecasting:
Reserved for future use.
END End Period for Economic Life of Project.

GA G and A Expenses.
DTEP Duration of EP Phase before Start of
Construction.
OP Total Operating Labor Cost.
MT Total Maintenance Cost.
Sales
A number will appear in this category only after the time allotted
for all prior phases (engineering, procurement, construction and
startup phases) has expired.
SP (Products The total products sales value per period
Sales) calculated in PROJSUM.ICS.
SPF Reserved for future use.

(Forecasted
Sales Annuity
Factor)
SF Reserved for future use.

(Forecasted
Sales)
S (Total Sales) Indicates the amount received per period from

sold products. This number is either SP or SF.

Expenses
Includes both capital and operating expenditures per period listed

below.
CAP (Capital Indicates, by period, total funds spent prior to

Costs) startup.
y Unescalated Cumulative Capital Cost:

Indicates the total capital costs spent through
the current period. This is based on the Total
Project Capital Cost in PROJSUM.ICS.
y Capital Cost: Indicates, by period, the amount
of initial, non-variable costs associated with
the project. This number is based on the Total
Project Capital Cost found in PROJSUM.ICS.
y Cumulative Capital Cost: Indicates capital
expenditures through period n. For example,
the number in period 4 represents the total
capital expenditures beginning in period 1 and
ending in period 4.
y Working: Indicates the amount required to
operate the facility before the revenue from
product sales is sufficient to cover costs.
Working Capital is a lump-sum amount which
takes effect during the start-up period. It is
escalated at rate equal to the Project Capital
Escalation rate.
OP Indicates, by period, the total expenditure on the

(Operating following items necessary to keep the facility
Costs) operating: Raw Materials, Operating Labor Cost,
Maintenance Cost, Utilities, Operating Charges,
Plant Overhead, Subtotal Operating Costs, and G
and A Costs. This number is the Total Operating
Cost imported from PROJSUM.ICS and entered in
this field after capital expenditures cease.

(R)Revenue
Indicates, by period, the amount of money available after capital
and operating expenses have been paid. This number is obtained
by subtracting Capital Costs and Operating Costs from Sales.
DEP Indicates the amount by which the value of the
capital cost decreases each period. The Total
Project Capital Cost is depreciated, via the chosen
depreciation method, over the useful Economic
Life of the facility. The Straight Line Method
assumes that the item will depreciate by a constant
amount over its Economic life. When the Sum of
the Years Method is used, the depreciation expense
decreases during each year of the project’s useful
life. When the Double Declining Balance Method
is used, the project is depreciated in geometric
increments. The Accelerated Cost Recovery
System assumes that the project begins operating in
the second half of the first year, rather than in the
beginning of the first year.
E Indicates the funds available after all expenses
have been paid. This number is obtained by
subtracting the Depreciation and the Interest
Expenses from the Revenue.
TAX Indicates amount owed to the government. This
number is obtained by multiplying the tax rate by
Earnings Before Taxes.
NE Indicates the funds available after taxes have been
paid. This number is obtained by subtracting the
Taxes from the Earnings Before Taxes.
TED Indicates total cash available from project. This
number is computed by adding the Depreciation
Expense to the Net Earnings. Since the
depreciation expense is a non-cash expense (no
cash actually leaves the facility in order to pay the
depreciation expense) adding the depreciation to
the net earnings gives the total cash flow obtained
from the project. Inclusion of the Depreciation
Expenses reduces the amount of taxable income.
TEX Specifies the total expenses of the project including
capital, operating, and any interest expense.
FVI Sums the Sales received through period n and
indicates what the Sales would be if they had been
received in the current period. For example, the

value in period 4 is what the sales in periods 1-4
would have been if all of these funds had been
received in period 4.
PVI Indicates the current worth of all the cash received
through period n. For example, the number in
period 4 represents the value that the sales
generated in periods 1 through 4 would be if those
sales were received in the first period. This number
is obtained by summing all of sales from prior time
periods adding this amount to sales in the current
time period. Using the specified interest rate, this
total is then discounted back to the first time
period.
PVOS If the user enters a number for PODE, this number
indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid
through period n.
PVOP Indicates the current worth of all of the cash paid
through period n. For example, the number in
period 4 represents the value that the expenses paid
in periods 1 through 4 would be if those expenses
were paid in the first period. This number is
obtained by summing all of the outflows (Capital
Costs, Operating Costs, Interest Expense) from
prior time periods and adding this amount to the
outflows in the current period. Using the specified
interest rate, this total is then discounted back to
the first time period .
PVO Represents PVOS or PVOP depending on whether
or not you entered a desired payout period. If you
entered a desired payout period, the basis for the
cash outflow calculation is the Forecasted Sales.
Otherwise, the basis is Product Sales.
PV Indicates the present worth of the Total Earnings
received in the current period. For example, the
number in period 4 represents the value that the
Total Earnings generated in period 4 discounted
back to the first time period.
Final results are shown below:
NPV Indicates the current worth of all the Net Earnings
received through period n. For example, the
number in period 4 represents the value that the
Net Earnings generated in periods 1 through 4 if
those earnings were received in the first period.
This number is obtained by summing all of the Net

Earnings from prior time periods and adding this
amount to the Net Earnings in the current time
period. Using the specified interest rate, this total is
then discounted back to the first time period. The
sign of this value determines the analysis result. If,
in a certain period, the sign of the net present value
is negative, then the proposed investment appears
not to be profitable, thus far. For example, if the
sign of the net preset value is negative in period 3,
then the project does not appear to be profitable
during periods 1, 2, and 3. However, if the sign is
positive, then the project appears to be profitable,
from period 3 onward. If the net present value
equals zero, then the project does not incur any
losses or gains (break-even point).
IRR Is the rate at which the present value of all cash
flows is zero. It is also known as the Discounted
Cash-Flow Rate of Return. This value is calculated
at the “End Period for Economic Life of Project”
(i.e., “Economic Life of Project” and considering
the length of EPC and Startup Period). At the “End
Period for Economic Life of Project”, it is assumed
the salvage value of the plant and the working
capital are recouped. IRR is the after-tax interest
rate at which the organization can borrow funds
and break even at the end of the project life.
MIRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The
internal rate of return is the interest rate which
equates the present value of a project’s expected
cash inflows to the present value of the project’s
expected costs (or outflows). The internal rate of
return for each period is calculated by dividing the
Present Value of Cumulative Inflows by the
Present Value of Cumulative Outflows and raising
this to a power and multiplied by 100. Two criteria
are critical in evaluating the internal rate of return.
First, if the sign of the rate of return is negative, the
project appears not to be profitable. If the sign is
positive, then the project appears to be profitable.
If the rate of return equals zero then the project
incurs no losses or gains (break-even point). In
addition, if the rate of return is greater than the rate
which could be obtained from other opportunities
(i.e., investing in a bank), then the project probably
should be undertaken.

NRR Indicates the profitability of the project. The net
rate of return for each period is calculated by
dividing the Net Present Value by the Present
Value of Cumulative Outflows and then
multiplying the result by 100.
PO Represents the expected number of years required
to recover the original investment in the project.
This row will indicate the length of time that the
facility needs to operate in order to recover the
initial capital investment (total capital cost plus
working capital). If a number is entered for the
Desired Payout Period, the spreadsheet will
determine the amount of Sales necessary to meet
this desired payout.
ARR Measures a project’s contribution to the firm’s net
income. This number is the ratio of the project’s
Average Annual Expected Net Income to its
Average Investment. For example, the Average
Annual Expected Net Income for the fourth period
is determined by summing net earnings from
periods 1 through 4 and divided by 4. The Average
Investment is determined by finding the Salvage
Value, and adding this number to the Total Project
Cost and dividing this total by 2. If the accounting
rate of return is greater than one, then this is an
indication that the project might be a profitable
undertaking. If the sign is negative, then the project
does not appear to be profitable. If this number
equals zero then the project incurs no losses or
gains (break-even point).
PI The profitability index shows the relative
profitability of any project; it shows the present
value of the benefits relative to the present value of
the costs. For each period, this number is computed
by dividing the Present Value of the Cumulative
Cash Inflows by the Present Value of the
Cumulative Cash Outflows. If the profitability
index is greater than one, then the project appears
to be profitable. If this index is less than one, then
the project appears not to be profitable. If this
number equals zero then the project incurs no
losses or gains (break-even point).

Analysis
Analysis results are shown by period. “( - )” indicates the project in
the current period appears unprofitable, while “0” indicates break-
even status.
Depreciation Calculations
This section presents details on the calculation of depreciation.
Executive Summary Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) contains a project summary

intended to be reviewed by executives and other business decision
makers.
It contains the following information:

PROJECT NAME Analyzer project name
CAPACITY Capacity of plant for major product
PLANT Location of plant
LOCATION
BRIEF Brief description of project, from Project
DESCRIPTION Properties

SCHEDULE
Start Date for The beginning date for EPC (engineering,
Engineering procurement, and construction)
Duration of EPC The calculated EPC duration in weeks
Phase
Completion Date The calendar date for the end of EPC
for Construction
Length of Start-up Number of weeks scheduled for start-up
Period beyond the end of the EPC phase
INVESTMENT
Currency Conversion factor between user-selected
Conversion currency to the currency used by the
system internally for the selected Country
basis. For example, if the US country
basis is selected, the internal system
currency is US Dollars. Therefore, all
numbers will be reported in US Dollars.
However, if a currency conversion rate of
1.5 is specified, all internal values will be
multiplied by 1.5 and then reported
Total Project The total capital cost investment needed
Capital for the project. If the calculated EPC
period is more than a year, the capital
costs expenditure will be spread out over
the length of the EPC period
Total Operating The total of raw material, operating labor,
Cost maintenance, operating charges, plant
overhead and G and A expenses
Total Raw The total raw material cost of the facility
Materials Cost expressed in terms of cost per year
Total Utilities Cost The total utilities usage cost expressed in
terms of cost per year
Total Product The total product sales of the facility
Sales expressed in terms of cost per year
Desired Rate of Desired rate of return expressed in terms
Return of percent per year.

PROJECT INFORMATION
Simulator Type The name of the process simulator from
which process data was imported
Version The version of the process simulator
Report File The file name of the process simulator
report file
Report Date Date and time of the process simulator
report file
Economic The name of the Icarus system used for
Analysis Type the evaluation
Version Version number of the Icarus system.
System Cost Base The capital costs basis date of the system.
Date The Adjusted Total Project Cost
represents the calculated capital cost of
the project (calculated at this base date)
escalated to the Start Date of
Engineering.
Project Directory Directory path for the current Analyzer
project
Analysis Date Date investment analysis was run.
Country basis Country basis for the capital
costs/schedule analysis
Project Type Project type identified in General Specs
Design code Selected design code for equipment
Prepared By Identifier for the preparer of the process
evaluator

Using the Reporting The Reporting Assistant feature allows you to create your own
Assistant customized report spreadsheets, combining information from all
other Icarus generated spreadsheets.
To develop a customized spreadsheet file and template:
1. On the Tools menu, click Options and then Reporting
Assistant.
The Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears.
2. On the Report File tab view, click New.

3. In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the report file that
will contain your customized spreadsheet. For example, type
“Custom” as shown below.
Click Save.
4. Switch to the Report Templates tab view.

5. In the Template Files section, click New.
6. In the Save As dialog box, type a name for the template file
(e.g., “summary”) and click Save.
This example
creates a
reporting template
for future use
called
“Summary.tra”
7. In the Template Entries section, click New Entry. In the

Column Label field, enter a label (e.g., “Project Name”) for
the first column on your custom report spreadsheet. The
Display Column box should automatically display “1”.
8. The Entry Definition section defines the data to be entered in
the above column. Select a file name in the Source box, then
enter the column and row of the source data.
For example, in the figure below, the contents of Column C,
Row 8 of Project.ics has been specified to appear in the
customized report spreadsheet’s Project Name column.

9. Follow the same procedure (steps 7 - 8) to add more entries.
You can use a variety of sources. For example, adding the
following entries will result in a report template that uses all
three of the previously discussed .ics files as sources.
Display Source Source
Column Label Column Source Column Row
Project Name 1 projsum.ics C 8
Start Date for
2 projsum.ics C 61
Engineering
Tax Rate 3 projsum.ics C 112
Purchased
4 projsum.ics C 172
Equipment Cost
Total Project
5 cashflow.ics C 14
Cost
Total
Maintenance 6 cashflow.ics C 40
Cost
Completion Date
7 execsum.ics B 17
for Construction
10. When all the template entries are added, return to the Report
File tab view. To the right of the Template File field, click
Browse.
11. Select the newly created template file (e.g., Summary.tra) and
click Open.
12. Click OK to exit the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box.
Generating the Custom To generate a report developed in Reporting Assistant:
Report
1. Run a project evaluation.

2. On the Run menu, click Add Entry for Reporting Assistant.
Analyzer generates the report based upon the template created in
the Reporting Assistant. The data that was entered under List of
Entries on the Reporting Assistant Options dialog box appears as
columns in the spreadsheet.
Every time Add Entry for Reporting Assistant is selected, the latest
data is entered on the bottom row of the report. This way, you can
compare results.

Item Evaluation
Analyzer allows you to run an evaluation on a single component
and view an Item Report. The type of Item Report displayed can be
selected in Preferences (see page 2-32).
To run an item evaluation and display the Item Report:
List view, and then click Evaluate Item on the pop-up menu.
Analyzer runs the item evaluation.
2. Right-click on the component and click Item Report on the
pop-up menu.
You can also click the Evaluate button on the Component
Specifications form to run the item evaluation and display the Item
Report.
If the evaluation has

already been run, you
only have to select Item
Report. Analyzer displays the Item Report in the Main Window.
You can include multiple components in the Item Report: on the

List view (area level), select the desired components, right-click on
one of the components, and click Item Report on the pop-up
window. The resulting Item Report lists individually the summary
data (cost or sizing) for each selected component.

Automatic Item You can have Analyzer automatically run an item evaluation
Evaluation whenever you click OK or Apply on a Component Specifications
form.
To turn automatic item evaluation on and off:
1. On the Tools menu, point to Options.
2. On the Options sub-menu, a check appears next to Automatic
Item Evaluation when the feature is turned on. Clicking
Automatic Item Evaluation turns the feature on and off.

Index
location, Preferences 2-34

. AEM See Analyzer Economics Module
(AEM)
.D01 file extension, Icarus Object files 3-81
Agitated tanks
.EML file extension, importing cost libraries
sizing 6-15
7-18
Air coolers
.UCL file extension, importing cost libraries
design criteria specifications 3-38
7-18
sizing 6-13–6-14
Air supply
2
instrumentation loop 5-17
2/3 rule 3-38, 6-21 All Crafts Percent of Base
General Wage Rates 3-19
A Allow Docking command 2-19
About command Analyze Economics
Help menu 2-24 discussion of economic premises 9-24–9-
Accelerated Cost Recovery System (ACRS) 31
depreciation methods, investment Analyzer 2.0B
parameters 3-55 importing from 2-6–2-7
Account Basis Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-11–
report descriptions 9-39 9-31
ACRS See Accelerated Cost Recovery error when re-launching 9-24
System (ACRS) loading 9-11
Activate Custom Model option RESULTS workbook 9-16–9-22
Preferences 2-33 revising premises 9-22–9-23
Add Area command 5-2 saving workbooks 9-24
Add button SPECS workbook 9-12–9-16
Pipe Details form 5-13 Analyzer Plant Relocation Module (ARM)
Wage Rate Info form 3-21 8-5–8-8
Add Project Component command 5-3 Analyzer Scale-Up Module (ASM) 8-2–8-4
Add Stream command Anchor bolts
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 4-49 civil installation bulk 5-14
Add Trend Data to Database command Apply 2/3 Rule for Design Pressure
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-53 Design Criteria 3-38
AdminDir Apply button
Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Index • I-1

Develop Stream specifications form 3-69 B
Installation Bulks form 5-9 Backup options
Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form 5-10 Preferences 2-32
Area Base Design Value
icons 2-11 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
List view display of items 2-14 22, 9-23
Area Information dialog box 5-2 Base stream 3-71
Area type 5-2 BaseCase, default scenario name 2-3
Areas Basis
adding 5-2 Map dialog box 4-24
deleting 5-23 Basis for Capital Costs
importing 5-19 construction workforce 3-18
mapping 4-23 indexing 3-22
pop-up menu 5-3 input units of measure 3-5
re-numbering 5-23 introduction 3-5
simulator 4-17, 4-24, 4-30, 4-44 libraries 3-79
ARM See Analyzer Plant Relocation output (reports) units of measure
Module (ARM) customization 3-7
ASM See Analyzer Scale-Up Module selecting defaults 3-79
(ASM) BFD See Block Flow Diagram (BFD)
Aspen Icarus Reporter BinCacheDir
Data trending 9-53 location, Preferences 2-34
Excel reports 9-44–9-52 Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 4-18–4-20
HTML reports 9-43–9-44 Bottom sump height
importing data 9-56 towers, design criteria 3-39
Management reports 9-44–9-48 Buildings 5-1
menu bar 9-34 By-products
report mode 9-34 escalation 9-29
standard reports 9-35–9-42 Stream Input worksheet 9-30
Aspen Plus
link to IPE 4-5 C
map specs 3-31
models used for tower sizing 6-27 Cached project information 2-27
simulator report preparation 4-2–4-6 Cancel button
template 4-2 Develop Stream specifications form 3-69
tower input information 6-33, 6-38 Capacity
AspenTech changing 8-1, 8-2
Aspen Plus simulator program 3-31, 6-27, Capital Cost errors 9-10
6-33 Capital cost parameters
contacting 1-9–1-11 Project Input worksheet 9-28
Online Support Center 1-8 Capital Cost Reports 9-39
Auto Filter 9-52 Capital Costs
Automatic Item Evaluation checked reports 2-31
command Capital Costs View
Tools menu 2-24, 9-93 View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46
Automatic task backup 2-32 Capital investment
Project Input worksheet 9-26
I-2 • Index Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Capture worksheet Components view
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-16 Palette 2-16, 2-17
Cascade command ComponentsDir
Window menu 2-12, 2-24 location, Preferences 2-34
Cash Flow Summary Compressors
reports, Icarus Editor 9-63 design criteria specifications 3-37
Cash flows sizing 6-1, 6-16
Project Input worksheet 9-25 Computer name
Cashflow spreadsheet 9-77–9-85 scenario information 2-8
CASHFLOW.ICS Configuration options
Cashflow spreadsheet 9-77–9-85 mapping 4-26, 4-31
ChemCAD Construction
map specs 3-32 workforce 3-18
simulator report preparation 4-6–4-8 Construction schedule
Chemstation 3-32, 4-6–4-8 Project Schedule Data Sheet 9-64
Civil Contingencies
installation bulk 5-14 General Specs 3-9, 3-10
material costs and man-hours 5-9 Project Summary spreadsheet
Clear All Saved Trends command (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-74
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-53 Contingency Percent field
ClipboardDir General Specs 3-10
location, Preferences 2-34 Contractor
Close command reports 9-39, 9-40, 9-42, 9-64
File menu 2-22 Control centers
COA See Code of Account (COA) instrumentation loop 5-17
COADir Control Panel worksheet
location, Preferences 2-34 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-12
Code of Account (COA) Control signal
allocating UCL item costs to 7-9 instrumentation loop 5-17
report descriptions 9-39 Control valve
Cold Inlet Stream field 6-10 instrumentation loop 5-16–5-17
Cold Outlet Stream field 6-10 Copy command
Color coding project components 5-21
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-66 Cost libraries
Component Specifications form 5-7 deleting 7-20
Component Listings duplicating 7-19
report descriptions 9-41 Equipment Model Library (EML) 7-2–7-6
Component Map Information 4-28, 4-31 importing 7-18
Component Name 4-29 introduction 7-1
Component Specifications form Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-7–7-16
accessing 5-6 Cost/Quantity Roll-ups
color coding 5-6, 5-7 report descriptions 9-39
Options button 5-7, 5-8 Costs
P&ID button 5-12, 5-15 Design Basis worksheet 9-20
Component Status 4-29 distribution graph, Figures worksheet 9-21
Components See Project components EPC worksheet 9-17

Project Summary report, Icarus Editor 9- Custom Model
61 instructions 5-24–5-28
Standard Reports, Aspen Icarus Preferences 2-33
Reporter 9-39–9-38 Custom Tasks command
total direct cost, Equipment Summary Tools menu 2-24
(EQUIP.ICS) 9-67 Cut command
total project cost, Cashflow spreadsheet project components 5-21
(CASHFLOW.ICS) 9-78 Cyclone inlet linear velocity
Country Base 2-4 design criteria specifications 3-48
Craft code 3-22
Craft Rates 3-21 D
Create New Trend in Excel command
Data trending
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-54
Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-53
Create Stream dialog box 3-75, 3-77, 6-4, 6-
DC_V worksheet
6
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-13
Create tab view
Decision Analyzer command
Develop Streams dialog box 3-75
Run menu 2-22, 8-2, 8-5, 9-11, 9-58
Create User Database command
Decision Analyzer dialog box 8-2, 8-5, 9-11,
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34, 9-
9-58
57
Decision Center worksheet
Create User Database dialog box
Delete button
Creating
Pipe Details form 5-13
project scenarios 2-2
Delete Mappings command 4-30
streams 3-68–3-78, 4-49–4-50
Deleting
Crushers
areas 5-23
sizing 6-17
components 5-22
Crystallizers
mappings 4-30
sizing 6-18
projects and project scenarios 2-26
Currency
Density
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
Develop Stream specifications form 3-71
11, 9-16
Depreciation method
Analyzer Relocation Module (ARM) 8-2,
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
8-3
9-78, 9-81, 9-85
General Project Data 2-4–2-5, 3-3
investment parameters, project basis 3-54
Currency Conversion Rate
General Project Data 2-5, 3-3
Project Summary spreadsheet
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-68
Design and Basis Reports 9-41
Currency Name
Design Criteria
General Project Data 2-4
libraries 3-79
Currency Symbol
selecting defaults 3-79
General Project Data 2-4
Design Criteria specifications 3-35
Icarus Editor 9-60
Design Data Sheets
report descriptions 9-41
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-68
Design pressure

applying 2/3 rule for 3-38 Draw Disconnected Stream feature 4-51
design criteria specifications 3-35 Dryers
Design temperature sizing 6-19
design criteria specifications 3-36 Duct installation bulk 5-14
tower sizing 6-35 Dust collectors
Desired rate of return sizing 6-19
9-78 E
Executive Summary spreadsheet
Economic Analysis workbook
(EXECSUM.ICS) 9-86
discussion of economic premises 9-24–9-
31
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS)
Economic Life of Project
spreadsheet 9-71
Detailed Process Economics reports 9-66
Economic premises
Develop EPC Reports in File
discussion of 9-24–9-31
Decision Analyzer dialog box 9-58
ECOSYS.xls 9-12, 9-23
Develop Equipment Library Model form 7-4
Edit Connectivity feature
Develop Product Specifications dialog box
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 4-48
3-65
Electrical
Develop Raw Material Specifications dialog
installation bulk 5-17
box 3-61
material costs and man-hours 5-9
Develop Schedule command
reports, discipline 9-41
Run menu 2-22
unit cost per KWH 3-59
Develop Stream specifications form 3-69, 6-
Electricity
4, 6-6
operating unit costs specifications 3-59
Develop Streams dialog box 3-75, 3-76, 6-3,
E-mail
6-5
reports 9-44, 9-45, 9-51
Develop Utiltiy Specifications dialog box 3-
technical support 1-9–1-11
49
EML See Equipment Model Library (EML)
Direct costs
Engineering schedule
capital cost reports 9-39
Project Schedule Data Sheet 9-64
graphical reports 9-42
Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC) period
Directories
project, locations - Preferences 2-34–2-36
9-78
Disconnect command
streams 4-51
Disconnected Streams dialog box 4-51
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-70
Discounted Cash-Flow Rate of Return See
relationship to length of start-up period 3-
Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
58
Display results after evaluation
reports, Icarus Editor 9-58–9-65
Preferences 2-31
EPC See Engineer-Procure-Construct (EPC)
Docking 2-19
period
Documentation 1-8
EPC Phase
Domestic freight
project location's affect on 3-12
EQUIP.ICS
relocation's affect on 8-8
investment analysis spreadsheets 9-66

Equipment Excavation and backfill
adding 5-3 civil installation bulk 5-14
design allowance 3-13 Excel
reports, discipline 9-42 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
rotating spares 3-13, 8-8 11–9-31
Equipment Account Excel Custom Model files 5-24–5-28
graphical reports 9-42 Excel reports
Equipment Listings Auto Filter 9-52
report descriptions 9-42 descriptions 9-49
Equipment Model Library (EML) opening 9-49
adding an item to 7-3 Exchange rate See Also Currency
adding EML item as a component 7-5 Conversion Rate
creating 7-2 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
definition 7-1 17, 9-25
EMLDir, location 2-34 EXECSUM.ICS 9-85–9-87
Equipment Summary Executive Summary spreadsheet 9-85–9-87
investment analysis spreadsheets 9-66 Exit command
ERROR message 9-10 Analyzer File menu 2-22–2-24
Escalate command Export to Excel Trending Report dialog box
Library dialog box 7-17 Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-54
Escalate Costs dialog box 7-18 Export to Excel Workbook dialog box
Escalation Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-46, 9-50
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) Export to Icarus 2000 command
9-78 File menu 2-22
cost libraries 7-17 Export Trend Data into Excel dialog box
investment parameters, project basis 3-55 Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-54
Project Basis worksheet, Analyzer External Simulation Import Tool command
Economics Module (AEM) 9-19 Tool menu 2-24, 4-10
Project Summary spreadsheet F
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72
Facility Type
Estimate Class 3-3
Estimate Date 3-4
FATAL message 9-10
EU country base 2-4–2-5
Fax numbers
Euro
technical support 1-9–1-11
currency, General Project Data 2-5
Figures worksheet
Evaluate button
Component Specifications form 5-7, 9-92
File menu
Evaluate Item command 9-92
Analyzer menu bar 2-22
Evaluate Project command
Aspen Icarus Reporter menu bar 9-34
Run menu 2-22, 9-9
Filters
Evaluation
sizing 6-20
item 9-92
Fit into one page
Preferences 2-31
Zoom dialog box 4-21
project 9-9
Float in Main Window command 2-19
Evaluation Engine 6-25, 9-57
Flow rate units

product specifications 3-66 Green borders
Fluid classes Component Specifications form 5-7
utility streams 3-50 Grid Settings command
Foaming tendency View menu, PFD 4-46, 4-47
trayed towers, design criteria 3-41 Grids
Foreman wage rate viewing in Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 4-
general wage rates 3-21 22
Form work viewing in Process Flow Diagram (PFD)
civil installation bulk 5-14 4-47
Fraction basis 3-72 Grids Visible command
Freeze Content button View menu, BFD 4-22
Properties Window 2-18 Grout
Freight civil installation bulk 5-14
General Specs 3-10
Fuel H
operating unit costs specifications 3-60
Heat exchangers
Furnace fractional efficiency
heat exchanger design criteria 3-38
mean temperature difference (MTD) 6-22
minimum overdesign factor 6-22
G
sizing 6-1–6-12, 6-21–6-24
G and A expenses utility specifications 3-48
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) Help menu 2-24
9-79 Helper wage rate
investment parameters, project basis 3-57 general wage rates 3-20
Project Summary spreadsheet HETP (height equivalent of a theoretical
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71, 9-73 plate)
Galvanizing (for steel) packed towers, design criteria 3-40
paint installation bulk 5-18 Hot Inlet Stream field 6-8
General and administrative costs Hot Outlet Stream field 6-10
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) HTML reports
9-79 descriptions 9-43
investment parameters, project basis 3-57 Item Report 2-31
Project Summary spreadsheet opening 9-43, 9-44
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71, 9-73 Hyprotech 3-33, 4-8–4-12
General Design Data HYSIM
report descriptions 9-41 map specs 3-33
General investment parameters models used for tower sizing 6-27
Project Input worksheet 9-29 simulator report preparation 4-8–4-10
General Project Data HYSYS
creating a new project scenario 2-4 map specs 3-33
project specifications 3-3 models used for tower sizing 6-27
General Specs
Basis for Capital Costs 3-9–3-18 I
General wage rates 3-18
Icarus Editor
Gray borders
printing report 9-59
Component Specifications form 5-7
printing report section 9-59

reviewing results 9-58–9-65 civil 5-14
toolbar 9-59 duct 5-14
Tools menu 2-24 electrical 5-17
Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) 6-25, 9-57 instrumentation 5-14
Icarus interface 2-10–2-20 insulation 5-18
Icarus Object files 3-81 introduction 5-8
Icarus Project Component Selection dialog material man-hour additions 5-11
box 4-28, 7-5, 7-11, 7-13 paint 5-18
IEE See Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE) pipe details 5-11
Import command pipe spec 5-11
File menu 2-22 Preferences 2-32
Libraries view, Palette 3-81, 7-18 steel 5-14
Import Connected Streams option Installation Details
Preferences 2-33 report descriptions 9-40
Import Data command Instrument volumetric model 5-14–5-16
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34 Instrumentation
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-56 installation bulk 5-14
Import Installation Bulks option loop adjustments 5-16–5-17
Preferences 2-33 material costs and man-hours 5-9
Import Selection dialog box Insulation
Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-56 installation bulk 5-18
Importing material costs 5-9
areas 5-19 Interactive sizing 6-1–6-12
components 5-19 Interactive Sizing form 4-25, 4-29, 6-8, 6-10
project from previous version 2-6–2-7 Interest rate
scenarios 5-20 Project Input worksheet 9-29
specification files 3-81 Interface layout 2-10–2-20
Inch-Pound (IP), units of measure 2-3, 3-80, Save Window States option 2-31
3-81 Internal Rate of Return (IRR)
Incomplete items 2-14 Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
Indexing 9-77, 9-83
Project Basis specifications 3-22 Statements worksheet 9-20
Indicating signal Status worksheet 9-16
instrumentation loop 5-17 Intrument air
Indirect costs operating unit costs specifications 3-60
general wage rates 3-19 Investment Analysis
Project Summary spreadsheet project specifications 3-53–3-67
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-74 Investment Analysis View command
reports 9-40, 9-74 View menu 2-23, 9-66
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-1 Investment Parameters
Indirects libraries 3-79
general wage rages 3-19 project specifications 3-53
INFOmational message 9-10 selecting defaults 3-79
Input units of measure specifications 2-3 IP, units of measure 2-3, 3-80, 3-81
Installation bulks IPE 5.0/5.1
accessing 5-8 importing from 2-6–2-7

IRR See Internal Rate of Return (IRR) Design Criteria 3-79
Item evaluation 9-92 Equipment Model Library (EML) 7-2
automatic 9-93 moving to another directory 3-83
Item Report Project Component Map Specifications 3-
instructions for running 9-92 79
Preferences 2-31 specification libraries 3-79–3-82
Item Report command 9-92 Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-7
Item Summaries Utility Specifications 3-79
report descriptions 9-40 view 2-16
Line List
J report descriptions 9-42
Liquid entrainment method 3-45
Job Number field 3-4
Liquid Mass Density
JP country base 2-4–2-5
Developing Stream specifications form 3-
Junction boxes
72
instrumentation loop 5-17
List view
description 2-14
K
mapped components 4-29
KbaseLog.txt simulator file name 4-16
Preferences, Logging 2-36 Status column 4-29, 5-4
Key Quantities Load Data button
report descriptions 9-41, 9-42 toolbar 2-20
Key Quantity Basis Load Data command 4-16
report descriptions 9-39 Loaded wage rates
Kister, Henry Z. 6-38, 6-39, 6-40 operating unit cost specifications 3-59
K-YEN (KY) Locations
currency, General Project Data 2-5 plant relocation 8-1, 8-5–8-8
Preferences 2-34
L project, General Specs 3-10
Labor cost per unit Logging
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-9 Preferences 2-36
Labor hours per unit Loops
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-9 instrumentation installation bulks 5-14
Labor Unit Costs modifications 5-16–5-17
operating unit cost specifications 3-59
Laboratory charges M
investment parameters, project basis 3-56 Magnification
Project Input worksheet 9-28 Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 4-20–4-21
Project Summary spreadsheet Main Window
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-70, 9-71 display options 2-19
Ladders, steel - installation bulks 5-14 interface, default position 2-10
Length of Start-up Period printing 2-22
investment parameters, project basis 3-58 understanding 2-12–2-13
Libraries Management reports 9-44–9-48
Basis for Capital Costs 3-5, 3-79 Man-hour indexing 3-22
cost libraries 6-48–7-20 Manpower Productivity Expert (MPE)

Tools menu 2-24 Modify command
Manufacturing cost parameters simulator block 4-17
Project Input worksheet 9-28 streams 4-51
Map All Items option Modify tab view
Map dialog box 4-24 Develop Streams dialog box 3-68
Map command Motor/Driver List
pop-up menu 4-23 report descriptions 9-41
Map dialog box 4-24 Multi-core runs
Map Items button instrumentation loop 5-17
toolbar 2-20, 4-23 MUSE
Map Items command design criteria specifications 3-37
Run menu 2-22, 4-23
Map Selected Item(s) option N
Map dialog box 4-24
Net Present Value (NPV)
Mapping simulator data
instructions 4-23–4-30
9-82
Mapping simulator models
Statements worksheet 9-20
units of measure mapping specs 3-26–3-
Status worksheet 9-16
29
Net Rate of Return (NRR)
unsupported models 2-33
Mass flow
9-84
New command
Material and man-hour
File menu 2-2, 2-6, 2-22
additions 5-11
New Component Information dialog box 5-4
adjustments 5-9
New Project button
Material and man-hour adjustments
toolbar 2-2, 2-20
installation bulks 5-26
NPV See Net Present Value (NPV)
Material and man-hour indexing 3-22
NRR See Net Rate of Return (NRR)
Material cost per unit
Number of Periods for Analysis
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-9
Material costs
Number of shifts
indexing 3-22
general wage rates 3-19
Material Index Info form 3-23
Material streams
Number of Weeks per Period
product specifications 3-64
Maxiblock
report descriptions 9-39
O
Menu bar
Analyzer 2-10, 2-22–2-24 OK button
Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34 Develop Stream specifications form 3-69
Metric, units of measure 2-3, 3-80, 3-81 Installation Bulks form 2-32, 5-9
Microsoft Access Database (.mdb) file 9-57 Mat'l Man-hour Adjustments form 5-11
Mixture button Online Technical Support Center 1-8
Develop Stream specifications form 3-70 Open button
Mixture Specs toolbar 2-8, 2-20
developing streams 3-72 Open command
File menu 2-8, 2-22

Palette Projects view 2-9 Project Summary spreadsheet
Open Existing Project dialog box 2-8 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-70, 9-71
Open Workbook command Operating temperature
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34, 9- tower sizing 6-34, 6-35
52 Operating Unit Costs
Opening an existing project 2-8 libraries 3-79
Operating and Maintenance Labor project basis specifications 3-58–3-60
Escalation selecting defaults 3-79
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) Options button
9-78 Component Specifications form 5-7, 5-8
investment parameters, project basis 3-56 Options menu
Project Summary spreadsheet Component Specifications form 2-32
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72 Options sub-menu
Operating charges Tools menu 2-24
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) Order Number 5-22
9-78 Overall column efficiency
investment parameters, project basis 3-56 design criteria specifications 3-43
Project Input worksheet 9-28 sizing procedures 6-36
Project Summary spreadsheet Overdesign factor
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-73 heat exchangers 3-38, 6-11, 6-22
Operating costs pumps 3-37, 6-24, 6-25
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) sizing message 6-11
9-80 Overtime
Executive Summary spreadsheet 9-86 hours,general wage rates 3-20
Figures worksheet 9-21 rate, general wage rates 3-20
operating unit cost specifications, project Overwrite Project Backups option 2-31,
basis 3-58–3-60 2-32
product specifications, project basis 3-65
Project Summary spreadsheet P
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-70, 9-73
P and I Design Level
raw material specifications, project basis
General Specs 3-11
3-61
P&ID button 5-11, 5-14
Operating hours per period
Packed towers
Paint
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-69
material costs 5-9
total operating labor cost calculation 9-76
Palette
total product sales calculation 9-75
Components view 2-16, 2-17, 5-3
total supervision cost calculation 9-76
cost libraries 7-2–7-20
Operating labor and maintenance
deleting a project from 2-26
description 2-16–2-17
Operating mode
Docking and undocking 2-19
dragging components from 5-3
Operating supplies
floating in Main Window 2-19
hide/display 2-17
interface, default position 2-10

Libraries view 2-16, 3-79–3-82, 7-2–7-20 toolbar 2-21, 4-48
opening projects 2-9 Ports Visible command
Projects view 2-9, 2-16, 2-17, 2-26, 2-28, View menu, PFD 4-46
2-34 Potable water
Recent Items folder 5-3 operating unit costs specifications 3-60
specification libraries 3-79 utilities costs, Project Summary
unlocking projects from 2-28 spreadsheet (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-77
View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46 Pounds (PS)
parity exchange rate currency, General Project Data 2-5
plant relocation 8-8, 8-2, 8-4–8-5 Preferences
Parity exchange rate accessing 2-30
plant relocation 8-5 Backup tab view 2-32
Paste command buttons 2-30
project components 5-21 description 2-30
Patents and royalties General tab view 2-30
Project Input worksheet 9-28 introduction 2-30
Period Description Locations tab view 2-34–2-36
investment parameters, project basis 3-54 Logging tab view 2-36
Phase durations Process tab view 2-33
Project Input worksheet 9-27 prompts 2-30
Phases saving window states 2-31
Stream Input worksheet 9-30 Tools menu 2-24
Pile types 3-14 Prepared By field
Pipe Details installation bulk 5-11 General Project Data 3-4
Pipe Spec installation bulk 5-11 Pressure vessel design code
Pipe volumetric model 5-12–5-13 General Specs 3-11
Piping Primary fluid component 3-70, 3-72, 6-4, 6-
installation bulks 5-11–5-13 16
material costs and man-hours 5-9 Print command
reports, discipline 9-42 Analyzer File menu 2-22
volumetric model 5-12 Print Preview command
Piping and Instrumentation Drawings File menu 2-22
(P&ID) manual 5-11, 5-14 Print Setup command
Plant bulks 5-1 File menu 2-22
Plant capacity Printing
changing 8-1, 8-2 Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-38
Plant location Block Flow Diagrams (BFD) 4-21
changing 8-1, 8-5–8-8 forms and reports in Main Window 2-22
Plant overhead Icarus Editor 9-59
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) Pro/II
9-78 R/R minimum 3-39
investment parameters, project basis 3-56 PRO/II
Project Summary spreadsheet map specs 3-34
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71, 9-73 models used for tower sizing 6-27
Platforms, steel - installation bulks 5-14 simulator report preparation 4-13–4-14
Ports Visible button Problem description

SimSci report preparation 4-13 Project Summary spreadsheet
Process Complexity (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72
General Specs 3-9, 3-10 Profitability Index (PI) 9-84
Process connection Project areas See Areas
intrumentation loop 5-17 Project Basis
Process Control Basis for Capital Costs 3-5–3-22
contingency affected by 3-13 default specifications 3-79
General Specs 3-10 General Project Data 3-3
Process Description introduction 3-1
contingency affected by 3-13 Project Properties 3-2
equipment design allowance affected by specification libraries 3-79
3-13 Project Basis view 2-11
General Specs 3-9, 3-10 Project Basis worksheet
Process Design specifications 3-26–3-52 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-19
Process equipment 5-1 Project Capital Escalation
Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 4-45–4-51 Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
Process Fluids 9-78
investment parameters, project basis 3-58 investment parameters, project basis 3-55
Process options Project Summary spreadsheet
Preferences 2-33 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72
Process Stream field Project capital evaluation
product specifications 3-66 Project Input worksheet 9-29
raw material specifications 3-62 Project Component Map Preview dialog box
Process vessel height to diameter ratio 4-25, 4-28, 4-31
design criteria specifications 3-44 Project Component Map Specifications
Product escalation dialog box 3-29
Project Input worksheet 9-29 libraries 3-79
Product Specifications process design 3-29–3-34
libraries 3-79 selecting defaults 3-79
project specifications, Investment Project components
Analysis 3-64 adding 5-3
selecting defaults 3-79 component specifications 5-6
Production connecting to stream 4-48
Stream Input worksheet 9-30 copying 5-21
Production operations deleting 5-22
Stream Input worksheet 9-30 Equipment Model Library (EML) items 7-
Productivity 5
adjustment, general wage rates 3-19 importing 5-19
craft wage rate 3-22 installation bulks 5-8
fixed rate for all crafts, general wage rates re-numbering 5-22
3-20 reports 9-39–9-38
percent of base, general wage rates 3-20 Unit Cost Library (UCL) item 7-11
Products Escalation Project Data Sheet
Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS) reports, Icarus Editor 9-61
9-78 Project Description
investment parameters, project basis 3-56 Project Properties 2-3, 3-2

Project Summary spreadsheet Project Schedule Data Sheet
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-67 reports, Icarus Editor 9-64
Project Direct Costs Project Summary
graphical reports 9-42 reports, Icarus Editor 9-61
Project directories spreadsheet, reviewing investment
alternate directories 2-34 analysis 9-67–9-77
copying 2-29 Project Title 3-3, 9-68
default, setting 2-35 Project Type
Project evaluation contingency affected by 3-13
Preferences 2-31 Executive Summary spreadsheet 9-87
running 9-9 General Specs 3-10
scan for errors 2-31, 9-10 power distribution affected by 3-15
Project Explorer 2-11 Project Summary spreadsheet
Docking and undocking 2-19 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-69
floating in Main Window 2-19 Project view 2-11
interface, default position 2-10 Projects
relation to Palette 2-16 copying 2-29
View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46 creating 2-2–2-5, 2-2
Project in use - message 2-28 deleting 2-26
Project Input worksheet opening existing 2-8
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9- view 2-16, 2-17
14, 9-22–9-23 PROJSUM.ICS spreadsheet
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9- description 9-67–9-77
24–9-29 specifications 3-62, 3-64, 3-65
Project Location Prompts
domestic freight cost affected by 3-12 Preferences 2-30
equipment rotating spares cost affected by Properties Window
3-13 description 2-18
General Specs 3-10 Docking and undocking 2-19
ocean freight cost affected by 3-12 floating in Main Window 2-19
Project Name Freeze Content button 2-18
Project Summary spreadsheet interface, default position 2-10
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-67 relationship to specifications form 2-18,
Project Name field 5-6
creating a new project 2-2 View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46
Project Properties PROVISION
creating a new project 2-3 simulator report preparation 4-13–4-14
editing 3-2 Pump overdesign factor
Project scenarios design criteria specifications 3-37
creating new 2-2 pump sizing 6-24, 6-25
deleting 2-26 Pumps
importing 5-20 design criteria specifications 3-37
opening existing 2-8 sizing 6-1, 6-24–6-26
salvaging 2-27
saving 2-25 Q
unlocking 2-28
Quoted cost item

mapping unsupported models to 2-33 currency/exchange rates 8-9–8-5
Quoted equipment 5-1, 5-8 engineering wage rate 8-6
how relocation works 8-7–8-8
R instructions 8-5–8-6
introduction 1-3
Rate field
rule set 8-9
Remarks field
raw material specifications 3-62
project properties 2-3, 3-2
Rate Units field
Rental requirements
data affected by General Specs 3-11
Re-number command
Raw Material Costs
Run menu 2-22, 5-22, 5-23
Executive Summary spreadsheet 9-86
Re-numbering
areas 5-23
project components 5-22
specifying rate and unit costs 3-60
Report files
Raw Material Escalation
Reporting Assistant 9-88
Report Group and Contractor
9-78
graphical reports 9-42
Report templates
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72
Reporter See Aspen Icarus Reporter
Raw Material Specifications
Reporting Assistant 9-88–9-91
libraries 3-79
Reports
project specifications, Investment
Analysis 3-60
customizing 9-88–9-91
data trending 9-53–9-55
Raw materials
EPC reports 9-58–9-65
escalation 9-29
Excel 9-66, 9-44–9-52
Stream Input worksheet 9-31
HTML 9-43–9-44
Rebar
Item report 9-92
civil installation bulk 5-14
Management reports 9-44
Recent Items folder 5-3
producing 9-11, 9-32, 9-58, 9-92
Reconnect Sink command
Standard reports 9-35–9-42
stream, Process Flow Diagrams (PFD) 4-
Reroute All Streams command
51
Run menu 4-45
Reconnect Source command
Reset button
streams, Process Flow Diagram (PFD) 4-
51
Residence time
Red borders
design criteria specifications 3-41, 3-43,
Component Specifications form 5-7
3-44
Refrigerant 6-9
sizing vessels 6-48
Relation attributes 9-57
Re-Size command
Relocating
project component pop-up menu 4-25, 6-2
confidence level 8-6–8-8
RESULTS workbook
construction wage rate 8-6
countries 8-9

Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9- creating a new project 2-2
16–9-22 importing project scenario 2-6
Royalties See Patents and royalties, Project Scenario reporting
Input worksheet Project Input worksheet 9-24
Run menu 2-22 Scenarios
Run Report command creating 2-2–2-5
File menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34 importing 5-20
opening existing 2-8–2-9
S Schedule
Sales
Project Schedule Data Sheet 9-64
Screens
9-78, 9-79
G&A expenses, investment parameters 3-
sizing 6-26
57
Select a Suffix dialog box 4-27
Select command
Project Basis pop-up menu 3-83
revenue escalation, investment parameters
Select Import Type dialog box 2-7
3-56
Select Simulator Type dialog box 4-15
Salvage Project As dialog box 2-27
Sensor
Salvage Value
instrumentation loop 5-16–5-17
Separation factor
Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71
Show Page Bounds
Salvaging project scenarios 2-27
View menu, BFD 4-22
Save As command
View menu, PFD 4-46
File menu 2-22, 2-25
Signal cabling, instrumentation - installation
Save button
bulks 5-14
toolbar 2-20, 2-25
SimSci's Pro/II with PROVISION
Save command
R/R minimum 3-39
File menu 2-22, 2-25
SimSci's PRO/II with PROVISION
Save Project As dialog box 2-25
map specs 3-34
Save Window States checkbox
models used for tower sizing 6-27
Preferences 2-31
simulator report preparation 4-13–4-14
Saving
Simulator data
cached information 2-27
loading 4-14–4-17
project scenarios 2-25
mapping 4-23–4-30
window states 2-31
unsupported models 2-33
Scan for Errors before evaluation
Simulator File Name
Preferences 2-31
process design specifications 4-16
Scan for Errors command
Simulator reports
Run menu 2-22
Aspen Plus 4-2–4-6
Scan Messages 9-10
ChemCAD 4-6–4-8
Scenario Description
HYSIM 4-8–4-10
HYSYS 4-10
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-68
loading 4-14–4-17
Scenario Name field

preparing 4-2–4-14 Specification files
PRO/II 4-13–4-14 creating 3-80
selecting 4-16 deleting 3-82
supported reports 4-1 duplicating 3-82
Simulator Type importing 3-81
Executive Summary spreadsheet 9-87 introduction 3-79
process design specifications 4-15 modifying 3-81
Project Summary spreadsheet moving to another directory 3-83
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-67 selecting 3-83
Simulator Units of Measure Mapping Specs Specification libraries
libraries 3-79 customizing 3-80–3-82
process design specifications 3-26–3-29 introduction 3-79
selecting defaults 3-79 moving to another directory 3-83
Single Component Summary Report SPECS workbook
Preferences 2-31 Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
Site development 5-1 12–9-16
Size button 6-1, 6-8 Spray condenser
Size Icarus Project Component(s) options tower configurations 4-42, 4-43
Map dialog box 4-25 Spreadsheets
Size Item option 4-49, 6-1 Cashflow (CASHFLOW.ICS) 9-77–9-85
Sizing customizing 9-88–9-91
parameters 3-35, 3-38, 3-40, 3-41, 3-44, Equipment Summary (EQUIP.ICS) 9-66–
3-46 9-67
project components 6-1–6-12 Executive Summary (EXECSUM.ICS) 9-
Sizing Expert 3-48, 4-25, 4-49, 6-1–6-12 85–9-87
Sizing Method field Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-67–
Equipment Model Library (EML) 7-4 9-77
Snap to Grid checkbox viewing investment analysis 9-66
Grid properties 4-47 SQL database
Snap to Grid command exporting to Microsoft Access 9-57
View menu, BFD 4-22 Stairs, steel - installation bulks 5-14
View menu, PFD 4-46 Standard Basis
Soil conditions file, selecting 3-83
General Specs 3-11 input file 3-9
pile type determined by 3-14 input file 3-3
Solid Mass Density Standard reports
Developing Stream specifications form 3- descriptions 9-35, 9-39–9-38
71 navigating 9-36
Solids handling information opening 9-35
design criteria specifications 3-47 printing 9-38
Source searching 9-38
Map dialog box 4-24 Start date, basic engineering
Specification Basis field General Specs 3-11
product specifications 3-66 Starting program 2-1
Rate Units options impacted by 3-63, 3-66 Start-up period, length
raw material specifications 3-62 investment parameters, project basis 3-58

Statements worksheet number of supervisors per shift, Project
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-20 Summary spreadsheet
Status bar 2-10 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-76
View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46 operating unit cost specifications 3-59
Status column schedule-dependent costs, general specs
List view 4-29, 5-4 3-16
Status worksheet wage rate, Project Summary spreadsheet
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-16 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-76
Steam utility 6-9 System administration files
Steel locations, Preferences 2-34
installation bulk 5-14 System cost base data
material costs and man-hours 5-9 Project Summary (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-68
Stream Input worksheet
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9- T
30–9-31
Tax Rate
Analyzer Economics Module (AEM) 9-
22–9-23
9-78
Streams
absolute basis 3-76, 4-50
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-71
basis mode 3-76, 4-50
Taxes
connecting to equipment during sizing 6-
General Specs 3-10
7–6-12
Project Location's affect on 3-12
connectivity, Process Flow Diagram
Technical support
(PFD) 4-48
online 1-8
creating from PFD 4-49–4-50
phone and e-mail 1-9–1-11
creating from Project Explorer 3-68–3-78
Template files
creating to connect to equipment for
sizing 6-3–6-6
Tile command
deleting 3-78, 4-51
Window menu 2-12, 2-24
material 3-64
Time period
modifying 3-68
process 3-66
Timed backup 2-32
Toolbar
relative basis 3-76, 4-50
buttons 2-20
Streams List command
description 2-20
View menu, PFD 4-46
docking 2-20
Suffixes
interface, default position 2-10
mapping 4-26, 4-27
View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46
Supervision
Tools menu 2-24
costs, Project Input worksheet 9-28
Total Manpower Schedule
costs, Project Summary spreadsheet
reports, Icarus Editor 9-62
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-76
Total project cost
loaded wage rate, operating unit cost
specifications 3-59
9-78
Tower configurations

mapping simulator items 4-26, 4-31–4-41, costs 3-48–3-52, 9-77, 9-86
6-29–6-32 escalation 3-56, 9-29, 9-72, 9-78
sizing procedures 6-27–6-41 estimation of usage 3-73
Transducers list of availiable utility resources 6-9
instrumentation loop 5-17 operating unit costs 3-59
Transmitters, instrumentation - installation Stream Input worksheet 9-31
bulks 5-14 Utilities Escalation
Trayed towers Cashflow spreadsheet (CASHFLOW.ICS)
design criteria specifications 3-41 9-78
sizing procedures 6-36 investment parameters, project basis 3-56
Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34, 9- Project Input worksheet 9-29
53, 9-54 Project Summary spreadsheet
Trending database reports 9-53–9-55 (PROJSUM.ICS) 9-72
Utility Specifications
U libraries 3-79
project specifications 3-48
UCL See Unit Cost Library (UCL)
UK country base 2-4–2-5
Utility stream
Unique Project Backup options 2-32
creating 3-48
Unit Cost field
modifying 3-48
Utility Unit Costs
operating unit costs specifications
Unit Cost Library (UCL)
(non-heat transfer utilities) 3-59
adding an item to 7-8
utility specifications (heat transfer
adding UCL item to a project 7-11
utilities) 3-51
creating 7-7
definition 7-1
V
Units of measure
input customization 2-3, 3-5 Vapor disengagement height
output (reports) customization 3-7 towers, design criteria 3-39
project properties 2-3 Version
Project Summary spreadsheet scenario information 2-8
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-68 Vessel
scenario information 2-8 design code, General Specs 3-11
Unit Cost Library (UCL) 7-9 design criteria specifications 3-45–3-47
Units of Measure Specification dialog box diameter, General Specs 3-11
3-27 height to diameter ratio 3-44
Unlock command 2-28 sizing 6-1, 6-42–6-48
Unsupported simulator models View Existing Trend Data command
Preferences 2-33 Trend menu, Aspen Icarus Reporter 9-34,
Update button 9-55
Develop Stream specifications form 3-69 View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46
US country base 2-4–2-5
User Custom Model 5-24–5-28 W
User name
WARNing message 9-10
scenario information 2-8
Web site
Utilities
technical support 1-8

What-You-See-Is-What-You-Get
Window menu 2-24
Window states, saving 2-31
Workbook mode
understanding 2-12–2-13
View menu 2-23, 4-22, 4-46
Workforce reference base
General Wage Rates 3-19
Working capital
9-80
Working capital percentage
9-78
(PROJSUM.ICS) 9-70
WYSIWYG
Y
Yen
currency, General Project Data 2-5
Z
Zenz correlation
dust collector sizing 6-20
Zoom
Block Flow Diagram (BFD) 4-20–4-21
toolbar 2-21

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Aspen Decision

Copyright © 2005 Aspen Technology, Inc. All rights reserved.

Getting Started 2-1

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • iii

Defining the Project Basis 3-1

Loading and Mapping Simulation Data 4-1

iv • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Defining Project Components 5-1

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • v

Sizing Project Components 6-1

Developing and Using Cost Libraries 7-1

vi • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Changing Plant Capacity and Location 8-1

Evaluating the Project 9-19

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Contents • vii

viii • Contents Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

In the face of global competition, you must access a wide range of

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Introduction • 1-1

b. Process model creation modules that enable the user to

c. Ability to import a previously created model in Aspen

d. Ability to modify a model, i.e., the scope of the project,

e. Icarus Evaluation Engine (IEE), for the determination

These capabilities allow you to evaluate the impact of plant

1-2 • Introduction Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Introduction • 1-3

1-4 • Introduction Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Specify Additional Project Component Information

Specify New Areas and Project Components

Run Project Evaluation

Review Capital Cost, Design and Basis, and Other Reports

Review Investment Analysis

Review and Revise AEM

Study Alternative Capacities and/or Locations

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Introduction • 1-5

Run: Analyzer Run: Analyzer Plant

Scaled Scaled, Relocated

Model results, Economic

1-6 • Introduction Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Introduction • 1-7

1-8 • Introduction Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-1

2-2 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Click on the toolbar.

Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-3

5. Enter a Project Description. The description can be up to 500

2-4 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

9. Click OK to accept the modifications and return to the previous

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-5

2-6 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

To import an Analyzer 2.0B project scenario:

Click on the toolbar.

Note: You can create scenarios in project directories other

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-7

2-8 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Click on the toolbar.

In the pictured dialog box,

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-9

This opens the selected scenario.

2-10 • Getting Started Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide

Project Explorer Main Properties

The Icarus interface includes the following features:

Aspen Decision Analyzer User Guide Getting Started • 2-11

Click on the toolbar or click Save on the File menu.